The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About02-56 Norex Site Plan CITY OF PRIOR LAKE INSPECTION NOTICE DATE TIME I.~ ADDRESS 5505 e..nrrotJ l.iJtJoo u..,.Jc OWNER tJo~ CONTR. ~t.Au.s / f'v.JC02.S;J I PHONE NO. PERMIT NO. 0"2. -riB35" SCHEDULED o FOOTING o FOUNDATION o FRAMING o INSULATION !l FINAL o SITE INSPECTION o PLUMBING RJ o MECH RJ o WATER HOOKUP o SEWER HOOKUP o PLUMBING FINAL o MECH FINAL o EXIGRADIFILLING o COMPLAINT o FIREPLACE RJ o FIREPLACE FINAL o GASUNE AIR TST o COMMENTS:~rJir:j ~NA:L f;/2.... GOFQ. , 0 . 15 'O'D - Q.R-\C- l~nu-...er - olE::=- ~ORK SATISFACTORY, PROCEED o CORRECT ACTION AND PROCEED o CORRECT WORK, CALL FOR REINSPECTION BEFORE COVERING ~ Inspector: ..... . Owner/Contr: CALL 447-9850 FOR THE NEXT INSPECTION 24 HOURS IN ADVANCE. CODE REQUIREMENTS ARE FOR YOUR PERSONAL HEALTH & SAFETY! U<SNOT' . , \ \ \' ---"-'~--"-'-"""------""-'--'------'-- -'-",,,,-_. '" .-.......- -------..-.-- / I I I I \ PRIOR LAKE STATE BANK I REVOCABLE LETTER OF CREDIT NO. 1346 C'ty of Prior Lake 1 200 Eagle Creek Avenue P ior Lake, MN 55372 January 10, 2003 EXPIRATION DATE: July 10, 2003 Madame: ior Lake State Bank hereby establishes an Irrevocable Letter of in the amount of Seventy Three Thousand and 00/100 73,000.00) U.S. Dollars in your favor for the period beginning nuary 10, 2003, and expiring July 10, 2003, for the account of rex, Inc. shall be available against your draft at sight on us by the original Letter of Credit. is Letter of Credit sets forth in full terms of our undertaking. ch undertaking shall not in any way be modified, amended or plified by reference to any document, instrument or agreement ferred to herein or in which the Letter of Credit is referred to to which this Letter of Credit relates. Any such reference s all not be amended to incorporate herein by reference any cument, instrument or agreement. ur draft so drawn must bear this clause: "Drawn under Prior Lake ate Bank, Prior Lake, Minnesota, Irrevocable Letter of Credit ted January 10, 2003. hereby agree with the drawers, endorser~ and bona fide holders all drafts drawn on and in compliance with the terms of this c edit that such drafts will be duly honored upon presentation to t e drawee. In connection herewith, we specifically waive our rights (if any) including but not limited to Section 5-122 (1) A & B of the UCC Code, to defer or delay honor of any sight draft. , of Credit is subject to the Uniform Customs and for Documentary Credit (1993 Revision) International Commerce Publication No. 500. ert J. Facen Vi e President Two Loc lions: P,O, Box 69,16677 Dululh Avenue SE, Prior Lake, MN 55372-0369 (952) 447-2101 FAX (952) 447-3337 14033 C mmerce Ave NE, Prior Lake, MN 55372 www.priorlake.com . February 6, 2003 Mr. Denny Minske Kraus-Anderson Construction Company Building Division 2500 Minnehaha Avenue Minneapolis, MN 55404 RE: Norex, 5505 Cottonwood Lane Screening for ground-mounted mechanical equipment Dear Mr. Minske: This letter is to inform you that the above referenced screening plan received by the City of Prior Lake on January 17, 2003, has been approved by the planning department, subject to the following conditions: 1. Screening shall be installed as shown the plan dated December 23, 2002. 2. The plantings shall be guaranteed for one year after project acceptance. I have enclosed a copy of the approved plan for your records, If you have any questions concerning this letter, please feel free to contact me at (952) 447-9813. Sincerely, ~}~ Cynthia R. Kirchoff, . P Planner Enclosure c: Robert Hutchins, Building Official . 16200 Eagle Creek Ave, S.E" Prior Lake, Minnesota 55372-1714 / Ph, (952) 447-4230 / Fax (952) 447-4245 AN EQUAL OPPORTUNITY EMPLOYER KRAUS-ANDERSON CONSTRUCTION COMPANY BUILDING DIVISION n~n\lJ~~ 2500 MINNEHAHA A VENUE, MINNEAPOLIS, MN 5 PHONE (612) 721-7581 FAX (612) 721-2660 JAN 1 7 Z003 Letter of Transmittal By TO: ITY OF PRIOR LAKE INSPECTION DEPT, DATE: 1/16/03 JOB NO: 4568 6200 EAGLE CREEK A VB. SE ATIN: BERNIE FIETI RIOR LAKE, MN 55372 RE: NOREX INC. GENTLEM N: WE ARE S NDING YOU X Attached Under separate cover via The following items: Drawings - - _ Shop - Plans - Samples - Specifications _ Copy fLetter _ Change Orders Other: - - Copies Date Description I 1/02/03 CITY OF PRIOR LAKE INSPECTION REPORT 1 SIGNAGE PERMIT APPLICA nON - $30 CHECK - 3 SIGN PLANS, SHEET AU 3 LANDSCAPE PLAN, SHEET L1 - 3 AlC SCREENING PLAN, SHEET 1 - 12/23/02 1 LANDSCAPE ESTIMATE - SEE BELOW 1 PRIOR LAKE STATE BANK LEITER OF CREDIT 3 AS-BUILT GRADING PLAN, SHEET Cl, REVISED 8/21/02 & 9/16/02 THESEARI TRANSMITTED as checked below: - ForA praval _ Approved as submitted - Resubmit_copies for approval - Fory uruse _ Approved as noted - Submit_copies for distribution Asre uested Returned for corrections _ Retum~rrected prints - - Forre iew & comment _ Returned as requested - Prints returned after loan to us - - Fory ur records - Other: FOR IDS DUE: ,19 REMARKS: V ALUE OF UNCOMPLETED LANDSCAPING IS $58,400 X 125% = $73,000, F lNAL PARKING LOT STRIPING WILL BE COMPLETED AFTER BITUMINOUS WEAR SURFACE n ' SPRING OF 2003, COPY TO: KITTY MAYNARD !TRANS STEVE D )UGHTY .. POPE !TRANS SIGNED: DENNY MINSKE - VICE PRESIDENT If enclosures are not as noted, kindly notifY us at once. -,---- 0--...--..---.-.'......"----..------,...-."'--.... ..',_..... "__ _ ___ _ _.___ ___" ____ ..__,,_._~__,..__.__m_.___'__~ ~ ......__ .------- ---- PRIOR LAKE STATE BANK I REVOCABLE LETTER OF CREDIT NO. 1346 C ty of Prior Lake 1 200 Eagle Creek Avenue P ior Lake, MN 55372 January 10, 2003 EXPIRATION DATE: July 10, 2003 Madame: ior Lake State Bank hereby establishes an Irrevocable Letter of edit in the amount of Seventy Three Thousand and 00/100 73,000.00) U.S. Dollars in your favor for the period beginning nuary 10, 2003, and expiring July 10, 2003, for the account of rex, Inc. is credit shall be available against your draft at sight on us companied by the original Letter of Credit. is Letter of Credit sets forth in full terms of our undertaking. ch undertaking shall not in any way be modified, amended or lified by reference to any document, instrument or agreement referred to herein or in which the Letter of Credit is referred to to which this Letter of Credit relates. Any such reference 11 not be amended to incorporate herein by reference any ument, instrument or agreement. r draft so drawn must bear this clause: "Drawn under Prior Lake te Bank, Prior Lake, Minnesota, Irrevocable Letter of Credit ed January 10, 2003. We hereby agree with the drawers, endorserD and bona fide holders of all drafts drawn on and in compliance with the terms of this cr dit that such drafts will be duly honored upon presentation to th drawee. In connection herewith, we specifically waive our ri hts (if any) including but not limited to Section 5-122 (1) A & B f the UCC Code, to defer or delay honor of any sight draft. s Letter of Credit is subject to the Uniform Customs and ctices for Documentary Credit (1993 Revision) International er of Commerce Publication No. 500. FAX (952) 447-3337 www.priorlake.com .. LAN-OE-CON Ne. p, g, .Box 308 , EJ<<.?e1S!O.T" _t.iili~esoia 5~,31(95~}<I74-~60 ,~~~ .. ' ' .- ESTIMATE SUe: Norex - Prior Lake, MN Date: 11/21/2002 Name: Kraus-Anderson/Building Division Address: 2500 Minnehaha Ave. Mpls., MN 55404 1256 SIZE1UNrr~1T PRICEl TOTAL ] --AcerrutinJl1! 'North-WOOd~ j, 2.5" B~_j .-- i338:~ ~..__ S1,352_~ :/a~~~YP!'y'~~:ja~~~~::;:~;t ._~~;: _' ..;::: I~'- :~:~~:~1 Quen;us Pa/ustris 2,5" BB I $338.00 $2,386_00 J __'n -------- uQiierouS PBlustrisT 3,5' B8 I $543.00 I --s1:629.ool -- ,--.--,----, ' ----- '1--- ...-- ,---I. ill n ,___._ ____,_ Q~rcus ~ubta_ 3.5' BB _ 1_ $~~.OO .~~086:0~1 TiNa Cordata 'Greenspire' , 2.5" BB I $320.00 i $2,240,00 . -----" . ,--,---. ----'-- -- ..----, ------ '.~..-..-.--'l Acer ginnala ' 6' BB: $191,00 $2,101.00 ... ~::::::~::~::~~:~~:~;::t ;:~'::,'-I: :~~~~~-=r '$2$::~:; .., ==:~~"~:=~=~:~:::::, -1:~':: ~" ~~~:::l:~:-:)-t::~l, ---.."..,,"-.,... ----, -,.. , ..,~-'-_.._tj Prunus Maac~r 2" B8' $279.00 $55B.ooj P~C!~_GlaucaDell~ta --6;U $257.00 __ ---$5-;39~.00 ---- _ . ~;-~:~:~:=:: ,;:~: '-'---~~~~l__~~;~:' ___ P/cea?!!..~~I!~~,~:_BB L..__!4~~~~ $1'293,O~ Cotoneaster Apicutatus, #2 CONT I $33.00 $462.00 Splmea X Buma/da 'Dart's Red' I #2 CONT $29~ $522,00 ' Pinus Muflhr! 'Tannenb8um~15 CONT -- S359...:.~~L -,.- '$359,~~ Taxus Cuspidata 'Capitate' 4' BB $213.00 $1,917,00 -. ---. Estimate #: ----- --.-- TOllE ON COMPLETION: THEREAFTER A FINANCE CHARGE OF 1.5% PER MONTH WlLL BE ADDED TO All BALANCES DUE. THIS IS AN ANNUAL PERCENTAGE RATE OF 18%. Page 1 of 3 ITEM -. .---. ." +.------ , I f. -_____.___ -----....- I 7 ' Oak, Pin ---------- --.--.-- --- 3 Oak, Pin . --.--...-----.--- ----- .------ , 2 Oak,Hed n,'___' ' __. I - 7 Unden, Greenspire 1---- . -. ._-." -----. ----.. I 11. Maple, Amur Clump '-11'1 servicebE;r.y;Aulumn Brlliiarice--- '~--_..,--"--'-_._- ,--".-- I 2 Serviceberry, Aulumn Br~liance .-- - ---- - .. ---- S Hawthom, Thomless ,--- 31 Hawthom, Thomless- ,--_..,.. .- [--- __ 2 i Chokecherry, Amur 21 Spruce, Black Hills --_.- -~--"--'-----'- ~!_~. S~~, Blac~.!'i,i~_____,_ _ _" 3 Spruce, !3.1~~k Hills__ 3 ' Spruce, Black Hills --.----....---..-.----..-- 14 : Colooeaster, Cranberry RB Spirea, Dart's Red _, Pine, Mug,o Tannenbaum ~_,~.~ew, Japane~e_~pright .__ TERMS OF PA YMENT: QTYI - ~::~~~~~~= 3 . Oak, SWamp White It) It) ~ \\) .... I'- .... N ~ '" ~ u Z H Z o u W R Z o z ii:" co ~ & Q t1 t '" , :'l':':: ~ .------. --' -. LAN-OE-CON Ne. - -- - -.. - -. P. O. Box 308 Excelsior,.M!!?il~~, ~.f)33!J~~?)474~2260 F~ !952~7~:Q~55 r'--'-- ESTIMATE .-. --_.. $16.00 $2,528.00 $16.00 $2,400.00 $16:00 $1 ,424:00 I --- -- $16.00 , $1,312,00 -,- $2~00 F' no $580.00 . _ ...___.' _~___ .. _.. .._ _...._...___._1 ,In : $1.95 $1,931.00 j .",--- "-1"-- 1"...'....-'--- .--,-_... sq I $0.75 ; $2,354.00 ..=1 sq J ~=-~u~:80 1", _,.._.!2,91~.oO i sq.) : $1.95 : $16,481.00 ---1---- .-" - sq $1~. $1,950.00 sq, __u.'$~~ $8,512,00- CU,) $40,00 ' $600.00 - ' Ib: $11.14 $2.963.00 . , ---acres $2.571.43 '-$2,7oo.0~J -- ~--- LS $12,900.00 $12,900.00 -- __--2..._.__....,. -.-"-1--'. .-----, , _ __..._.....J $1 ,590.00 $2,852.00 $900.00 $246,00 $768.00 $1,328,00 $53.00 $62.00 $2.00 $2.00 ---..-- $16.oo_L $16.00 Picas abies 'Nidiformis' #5 CONT --- Taxus X Media 'Taunton' #5 CONT Ajuga replans 'Alropurpllre8' each -. --- Pachysandra TerminaJis 'Green Carpet' __..._.l:lach --t- Hoste 'Frosted Jade" #1 CONT -. ---'- Hosla 'June' #1 CONT ~-- ---.... 30 Spruce, Birds Nesl 46 YeN. Taunton 450 : Bligieweed. Atropurpurea -: 4.Pack ------ 123 Spurge, Green Carpet. 4-Pack - ...-.--.-------. ..---. 48 Hosta, Frosted Jade ---- 83 Hosla, June rl rl .. (l) .. ,.. .. N .. o(J .. Haste'Liberty' #1 CONT Haste 'Pau/'s Glory' I #1 CONT ... ._-- Hoste 'Robert Frost' #1 CONT --.-.----- -- Hoste tokudama 'FlavocJrcinalis' #1 CONT __._.__.._. ___u. __ ._ each -.-.--. --------- .--' Hosta, Liberty 15() : Hosla, Paul's Glory -89: Hosta, Robert Frost 82 Hosta, Flavocircll1alis -. ---- 290 Impatiel1S - 4-Pack 990 --- --.--.-- .--------- _._-----~- DUE ON COMPLETION: THEREAFTER A RNANCE CHARGE OF 1.5% PER MONTH WILL BE ADDED TO ALL BALANCES DUE. THIS IS AN ANNUAL PERCENTAGE RATE OF 18%. Page 2 of 3 --------------. Edger --.-----. .- .-... ._--~ 3138Iwoo~~ulch ,_" .", "___.__ 3640 l.~_C~_M.~l:~__, 84521~d ,.._....,. ,_,' 111 . Mexican Beach Pebbles Installed .--- rtYllrds"- 266 : Kasota Stolle Planters 15 Soil for Planters ------ 266 4-4-4 Slow Release Fertilizer ~ 1.05 Seed - - , Sile Irrigation -Including COUl .__ _.w.._____._.._._..._____ : Thank You! Jim Keller --. -.. TERMS OF PAYMENT: u Z H Z o U III " Z <[ .J I: Il. m It) .. N (l) :l Z l- N (l) I .. N I )- o z 1i? '" ~ hi Q N q :> :Q; z . ~ -------- ---. LAN-OE-CON NC. i P. O. Box3oe Excelsior, Minnesota 55331 (952)47~i260 -Fax(952j474~o155 I . " . .___m' , ,... un_ ..' -.- .---.-, ",,---"--- . r----- f ESTIMATE . Total $100,580.00 __ _._..___ Deposit: $0,00 Lan-OIl-Con Slgnafll.. Completion: $100,580.00 GUARANT~ -.. We IMll .....upply once, alii....... sI1n.t>s, and e""'ll"""'" wllid1 fall 10 grow hough Ihe fi,ol12 monlls, prOl'ided tile planlS have re<eivod proper ca.. and wa1erlng end !he payment of the acoounl was nade when due. We assume no responslbiily for damage cause<I by wfnlor Injury, animals, machl""'Y, caeIossn_, ""ndallsm, ete. A 30 day wananty shaJ apply to al 'lines. !POl"l co....., '0...., peremlals and planls plan1ecl n above ground plan1efs, -+-- - CUslo""" Signalure Balance Due on Dale DUE ON CI 'PLETION: THEREAFTER A FINANCE CHARGE OF 1.5"10 PER MONTH WILL BE ADDED TO ALL BALANCES DUE. THIS IS AN ANNUAL PERCENTAGE RATE OF 1B%. Page30f 3 TERMS OF PAYMENT: NI rl rl .. m .. I- .. N .. <J) .. o z ~ z o o 11l R Z <J: .J :E: n. (l\ III .. N m ::> :r l- N m I .. N I :)- o z g; '" Ai o ~ ).: .0 ~. ~ -----. LAN-IE-CON NC. ___ . . ___ . ____ __._ __ .... . _ _H_ P. (): Box 308 Excel!i()r! ~~n!.sota ..s.5~31,J9S~1~74-2260 Fax ESTIMATE ... .. Norex . Prior lake, MN 11/21120112 Site: Date: Name: Kraus-AndersonlBuflding Division Address: 25110 Minnehaha Ave. Npls., MN 55404 Estimate #: 966 TOTAL $100,580.00 SIZEIUN.!!IUNIT PRICE $100,580.00 ITEM Q~ 1 Total: $132,1l65.o0 +----- - DeposIt: $0.00 Lan-De-Con Signature ------.--- Balance Due on Completion: $132,Il65.00 GUARAI/l:EE: ---,-,. ,-- w. willr&<llJpply once. all ""es, shrubs. and """'greens which falla grll'N ItrOlllto lI1e fhll12 monllls. provided the p1..ls h3'\/e receNed proper care and "'Ie~ng and l1e paymenl of lie accounl."'" made ..hen cl<Je. We .....me no reopon.ibilly lor dal11alll' caused by wlnler injury, animals, machillOry. carele....eo.. vendai.m, elc, A 30 day warranty shall apply Ie all vines, ground """''5, 10.... perennial. and pi lilts p1anled in above ground plamers, $1,750,00 S29,735,oo.., j .~_.__. -. Betula PffItyphylla Japonica Whitespire' 12-14' BB 5350.00 _~__,~~-~ ~~ =-- --, :_~' t~~.f1~:j- $~~:~5 C BASE BID - As per Estimate #1256 ADDS 10 Base Bid: Bircl1. Whitespire Clump Pavers Thank You! Jim Kener 5 1900 Ul Ul .. IS) 'l' ,. 'l' N .. '" .. -oate-I CUstOmer SignatUre-- TERMS OF PA YMENT: NE'T.QILE ON COMPL, ~ THEREAFTER A FINANCE CHARGE OF 1.5% PER MONTH WILL BE ADDED TO ALL BALANCES DUE. THIS IS AN ANNUAL PERCENTAGE RATE OF 18%. Page 1 Df u Z M Z o U III j:l Z o z - r I V\ - -4 m "a r- )> Z V\ -4 C C -< -g ~ o -g 1+ ~ ... al m VIe 0 u,~ 0 VI 0 "" 0_ "" IIIZ n """ m ... '. = ~ . II ~ ... z 0 0 ;;0 0 -i I -g )> ~ ....... "" VI - ....... Z ... " 0 0 1+ 0 "'-l III VI "" ....... n )> ~ III S it if I Z if 0 2:: ~ ~a alm ~i ~ eX ~O . ~ 0"" ~!H !ii'~ ... "-C- --, '1 r,.:-' 1<" (r:> It::' 0 \\" f'" I !! [\~\ @. ~ L5,. ,Ii) l~~,! : ill) r-:- ' " ,',! I .ll. - 2 3m 'i II i 'I' I 'i I. "\ , '8J' , '" . I'V' J' I I , I ' POPE ASSOCIATES 1,2002 Architects Rob rt Hutchins Buil ing Official Cily f Prior Lake 162 0 Eagle Creek Ave, S, E, Prio Lake, MN 55372 Interior Designers Re: Responses to Preliminary Plan Review Letter Dated June 14, 2002 Norex Office Building 15505 Cottonwood Lane Prior Lake, Minnesota PAl Project 41400-02047 Dea Robert, The ollowing ilems are responses to lhe Preliminary Plan Review Comments dated June 14, 2002, (Attached for Reference) Setbacks have been indicated on Construction Issue Set dated 6/17/02, Fire lane sign age has been indicated on Construction Issue Set dated 6/17102, The interior courtyards are "maintenance yards" and will not be permanently landscaped, Energy Envelope Calculations will be submitted at a future date via the design build Mechanical contractor, These drawings will be submitted at a future date via the design build contraclors, Irrigation plans and details will be submitted at a future date via the design build landscape contractor. The domeslic waler shutoff valve has been located in the city-right-of.way as per lhe resubmitted sheel C-1 daled 7-01.02, Irrigation plans and details will be submitted at a future date via the design build landscape contractor. (It is inlended that there will be separate irrigation service and melering,) A signed Special Slructural Testing and Inspections Schedule has been submitted with the Construction Issue Specification dated 6/17/02, 10, Siamese connection and enunciator panels have been located by front entrance as per attachment PR1-A4 dated 7/01/02, 11. Draft-stops have been provided as indicated on Construction Issue Set dated 6/17/02. 12, Venlilation specifications and calculations have been indicated on Construction Issue Set dated 6/17/02, 13, The Mechanical contractor ventilation design will meet UBC chapter 12 requirements, 1255 Energy Park Drive St, Paul, MN 55108-5118 Phone: (651) 642-9200 Fax: (651) 642-1101 4. Refer to revised plans and hardware specification as indicated within Construction Issue Set and Specification dated 6/17/02, 5, Side grab bar elevations have been provided as indicated within Construction Issue Set dated 6/17/02, 6, Attic access door detail has been provided as per attachment PR1-A17, 7, Draft stop details have been provided as per attachment PR#1-A 17, 8, Fire Department lock box will be installed at front entry as per city standards, 9, Soil bearing design values have been indicated wilhin Construction Issue Specification dated 6/17/02, 0, Fire extinguishers have been provided as indicated within Construction Issue Set daled 6/17/02, The bove-menlioned responses are accompanied by the following attachment: -1 Grading, Utility and Erosion Control Plan (Re-issued, Dated 7/01/02) chitectural rchitectural PR#1-A4 (Dated 7/01/02) PR#1-A17 (Dated 7/01/02) It is Pope Associates Inc. underslanding that these responses salisfy lhe request for addit onal informalion as per the preliminary review letter prepared by the City of Prior Lake dale June 14, 2002. Rob rt, if any additional information should be required, please feel free to contact me at 651- 642- 200, Sinc rely, POP ASSOCIATES, INC. ----... ) cc: Tom Ditty Denny Minske Brian Mundstock Bob Mueller Richard Johnson PAl File Norex Kraus-Anderson Sunde Engineering, Inc, Insites McConkey Johnson Soltermann, Inc, G:\41 00\02047\cOIT\CityLtr7 -0 1-02,doc " NORTH ARC mm INTERIOR DE fGNERS R~i,ioos:0III.IIl.m~7 Orllll1bJ 1101, PAIl "'M 7/01/02 ASSOCIATES ""r...1lG'f OoorvE Sdhu~ M 5101."'. PH. 'l&o.l.':WO FAAI<i')641_""' OFFICE BUILDING PRIOR lAKE, MN SbetlpRl_A4 - - -J vilE o~ e. -"" , I "q U ~TYDY . I" :::: 1&:>0" r~_':-r", rr:> f~ n\v;-r;"7'J ii'~\\~"'_L1Ub", ! 'l.; I .. ' I,f, i .ll - 2 am iilli "~I, 'V'" 1,1 ,'l/ I ,U l ii, i POPE ASSOCIATES July 1, 2002 Architects Rob rt Hutchins Build ng Official City f Prior Lake 1620 Eagle Creek Ave, S, E, Prior Lake, MN 55372 Interior Designers Re: Responses to Preliminary Plan Review Letter Dated June 14, 2002 Norex Office Building 15505 Cottonwood Lane Prior Lake, Minnesota PAl Project 41400-02047 Dear Robert, The f IIowing items are responses to the Preliminary Plan Review Comments dated June 14,2002, (Attached for Reference) 1 Setbacks have been indicated on Construction Issue Set dated 6/17/02, 2, Fire lane signage has been indicated on Construction Issue Set dated 6/17/02, 3, The inlerior courtyards are "maintenance yards" and will not be permanently landscaped, 4, Energy Envelope Calculations will be submitted at a future date via the design build Mechanical contractor, 5, These drawings will be submitted at a future date via the design build contractors, 6, Irrigation plans and details will be submitted at a future date via the design build landscape conlractor. 7. The domestic water shutoff valve has been located in the city-right-of-way as per the resubmitted sheet C-1 dated 7-01-02. 8, Irrigalion plans and details will be submitted at a future date via the design build landscape contractor. (It is intended that there I('ill be separate irrigation service and metering,) 9. A signed Special Slructural Testing and Inspections Schedule has been submitted wilh the Conslruction Issue Specification dated 6/17/02, 1 . Siamese connection and enunciator panels have been located by front entrance as per attachment PR1-A4 dated 7101/02, 11. Draft-stops have been provided as indicated on Construction Issue Set dated 6/17102, 1 ,Ventilation specifications and calculations have been indicated on Construction Issue Sel dated 6/17/02, 13, The Mechanical contractor ventilation design will meet UBC chapter 12 requirements, 1255 Energy Park Drive St, Paul, MN 55108-5118 Phone, (651) 642-9200 Fax. (651) 642-1101 14. Refer to revised plans and hardware specification as indicated within Construction Issue Set and Specification dated 6/17/02, 15. Side grab bar elevations have been provided as indicated within Construction Issue Sel dated 6/17/02, 16, Attic access door detail has been provided as per attachment PR1-A17, 17, Draft stop delails have been provided as per attachment PR#1-A17, 18, Fire Department lock box will be installed at front entry as per city standards, 19, Soil bearing design values have been indicated within Construction Issue Specification dated 6/17/02, 0, Fire exlinguishers have been provided as indicated within Construclion Issue Sel dated 6/17/02. The bove-mentioned responses are accompanied by the following attachment: -1 Grading, Utility and Erosion Control Plan (Re-issued, Daled 7/01/02) rchiteclural rch itectu ral PR#1-A4 (Dated 7/01/02) PR#1-A17 (Dated 7/01/02) It is Pope Associates Inc, understanding that these responses satisfy lhe request for addit onal information as per the preliminary review letter prepared by the City of Prior Lake date June 14, 2002, Rob rt, if any additional information should be required, please feel free to contact me at 651- 642- 200. Sine rely, POP ASSOCIATES, INC. --.... ,) cc: Tom Ditty Denny Minske Brian Mundstock Bob Mueller Richard Johnson PAl File Norex Kraus-Anderson Sunde Engineering, Inc, Insites McConkey Johnson Soitermann, Inc, G:\41 00\02047\corr\CityLtr7 -0 1-02,doc 'I~ "-,,', B~' ~ H'-2'1 --- ;..; --? 10'-6"/ :,'-<;J"" 10'-1" (@ ! OFACE 1 :," 01 '" ~ALlGN ~. ~ [ 'G_ \gff $\ G ir> WAm~NG I I ,----- ~~ - - 11031 10A <:7 ;I I~ 1 ~ I I AS.1 3'-10' 5'-4" 4'-B" ;, ~' FFC : , ~ IB-~~- - ~J I ----l C.u,~, L- 81 J 'I '- 1 All, 'A;.1JI -i----j.!L:1 . ~ Im-o" -' ~ ,,~ ~ J il~ VEST. \{lSb = LOBBY : ~I ~ ~ ~ ~ I : IYl D:QTI r6 ~ ITill i ;:: ~_.L;' ::'-2"B'_0" :-,.5" 12'-3" ;,i 3'-4" I '" IL___~ /x----...... U) 1'-2'C-!: r:. I ./11~ ~ 3'-10"- " :"-4" 4'-B" .... ,( ~-T,II\(3V2\\'M, '....c. _~ ~ ;, f'r ~ /1l ~ I;, i 1 '1'" ~L~<;J9'-6" ~ ;" .,..-r- ~.TV I ^_~ /-1~ AL~N~,> ;.r-... 'I' Ii G - {}IV--' ~V/~G ~. "~ ~.~ ( SIAMESE ____.......--:V ./-1 C\..; 1 "'-[192]1 ......., RQBAARY . > CONNECTI PN __ ~ _ ..~:I . [IE]"""" ' -r,gf1 ( ENUNCIATe R ..____V i::J )"AS.1J I' 1'-2~~ S FD :," ~~ FANEL '\l '" '-..-/ I, 4'-0" ! 6'-11" 3'- . '-B ~ '-10" 3'-10" ~ r ii, I r::\ .......1'5" I> '5"/ XlTr~ ~--- 1 ''6 I P38 / J@)'iJU@)\ '" i I - III "- .... -:4A'LLWAY :J ~ I ~j &--'" @TI ~ A. '\ @ CLASSROOM :;;. . I!e:Y '- f1931 ~ ~ I~ ,;, t '" , ~ .. ;. At.. 4'-0" 9, f 4 '\.. g"'l~ b ~ ~ , C':\ ;" ~ CONC, STOPF WI FROST FNC , -SEE STRUP, 11'\..~ \W~ ~~ \~ t::::\ I~ .... , /v ~ ,,! \ '-" ~ ~ d~ ~ ~ ....., "" nF ~r 1"\ F=LOOR PLAN - ~1 1. 8w-1'-Ow /1"\ \J NORTH ~ AR HITECTS INTERIOR DE lGNERS R~isioos: 0lII. III, ~14[":I2Q41 PAt1 ~""b, _ llal, 7/01/02 'lS.E~~ P.t.A.:;o..r.. sr_!l\U~t-1~ ~:~::~;: r"" ')642-"0' OFFICE BUILDING PRIOR LAKE, MN II 5'eelpRl_A4 -------1-----, I" INSUL. PREFIN, MET, ATTIC ACCESS PANEL UJI i-IINGE, LATCi-I DEVICE, SELF CLOSING SPRING DEvICE AND CONT SMOKE SEAL AT FRAME PERIMETER / / A mc ACCESS 000 , /OET AIL 11/2'-1'-0' ) > ASPi-IAL T Si-IINGLES, OVER FEL TSI ICE AND UJATER S!-4IELD , 5/8" PL YWD S!-4EAmING, PREFAB RIDGE VENT , ' II i i i 5/8" PL YUD S!-4EA mlNG, (i-IOLD S!-4EATi-IING BACK FROM RIDGE AT VENTED AREAS) 5/B" PL YUD S!-4EA Ti-IING, (EXTEND S!-4EAmING TO RIDGE AT DRAFT STOP) / > 5/B" GYP, BD UID TRUSSES BY TRUSS SUFFLlER > '" , ;:::::::-:>:><";;':'.;'0"}:l': ,...:::;;:;;: 22"X30" CLR MIN, 1l>5(N'IIGYRo"" S'.R\u~ MN\~Hlll. 118 Pli.16,'1641_JOO F""IM'I64Zl10' OFFICE BUILDlNG PRIOR lAKE, MN ~ o o ~ ~ o N o OET AIL 11/2' 1'-0' IUD TRUSSES BY TRUSS SUPPLIER 112" PLYWOOD BOX (NSUL, STOP AT ,PERIMETER Of OPENING, ( I "-;6" BLOJN-IN INSUL, ~ ( 112" GYP, BD lleti,ioos: (lII/, III, m~1 PRt1 hllb, NPIoA IIole 7/01/02 s~epR1_A17 JUL, 9,2002 3:36PM POPE ASSOCIAT~S iN' NO, 4573 p, 1/7 POPE ASSOCIATES Today's Date r- ~-rpz.. 1256 Energy Park Drive St. Paul. Mjnneso~a 5510B~S1 18 PHONE (6511 642 9200 FAX [651] 64< 1101 FAX T ANSMITT AL ~.__. -" 7~"''''-''ft.~ l'..."Ji---..---.~'i~:~~~r~-'IHi..."-.,-,.--P---H l~"----'- .,."'...~,._.. ,-- Q~~j-'--.J1:!IE.L.-1Mo/l,.I----'j--.. "..~:A~.._"..,,"_.,~_......._..,. ttn.:,_.. ._",'(&~l_...~i"1~-,..,.",~rOjecl:."--,,..k'?'~X-......___.,.._.______._.... ax#: 'i'Z---o/I11- 1.J7'1~ ~ob No.: \ 0/1'-100 -OZD~7 ,,-'-' ~..,~~~'-----".'} of pag.;!--""=j---"--' f:J: J ~-~~;.;:- .__....._ _...."......,.._..,._,.........."...____. ......,. ._....,,'_.......___.......,_,_..___..~._..._....._J L TO FOLLOW BY MAIL: ~eK\ , I' ~t.V11::. 00';,( Copy To: Signed: c~~ If there a, any problems receiving this lax please conlaCl: G:\FORMSIF Covershee\,doc JUL, g, 002 3:36PM POPE ASSOCIAT~S IN~ NO, 4573 P 'l in , U I I I' I I POPE ASSOCIATES Architects Interior Designers Robe Hutchins Build 9 Official Cily f Prior Lake 162 Eagle Creek Ave. S, E. Prior ake, MN 55372 Re: Responses to Preliminary Plan Review Letter Daled June 14, 2002 Norex Office Building 15505 Cottonwood Lane Prior Lake, Minnesota PAl Project 41400-02047 Dear Robert, The ollowing items are responses to the Preliminary Plan Review Comments dated June 14, 2002. (Attached for Reference) Energy Envelope Calculations will be submitted at a future dale via the design build Mechanical contractor. A signed Special Structural Testing and Inspections Schedule will be delivered by Norex, 1, Draft-slops have been provided as per attachment PR2-A1 2. Revised ventilation specifications and calculations for each of the attic spaces have been indicated as per attachment. 6, An attic access door detail has been provided as per attachments PR2-A2 7. Clarification of the extends of the ridge vent and draft stops has been provided as per attachmenl PR2-A1 8, Doors 122A and 1688, whi<;h acceSS the North and Soulh Maintenance Areas, shall have signage located on the door that reads: "Service Personnel Only". The bove.menlioned responses are accompanied by the following attachment: Revi ed Nel Free Ventilation Area Calculalions (Dated 7/08/02) Arc ~ectural PR2-A1 (Dated 7/08/02) Ar itectural PR2-A2 (Dated 7/08/02) 1255 Energy Park Drive St. Paul, MN 55108-5118 Phone: (651) 642-9200 Fax: (651) 642-1101 JUL, g, 002 3:37PM POPE ASSOClAES NO, 4573 P 3/7 It is ope Associates Inc, understanding that these responses satisfy the request for additional info alion as per the preliminary review letter prepared by the City of Prior Lake date June 14, 2002. Rob rt, if any additional information should be required, please feel free 10 contact me at 651- 42-9200. ASSOCIATES, INC, -J cc: Tom Ditty Denny Mlnske Brian Mundstock Bob Mueller Richard Johnson PAl File Norex Kraus-Anderson Sunde Engineering, Inc, Insiles McConkey Johnson Soltermann, Inc, G:\4 400\02047\corr\CityLtr7-08.02,doc i JUL. 9,2002 3:37PM - ""I. [' "J: ."" :r ,61- ,,:0 !I. .. I -~'J'n I, ;,1: ,..., Tc':5:~ ' , T TOM.I. " -:,1'[ . ,:' .:,_.cC, ~ , :::;r X'-r ;1:\ J:~~rfr~ .....,........,.. . l. ~ '.)"-r~l R";si..,,ID/j, Ill, 4HCIHI1~1 ~..b, Dol, PRt2 ..,. 7/t;rlfO'l. OFFICE BuaDING PRIOR L\KE, ,MN ~"'pR2-A1 JUL. 9, 002 3: 37PM POPE ASSOCIATES IEC I I I ::t . ~ x p ~ ',: '" ~ " '';- :) /; , I I I .g , BENT !'>TL PLATE THRESHOLD " ' , NO, 4573 p, 5/7 / !:olIO" TTF "x" GYP 6D. 110 6LK!:. AS REGP 2'-b'X4'''''X 3 314" Hn. Fli!AME WI !'>MOKE GASKET KIT AND !'>IlEEP 21_611W X 4'_"\1 j..j WD. DOOR. SELF-CLOSING SFI'1ING LOADED HINGES. PJsH PJLL HARDWARE ,I "BATT I SOL, TRUe E5 6 TFilJ 5UPFLIE ( !'<IF,.. IN I-IEAD C EA E) ....,.>:. ~ DETAIL 5.3 11/2--1'-0- OFFICE BUlLDJNG PRIOR lAKE. r ~N 11 RIII.I..:IDII.II, 4!l1JHl1lM) .... ~, 0,1, -- - 7J~ ~R2-A2 JUL, g, 002 3: 38PM Rob rt Hutchins Buil ing Official City f Prior Lake 162 Eagle Creek Ave. S, E. Prio Lake, MN 55372 Re: Net Free Ventilation Area Nore:< Office Building 5505 Cottonwood Lane Prior Lake, Minnesota PAl Projoct: 41400-02047 rRobert, POPE ASSOCIATES I On ahaif of Norex tne" Pope Associates is submitting for your records, ANt Free Ventilation Area Summary~ Cal ulations: Tot I North Attic Area: Re uired NFVA: ulred Ridge Venting: ided Ridge Venting: uired Soffit Venting: ,Pr 'Iidod Soffit Venting: 8,497 s.f, (8,497 x .0033) ~ 28,04 s.t. NFVA (28,04 sJ, x 144 sq. in.) = 4,037,76 sq, in. NFVA (28.04 s.f. x 0.5) = 14.02 5.1./2,018.88 sq. in. NFVA (207 L.f, X 18.5 sq, in.) = 3,829.5 sq. in. NFVA (28.04 X 0.5) = 14,02 5.1./2.018.88 sq, in. NFVA (471 L.f. x 10.25 sq, in.) = 4,827,75 sq. in. NFVA NO, 4573 P 6/7 POPE ASSOCIATES Architects Interior Designers 1255 Energy Park Drive St. Paul. MN 55108-5118 phone: (651) ,642.920D Fax: (651),642.1101 JUL, g, 002 3: 38PM Tata Core Attic Area: Req ired NFVA: Req ired NFVA sq, in.: Req ired Ridge Venting: Pro ided Ridge Venting; Req ired Soffit Venting; Req ired NFVA sq, in,: Re uirsd Ridge Venting: Pro ided Ridge Venting; Re uired Soffit Venting: Pro ided Soffit Venting; POPE ASSOCIATES j NO, 4573 P 7/7 5,307 .J. (5,037 x ,0033) = 16,62 s,f, NFVA (16,62 sJ. x 144 sq, In.) = 2.393,58 sq, in, NFVA (16.62 s.f, x 0.5)" 8.31 s.f./1,196.64 sq. in. NFVA (104 L.f. x 18.5 sq, in,)" 1,924 sq. in, NFVA (16.62x 0.5) = 8,31 s.f. J 1,196.64 sq. in. NFVA (137 L.f. x 10.25 sq. in.) = 1,404.25 sq, in. NFVA 6,3955,(, (6,395 x .0033) "21,105,(, NFVA (21,10 s.t. x 144 sq. in,) = 3,038.90 sq, in. NFVA (21.10 sJ. x 0,5) = 10,5 5,1./1,519.2 sq. in. NFVA (161 L.f. x 18.5 sq, in,) = 2,978,5 sq. in. NFVA (21.10 x 0,5)" 10,5 s,(./1,519.2 sq, in. NFVA (352 LJ. x 10.25 sq. in.) " 3,608 sq. in. NFVA please feel free to call me at 651-642-9200 or via e-mail o earch,com with any questions regarding this submittal. cc: Tom Ditty Denny Minske PAl File Norex Kraus-Anderson G: 1400\0204 ileorIIY entC.lc6-13-02.doc CO/fJltN@ <::; Y1 IlIJr<7 'Bul!ci;iy [;;1 'Ie. IIJr:a/ Sfjnv1 Svrvt-y i N ur/l -10 /)()f e ConL /JfJlfm. Ne,erJ -10 ~ M,l c4'iCont-4pmrJ. {omrrlly /al hers (;/lw4e, 5trv/ce n e)(t -Iv f',~~ hyA/'tfn-t, Z. CITY OF PRIOR LAKE ORe PROJECT REVIEW CHECKLIST PROJECT NAME: NOREX SITE PLAN An applicalion for site plan approval for lhe development of a 16,000 square foot office building, APPLICANT: Norex PROJECT ENGINEERS: Nalhan Mlesen, Pope Architecls 651-642-9200 CONTACT PERSON: Tom Ditty, Norex 447-8854 SITE INFORMATION PID#: 25-296-002-0 LOCATION: 5505 Cottonwood Lane This property is located in the Waterfront Passage Business Park on lhe soulhwesl side of Cottonwood Lane, north of Adelmann Slreet. EXISTING ZONING: C-5 COMPREHENSIVE PLAN: C-BO PROJECT REQUEST: Review site plan, DISTRIBUTE TO: D APPLICATION FOR: . Frank Boyles ~ Adminislralive Land Division . Sue Walsh Comprehensive Plan Amend, . Ralph Teschner Condilionai Use Permit . Chris Esser . Fire Chief Home Occupalion . Bob Hutchins . Bill O'Rourke Rezoning . Don Rye . Sile Plan Jane Kansier Preliminary Plat PUD DNR - Pat Lynch . Minnegasco Final Plat County Hwy, Dept. Watershed Dist. Variance MNDOT . Teiephone Co. Vacation SMDC . Electric Co. Mediacom Cable Met. Council Date Received 4/24/02 Date Distributed 5/3102 Date Due 5/17102 Complete Application 5/3/02 Date Distributed to 5/3/02 DRC Meeting 5/23/02 Date DRC Publication Date NA Tentative PC Date NA Tentative CC NA Date 60 Day Review Date 7/3/02 Review Extension I :\02files\02siteplan\norex\referral,doc Page 1 . ----_.~--_._-,-- "----.-...--.,-----.---. ~ POPE ASSOCIATES 1255 Energy Park Drive SI. Paul, MN 55108-5118 PHONE [651] 642 9200 , FAX [651] 642 1101 LE ~TER OF TRANSMITTAL I~",G"'L~'" , To: City of Prior lake Date: 7-02-02 I~ JL -2. 1~1 Attn,: Jane Kansier Project: Norex I Add ess: 16200 Eagle Creek Ave S, E. Job No,: 41400-2047 Prior lake, NM 55372-1714 In Re: Responses to Preliminary Plan Review W ARE SENDING: X Attached Under Separate Cove. Via UPS Next Moming Shop Drawings Prints X Plans Specifications I--- - - - X Copy of Letter Change Order Disks Other I--- - - - ( Oiiies Date No. Desc.iirtion 2 7/01/02 - Response letter to Preliminary Plan Review Comments 2 7/01/02 - Resubmitted Civil drawing: C1- dated 7/01/02 2 7/01/02 - Arch, Drawings: PR1-A4, PR1-A17 dated 7/01/02 (Issued for clarification) 2 6/17/02 - Construction Document Issue Drawings 1 6/17/02 - Construction Document Issue Specification - - ~ I--- For Approval - Approved as Submitted f-- Copies for Approval - For Your Use Approved as Noted Copies for Distribution - f--.---- As Requested Returned for Corrections Corrected Prints - - f-- X For Review and Comment Resubmit Prints Returned After Loan to Us - - f--.---- For Bids Due Submit Other: - I--- I--- Re !narks: Jar e, I have attached the above-mentioned items for your use, Please call with any questions comments or concerns, Co yTo: Signed: Nathan p, Miesen -- -..,....----. ---.,....-"------.-..,--. --....-".--" - "__._"..._...~_H fll E COpy May 30, 2002 Norex Attention: Tom Ditty 15815 Franklin Trail SE Prior Lake, MN 55372 RE: City of Prior Lake Review of Sile Plan Applicalion for Norex Building Dear Mr. Ditty: On May 30, 2002, the Cily of Prior Lake compleled ils review of lhe sile plan application for lhe Norex building. There are a few minor changes lhat must be made 10 these plans. These changes are noted in lhe attached commenls from lhe Building Departmenl and lhe Engineering Department. Once the changes have been made, please submil at leasl 2 complele sels of plans to me. I will lhen officially approve lhese plans, and relurn one set to you. Once the site plan has been approved, you may proceed wilh lhe building permit. I would also like 10 lake lhis opportunily 10 complimenl you, your archilecls, your engineers and any olhers who had a hand in putting lhis applicalion logelher. II was one of the most complele applications I have ever reviewed; 'I was very delailed and it covered nearly all of lhe necessary ilems, Applicalions such as lhis make our review quicker and easier. Thank you again for your cooperalion and help, If you have queslions relalive 10 lhe review process or relaled issues, please conlact me direclly al 952-447-9810. Sincerely, Q,~~ Jane Kansier, AICP Planning Coordinalor cc: Nathan Miesen, Pope Archilecls DRC Members t:\02files\02siteptan\norex\changes.doc Page 1 16200 agle Creek Ave, S,E., Prior Lake, Minnesota 55372-1714 / Ph, (952) 447-4230 / Fax (952) 447-4245 AN EQUAL OPPORTUNITY EMPLOYER CITY 0 PRIOR LAKE 16200 EAGLE CREEK AVENUE SE, PRIOR LAKE, MN 55372 Date: Ma 29, 2002 Number of pages including cover 5 sheet: To: Nate Meisen Po e Associates From: Jane Kansier Plannin Coordinator Cit of Prior Lake 16200 Ea Ie Creek Avenue SE Prior Lake, MN 55372 Phone: Fax h ne: 651.642.9200 651.642.1101 cc: Attach d are the Building and Engineering Department comments on the Norex Site Plan. If you ave any questions about this information, please contact me at 952-447-9810. D Urgent ~ For your review D Reply ASAP D Please comment Meeti g Agenda Re: Norex K.A.. Building Division Subj ct: Design Review Committee Meeting City of Prior Lake Date: April 25, 2002 Topi s: 1 Site Plan ,/ .1 a. Parking Stall Count ~dSD b. Sidewalks v c. Building Setbacks'/ d. Site Lighting v e. Trash Enclosure ./ ~ . f. Fire Lane Access / " ^~.~ ~~MI\A> g. Landscaping./ JVv~tr- _/ ' ~n h. Monument/Building /Address Signage i. Site Utilities / j. Storm Water .... 2 Building Plan a. Building Materials ,/ b. Building Lighting'/ 3 Future Expansion a. Permitting Process b. Expanded Parking Area c. Landscaping d. Building Setbacks 4 Schedule a. Site Plan Submittal b. Staff Approval c. Building Permit Submittal d. Permit Issue e. Start Construction 4/24/02 TBD 5/24/02 6/7/02 6/10/02 G:4 14 0-2047/corr/mtgagenda,doc POPE ASSOCIATES Memorandum DATE: May 13, 2002 TO: Jane Kansier, Planner FROM: Robert D. Hutchins, Building Official RE: Site plan review for Norex Following are the results of the preliminary Site plan review for the Norex building. Our review was based on the Minnesota State Building Code (MSBC) which adopted with amendments the 1997 Uniform Building Code (UBC) with handicap regulations of the Minnesota Accessibility Code Chapter 1341. Also requirements of the 1998 Minnesota State Fire Code (MSFC) which adopted with amendments the 1997 Uniform Fire Code (UFC). Site Comments: I. Complete a Building Code analysis. UBC Chapter 5. Include lhe following: a. Location on Property. b. Allowable Floor Area. c. Height and Number of stories. d. Exiting. (provide at building permit submittal) e. Plumbing fixture count (provide at building permit submittal) 2. Sht. A 1.1: Provide building setback dimensions from property lines. 3. Sht. C-I: Move fire hydrant to South edge of the East peninsula. Direct to lhe South. 4. Sht. C-I: Add a fire hydrant to South edge of the West peninsula. Direct to the South. 5. Sht. C-I: Domestic water shutoff valve 10 be located in city Righl-of-Way 6. Sht. C-I: Provide fire lanes for fire apparatus response. Signage to read:" No Parking Fire Lane by order of Fire Department". Locate by site Fire Hydrants and front access curbs. UFC 1001.7.1. 7. Sht L-I: Provide landscaping plan for the interiors of the Court Yards. L:\02FILES\02siteplanINOREXlbldg review,DOC The following are building plan comments: 8. Submit a soils report. 9. An S.A.C. determination must be completed by the Metropolitan Waste Control Commission. Contact Jody Edwards at 651.602.1113.34. 10. Submit signed architeclural and slructural plans before building permit. Submil signed HV AC, plumbing, fire/smoke alarm, emergency lighlinglexit signs and sprinkler plans. May be submitted at a later date. 11. Submit Energy Envelope Calculations. MN Energy Code 7670.0100 12. If provided, indicate means of lawn irrigation. May use separate service and metering for billing purposes. 13. Provide detail of lawn sprinkler service stub valve and backflow prevention details. 14. Submit the Structural Engineers requirements for Special Inspections UBC 1701.5. 15. Siamese connection and enunciator panels to be localed by front entrance. 16. Provide HDCP signage details. 17. Provide attic ventilation specifications and calculalions. UBC 1505.3. 18. Provide Draftstops with an area not to exceed 9000 s.f. and the greatest horizontal dimension may be 100 feet. UBC 708.3.1.2.2 Exception. 19. Ventilation for the building must meet UBC chapter 12. Provide 15 CFM of ventilation per occupant. 20. Provide fire extinguishers minimum 2AI0BC raled, within 75 feet travel dislance of all areas. UFC 1002. This is a preliminary review only on conceptual plans. Other code ilems will be addressed when the preliminary plans are submitted. The building plans must be reviewed by the Cities Developmental Review Committee (DRC) which consists of representatives of Planning, Engineering, Parks, Finance, and Building Departments. The DRC must approve the site plans before a building permit can be issued. 2 MAY, 17,2002 10:52AM POPE ASSOCIATES INC NO, 3274 PI/I /I Cv,,-..Q _ IJ~ /V\re -;,J 'fa ~S( PC)PE"? ~ if'. ASSOCIATES 'hsv..... 1- ~cR 1255 Energv Park Drive St. Paul, Minnesata 55108-5118 PHONE [651] 6d2 9200 FAX [651]642 1'01 P0~ kkOV\ :4t:- 4. ,~ Today' Date c:; . \"1'~-z.-. FAX T ANSMITTAL 'oi~ ",_,., ~-...l. ~~~~:~~? ender: 7\~1Io . M\e.~ __ _,j DC>- C:a. " -. .- J , ~ - ~.,J ",elll Cw~ J Project: obNo,: C" 0' PagS$ ORIGINAL TO FOLLOW BY MAIL: \ ~~ \\Cl'. "'\~ Copy To: Signed: '1-~-r")....-? If there IiIr any 'problems receiving this fax please con/acl: G:IFORMSIF eo.....h...tdac 6\x ~ ~::} " 05/07/20,2 08:18 9522253758 INTEGRA TELECOM PL PAG ,. . . I have reviewed the attached proposed request (Norex Site Plan) for the following: Water City Code Grading Sewer Storm Water Siqns Zoning Flood Plain -County Road Access Parks Natural Features Legal Issues Assessment Eleclric Roads/Access Policy . Seplic System Gas Building Code Erosion Control ')( Other 1'E.LL . Recommendalion: X Approval Denial Conditional Approval - - - Comments: NO Coo'" c.. E. 'Il..~ ~ . .. '. i,~ .... .. ..... - ,.. ',', ~, '", \.'t"+\ ..... '",' 'm / ',:, i '. " Pategra ' ., . . . ~ " / . ../' / TELECOM , : . Don Barlage _ ,"''',,'''' street S.E: . O,S,P, Engineering & Design Prior Lake, MJIJ 55372 . ; Molj~: {61Z} 919.5887 :," D~llIct Dial: (952)226-7064 Fax: ~5Z) 22'.3758 don. tlarl8ge@lnregratelecom,com '. WWIY.lnteQrallllacom.oon\ . ,..-.,.,. . ~ c---... Signed: ~'\. T,~G AG ^~ ,... Dale: 5-7-0 z.... ~ Please return any comments by Friday, May 17, 2002, to Jane Kansler, ORC Coordinalor Cily of Prior Lake 16200 Eagle Creek Avenue SE Prior Lake, MN 55372 Phone: (952) 447-9812 Fax: (952) 447-4245 1:\02flles\02siteplan\norliJx\raferr.lill.doc Page 2 .._-~~-_._-,.~..""._----------_._---_._-_._-- -- ---_.~--~_._--------- ~ E 01/01 / ~ '. CITY OF PRIOR LAKE DRC PROJECT REVIEW CHECKLIST PROJECT NAME: NOREX SITE PLAN An applicalion for sile plan approval for the development of a 16,000 square fool office building, APPLICANT: Norex PROJECT ENGINEERS: Nathan Miesen, Pope Architects 651-642-9200 CONTACT PERSON: Tom Dilly, Norex 447-8854 SITE INFORMATION PID#: 25-296-002-0 LOCATION: 5505 Cottonwood Lane This property is localed in lhe Walerfronl Passage Business Park on lhe soulhwesl side of Cottonwood Lane, north of Adelmann Street. EXISTING ZONING: C-5 COMPREHENSIVE PLAN: C-BO PROJECT REQUEST: Review sile plan, DISTRIBUTE TO: APPLICATION FOR: . Frank Boyles . Bud Osmundson Adminislralive Land Division . Sue Walsh . Sue McDermott Comprehensive Plan Amend, . Ralph Teschner Condilional Use Permil . Chris Esser . Fire Chief Home Occupalion . Bob Hutchins . Bill O'Rourke Rezoning . Don Rye . Sile Plan Jane Kansier Preliminary Pial PUD DNR - Pat Lynch . Minnegasco Final Plat Counly Hwy, Dept. Walershed Dist. Variance MNDOT . Telephone Co, Vacalion SMDC . Eleclric Co. Mediacom Cable Met. Council Date Received 4/24/02 Date Distributed 5/3/02 Date Due 5/17/02 Complete Application 5/3/02 Date Distributed to 5/3/02 DRC Meeting 5/23/02 Date DRC Publication Date NA Tentative PC Date NA Tentative CC NA Date 60 Day Review Date 7/3/02 Review Extension 1:102fi1esI02siteplanlnorexlreferral.doc Page 1 - _._~---_._- ..._-~,.~-.__. --. - -- --_.~---,._-,._-,. ~ have reviewed lhe attached proposed requesl (Norex Site Plan) for the following: Water City Code Grading Sewer Slorm Waler Signs Zoning Flood Plain County Road Access Parks Natural Features Legal Issues Assessmenl Eleclric Roads/Access Policy Septic Syslem Gas Building Code Erosion Control Olher Recommendalion: Approval Denial Condilional Approval - - - Commenls: Signed: Dale: Please relurn any comments by Fridav, Mav 17. 2002, 10 Jane Kansier, ORC Coordinalor Cily of Prior Lake 16200 Eagle Creek Avenue SE Prior Lake, MN 55372 Phone: (952) 447-9812 Fax: (952) 447-4245 1:I02filesI02siteplanlnorexlreferral,doc Page 2 __'___m.______.__._._,_,.____.___"___._m___.___,____~__"'__,..__.~.__ - - - - -....--. ..-------------------- Type of Application Planning Case File No. ();), ~ ()6"'b ProperlJ' !dent.ification No. W'.~ OW"'~ City of Prior Lake I D 'II i,' ZONING/LAND USE APPLI 1_ 2 A - tWI Brie ect (Please describe the proposed amendment, project, or variance request. Attach additional sheets if necessary). o endment to Zoning Map o endment to Zoning Ordinance Text o endment to Comprehensive Plan Land Use Map o nditional Use Permit o ariance o Panned Unit Development o 5 nior Care Overlay District o orne Occupation o endment or Modification to approved CUP or PUD [R] 5 te Plan Application 5Qo!' endosed l(,~ ~l<-Ut.i ~l,... ~,F-- (home) qc;2' f'l2.l 0 J2. L (work) o Contract for Deed '\ViJl~JtYC>> .e (Jthef~JjaIt'tll~-appli~..ptlJ~'i~:voh'~:i o Y (If yes, please attach a list of the names an e~h~p,"'~~veIOPlrleJ1t;~"IrI~*_~g~rnen~.~[tbis..Pt~j.~c:t~- role ofall persons involved in the project.) o l:\handouts 001 handouts\zoning\zoning app.doc Minnesota County, Scott ADDITION DESCRIPTION OF PROPERTY SURVEYED WATERFRONT PASSAGE 2 Block Lot 1 follows of as Th at part described 89 nutes westerly ,,~rth 0 1, Block ml Commencing at the southeast corner of Lot 2, Block 2, of said plat thence South degrees 49 minutes 16 seconds East plat bearing along the south line of said Lot 1 Block 2, a distance of 100.52 feet to the point of beginning of the land to be described thence North 0 degrees 10 minutes 44 seconds East parallel with the east line of said Lot 2, Block 2, and its northerly extension a distance of 412.60 feet; thence North 39 degrees 03 minutes 21 seconds East a distance of 265.01 feet to the northeasterly line of said Lot 1 Block 2; thence South 54 degrees 14 minutes 04 seconds East along said northeasterly ne a distance of 351.36 feet; thence South 39 degrees 03 minutes 21 seconds West a distance of 265.07 feet to the intersection with a line drawn ^'~ 1 0 ~ 44 East from a point on the south line of said L eet southeast corner; thence South 0 degrees distance of 208.30 feet to said point; then Block 2, to the point of beginning the a 1 ne Lot seconds west of said said along ne of degrees 2, distant 44 seconds the along r ,'C------,..-;:;-;-,. " POPE I'LJ'L5 cs rn 0'0 [g ;:j ASSOCIATES ilfil ~ wa I~I 1255 Energy Park Drive 51. Paul, MN 55108-5118 PHONE [651] 642 9200 FAX [651] 642 1101 LE ~TER OF TRANSMITTAL To: City of Prior Lake Date: 4.24.02 Attn: Jane Kansier, AICP - Planning Coordinator Project: Norex Add ess: 16200 Eagle Creek Ave S, E. Job No,: 41400-2047 Prior Lake, NM 55372-1714 In Re: Preliminary Site Review W ~ ARE SENDING: X Attached Under Separate Cover I Via 1 Hour Shop Drawings Prints X Plans Specifications - e-- '-- f--- Copy of Letter Change Order Disks Other - L- L-- L-- C onies Date No. DescriDtion 6 4/24/02 - Full Size Preliminary Site Plan Review Documents 1 4/24/02 - Half Size Preliminary Site Plan Review Documents 1 4/24/02 - Zoning/Land Use Application 1 4/24/02 - Signed Check for Permit Fee ($300,00) - ~ - - For Approval e-- Approved as Submitted - Copies for Approval For Your Use Approved as Noted Copies for Distribution - e-- - As Requested Returned for Corrections Corrected Prints - f--- - X For Review and Comment Resubmit Prints Returned After Loan to Us - e-- - For Bids Due Submit Other: - L..- '---... Re !narks: Ja e, I have attached the above-mentioned items for your use, Please call with any questions comments or concerns, Co yTo: Signed: Nathan p, Miesen -_.__..._._._---,-~--_...._--,_._,- -- ,------- SITE PLAN APPLICATION CHECKLIST o lU.4 PROJECT NAME DEVELOPER lhe applicanl A complele Zoning/Land Use Application form and the fee owner of the property , 1 lhe owner's The name, address and telephone number of the owner, allenl, the applicanl, surveyor and designer of the project. 2 survey. The sile plan 2. A detailed site plan based on the current musl include lhe following information: a. Sile dimensions subject the Sile conditions and exisling developmenl property and immediately adjacenl properties. The proposed use of all areas of lhe sileo localion of on b. c. d 1 all dwelling The proposed density, type, size and unils, if dwelling units are proposed. and walkway drives, and exit enlrance streets, parking areas. Trash enclosures. All public locations. AI f, g. h mechanical equipment. Outdoor irrigalion plans. Landscaping Plans, including 3. tree preservation plan. tree inventory and A 4. Lighling plans showing all outside and building exlerior Iighling 5. control plan, including storm waler drainage 6. Signage Plans. Grading and erosion calculations 7. Utility plans A fire prolection plan identifying fire lanes, indicator valves and Siamese conneclions. 10. Building plans, including exterior wall elevations, male rials and cross seclion floor layouls. 11. Any other information lhe City may request 10 delenTIine whelher e proposed proJ the requirements of this subseclion. posl building locations, exterior hydrant 8. 9. 2 ratios, Acreage or square foolage of individual land uses on the sileo 2, O\Y7 rg p1 .. UIll ~i . I POPE ASSOCIATES Architects Ap il 24, 2002 Interior Designers Ja e Kansier, AICP PI nning Coordinator Ci of Prior lake 16 00 Eagle Creek Ave. S, E, Pri r lake, MN 55372 R: Site Plan Review Submittal Norex Office Building WaterfrDnt Passage Addition, Lot 1, Block 1 Prior Lake, Minnesota PAl Project 41400-02047 D ar Jane, o behalf of Norex Inc" Pope Associales is submitting for your review, Sile Plan Review do umenls for a Proposed Office Building 10 be localed on an approximalely 4,17 acre sil localed wilhin lhe Walerfront Passage Business Park in the City of Prior Lake, Pr ject Description Th proposed development consists of a 16,343 gross square foot single-story, office bu Iding wilh a possible fulure expansion of similar size, The conslruction materials will be a combination of: face brick wall and piers, precast concrele silis, champagne al minum window frames wi linled insulated glass, horizontal exlerior insulalion finish sy lem (EIFS) above the windows, pre-finished aluminum soffils and fascia and a sloped sh ngle roof, S bmission In luded herewilh as part of this review submission are copies of the following required do uments: 5i (6) sets of large scale drawings (30" x 42") and (1) set of reductions (11" x 17") - is ued with submittal review date of 4/24/2002 1255 Energy Park Drive SI, Paul, MN 55108-5118 Phone: (651) 642-9200 Fax: (651) 642-1101 . SITE SURVEY . A1,1 SITE PLAN . A2,1 FLOOR PLAN . A3,1 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS . C1,O GRADING, UTILITY AND EROSION CONTROL PLAN . C2,O NOTES & DETAILS . L1,O LANDSCAPE PLAN . 1 PHOTOMETRICS PLAN W look forward 10 discussing this project with you at the April 25th Design Review C mmittee meeling, e, please feel free to call me al 651-642-9200 or via e-maii nmiesenlaloooearch.com any queslions regarding this submittal. cc Tom Ditty Denny Minske Brian Mundslock Bob Mueller Richard Johnson PAl File Norex Kraus-Anderson Sunde Engineering, Inc, Insiles McConkey Johnson Soltermann, Inc, G:I 1400102047\corr1CityLtr4-24,doc CITY OF PRIOR LAKE 16200 EAGLE CREEK AVE SE PRIOR LAKE. MN 55372 (952) 447-4230, FAX (952) 447-4245 If 'I " ") ..-f r Received of I '.,\.; If [.1 ", : " i,U/A c' ----r-f . , {f, the sum of Ii"'" , .'/ i\ ,,... ,/.- ( .\, I \ 'T . or .' " \/ , . -.- ,. ~- ,.... ,-_.f-i- I r .'-' -,;../ . / ,., ~ ! C.i -t .~(? ,. "i t" ,~r tf..(.. l' l,(' /...'- for the purpo e of $ fD \ ,/.... ,~j .'. I I li .'" : I ; ,'; ../\ J , .~. ;_"1 _'" RECEIPT # 41622 -..--- dollars ;:( f ) .\,i '.II' ) -A'_o, v . ................-\ . Invoice # /". A l~7i.1 /v , l 1/[ J.. ( Iil/~ ) lr- ,~. {'.!.,.. \ II Receipt Clerk for the CiW of Prior Lake I , ~ ~:iJ .!..)> I~ en q::r: m z () r o en c :D m m r m ~ :::t o z - 1 '" --! ~ 1121'-4" "-4" 3'-0" ~ , ~ 1 1 j j j I j I J I n ~ 1\ 4\ f:::H '=j- F,\ I' !=~ kdll e ill I J H.ffi I.L tJd:Id ~I J:: F1=:r 1 I J ... rt-l j-I_I ,~ I I j - 'r j I " r I I \ j -I J J I J j I I 1 J I j 11 IL.::.,C ~ ~.L... 1::: l- .L ~ , ~ F !co 1 1 1 1 I I 11 1 1 1 I ~ I j 1 1 11_1 I1II _ 1 1 I I 1 I \ 1 1 ~ '= 111 \ 'I Ij I 1 1 j II l.c:j C I ..I.-~ .c: 1 have reviewed the attached proposed requesl (Norex Site Plan) for lhe following: Waler Cily Code Grading Sewer Storm Waler Signs Zoning Flood Plain Counly Road Access Parks Nalural Fealures Legal Issues Assessmenl Eleclric Roads/Access Policy Septic Syslem Gas Building Code Erosion Conlrol Olher Recommendalion: Approval Denial Conditional Approval - - - Comments: .1'H..J , .rA .c., ""'''.11 u a . A}u,! -fr., A' t.. /1 . A IIlJn J.." /Jrid '1/ M 1'IrYJ'~"J... /1......~ D r . ('11 A nnY\:Hu 1M- 11/).< t.'/ ,"v.-+., ...('/Jl"'.i". ~ ..t;"," h, ,'"'.Ili......,r !1 Signed: E~j~~ Date: Please relum any comments by Friday, Mav 17. 2002, 10 Jane Kansier, DRC Coordinalor Cily of Prior Lake 16200 Eagle Creek Avenue SE Prior Lake, MN 55372 Phone: (952) 447-9812 Fax: (952) 447-4245 I :\02files\02sileplan\norex\referral,doc Page 2 ---...- NOI4'1'1I'I"".. -..-.. ~..---.~ ill ' ~ \ \ \ , t-- :r- N - ~~ ~~ 00 ~i II ww ~~~ "~~ . ~~ .. x~~ , Ww Y!;~ X'w ~~;S ~t:i o"u ~' il as!!?1IJ x~ gieu- Xx ., . ...... 7'T ~<- _ b ~o ;;;.. 'J. IIJ~~ wr::~ :-~~ .. x~~ , ww .". ;;~ ~~.ID " , b~ ri" "" , , ww l:J~~ "~> 'w ~~ x~~ , ww ~!i:l: )C :l:'~ "Ul~. 7.!f" o 8' ~ z g I- o (.) ~ / ~<, l&J ~ .j I I ~L. p (j31\1M '8 (j3M3S 9I/Zl IJJ'/vsn =14'1'0 Iunln.." 11-;6 l\tS, 'ON 'rallo' AI GUOIIIO ~\tr SOW I Hvr lo:"~I~ 'ON 'Dill ~'IUq /' P :r-if" /-'7 . 'UOIINHIW ~o IU,U IIU. 110 IMn IM.I. ~lqNn UJ.t1DNI '''NOI''UOlld DaIlUIIDJII nno 'I'll" I.I."HJ. ON" NOII'AIII..nlJ.;)IIIIOAI'IIUOllnIlO II'II,U 0111""111"''1''''''.1.110..1111101101.1.'1';)1".101... 11'1"" IIHJ. J.'I'HJ. ,UIJ.II10 AIJIIIH I HESS 'NW '311Y1 HOIHd 6!i1e XOII 'O'd .3"S .133H.LS V.10>lVO 61:911' ~N3W~UYd30 ONIU33NIllN3 3>111'1 1l01lld :10 AJ.IO 14'1'0 '011 MOil, III 1.11 NO.IJO 'AIN'I"" ,~..r'J.lIlA ""01 ,0".,,1 '1I0N 3N'tl aOOMNOJ.J.O~ ;or . . ! . .im;.....~.:::::: . I,.. ..."..J:;~:( . i:- '.{' ': ,. I,' ",y" i'; .....2: :O~':C!tG ::, ./::' N. '1" ,. ....:1:;.'..//;:1.:,.. J..:;: ";':I:.'1ffi"'" ..... ..~."'Oi I. . ~i~t!,:!.II".."". ......;jJ :::::: ":::'!::'r::H~:1 ., : ,."'.11' ~ :[l',il,C~ il! .'.11.:,' :il::::: 0 .:....11::::. ".'1""..,,:.:t .i :,j "i"''' ~,,:q. '00':((6': ~ , .ill ..i>i -fd"'''' '1-1---\,' ---Ir'j-:-; 1Xi""" 0 I,I-li--\j ~-I.~ - ,"...~"i". ..:.,1. :::::: . ~ .. . . : : :! .:: .::. . j ::- . ~ +~d:i" I -......,.:f... ...... o.~'..'... -..'II.~..~--I~'..' ..'../ ::::: I:: .,.:._...,:1,..,:.:.: ::.!:....!::'I.. g 0 . ..!..~.-.~:'.: -., :-1 : . . : ~ :.<J:-:.'~',,-:~:'.:'-J'. ".:'.'~"~r.' 'i'~'.:"-. ..J .::+,:"Clll~l:r&'" ~ <1.1 ..~ '1.~81 .......... ......11.... '."",1... ",1 00"'" . ~ :'__1.' ,.. J: ... \: ::.i~: ~r~,: i . . .. '.1, _,.__,. .1..' ':;I-"!. .,-1. .1...' .'.' . .r::'::: g I.. ":'.;f':-:-:':' r~..m.. ".- j . i ......:..:..:....'.l.-.-. . .1,:.... .. ...". L':-o~~.,r6 t1i J--"l~ '-I -:-:j .'~' -4 '~: ...... II_uJ'!lu111d-+-+:':-! ..'.... .'. .....I:tl ....~<I<lon" H--++--n+u... .I-cc-r--:.';C-"? -:~-'-j' .,-~-];.~c ......j...'.<..': . ;_~. I :..~ ~o~ >...~. . ,J.:. ;VI .<1'1 i-'----j'- . · . .1- d: -_.,.,-. :"\I_----.---I!...... .,_,Li_.'.,/_" --, -------, .- ..~.. +---+'-1'---",..---- ,.. c'::::: ~ ........ I .. .:: ,'/". '00"" ""'-:jr'c'-:'c-c .!-.-,-..-. ':'':':'''1- ~ . ,...,-, --- ".00'''0' ':i: (':; f> .~ :11:.:' 'OI'gC6 " .1.. .. . .L";I g II~b-'~~~::~f"ri-~~:i~,r ......r ,'::::::.. k J! ....J.:' :'::::1::; ',...., ::~:_;J~':::<L. "!-. ::O~~gt6' I . '11. .'Ii-"'-'r-~ "I'-'~' .1." il ::....1.::: .:' :. ::'/: .:.: ::::::: :!.::r4 :).' I:' qCtfnt-tTi Jt 1--- ....-., j-----ll"-'--t~~-' I'-~j ~ j-'''--/''''+ '-li~---~s -'- t,J--- 10'1.7"' -@ffii<1ll .-';-.-:-1--+.... ' .. '::r---- ..:1:' . ..1' i' i I ! --I , \ \ \ \ \ I \ .~ N , '\ ~ o~ .~~ ~-' 00 dO .... , , ww uu '" ~~~ "ww :. w~ u x~~ ~ ww > ~~~ . x.~ ... .' . _ _10 ID .:..!..l. ci , -' \ i'l~::! " . l l.l.:=!w (I):ti= """z >w_ ...JOo ~>UJ ~ 0:1- , UJ~() ~ 1;(,0 ~ ,,,,,-, w Ww "> ~ Ul;g:l- xwz ."~ , -~~ x~o , > Ig ",' , r 11&."- -~~ ~Q ,~ ..2 .. % , , z 'WW I- ~~~ \ ~~ / ~'lb~lJt: x~ffi "ID ~ ~ -~w x'w ~~~ ~ / / l< " I:' 1: i. .,.. :1' l< ..:",:.i' .,. . . . I .' i J ....'1 , , , I,' r I I> i: ..1 , , J i , ]. "., ."..,.1.... 'j: i.' : t~.~.".' I I:,' "i'. ',c,+-: .1"'. .. . 1 '.'1'.'. ,.. . iii ~ ~ -o~ k ~~ \ I , \ Ww l:J UU -5 " ~~ 0 ~ z \o.~ w m .; ~~ . . ~ ;;~l)l = ~.~"~ '. N N .~ ~ wo; w w....w ~::'l'iO=iE 1.1.1- ..Joo o >-_(31- a::>-u.1- Ira.. m....:H.:J a:: Cl a: zo ffi~S~~::ia: O<~ ::)-lQ. Z Z-IO< ::lZ<-lO:U. <0::<0, N C)..JO:::Z:O::>-O 3a..~lf.l~lDg ~UJ a:Zlf.l. !!?~~:=::l~;; )( UlU..J...... WZ(I)<..JI- owo:<<.... -I 0::1- >N ~S~t5~~iO owu w...... ~ml-w~o..J O:I:-Z..J ' ZtrlZI-I-<<Z 0< < uo - w u. .... I-UlO:: -OtrlWI- <~<ffi-l~og gl-lI)llJ..J_ 0:: ..J-I-Z<I-WI- ..J1lJ-::I<l-tI) W-~Cll-U<Z :I:I- ZUOI-O 1-::1 W<..JtI)U 8 k' .'!: 0I".C6 -:"Oi!'...cr."':' OC~;t6' . o o "'I"~:O~:Il:~.:": ~ . ,~.':Qt6' , :0;':I,C6 ':'~"Og~gI:6:'.' '_.:'O~',gC5' ::OQ':at& 0 0 '."OlJrQC15:": + l\J :Ol.':Q[I5:, :"'lJV":lJt.&:": '06'IIC6 0 0 '--:"OO'2tr."": + l\J l\J 'O":LU" '::iFi~- 0 0 + "' l\J " " .. NI N' " ., ,. - o o + o o o + o o + " UJ a ~ fu ' ~ Z ~~ - I- 0 a . I- !:lag 0...", lO' ~ ~ :tG~ ~~ ~~~ ~ - ~ 88 01-- Cl 0 <(<(lit ijlG x~ I- aiif' UJEIll ~ ~~3 ~ 0... ),taUJ tn~Cl ~ ~~ UI-U I:;:t W ii1. . <( ~<f)::; 0 IIII_IIIII_I"~ ~ ~ u- ' I- 3 Ill~u- ~~~ Q= ~8 I-~ UJG~ . ~ ~ CJ) ~:t CIl~ -.r.... ""IIIII~ ~ ~~ ~if' U<f) ~= Q ~8~ ~3 ~ llt<( :<8 u..t:::!=:! ~ci <( 11111 IIIII~IIII.-~& 8~ Z IL~ !O!U :;,.~ia lM~~ ~li: ~ I 1II11 11111:-((\ I- " jllilJ lliJt 1 - N ~ CJ) t .' I- .. '" '" Z . , , ~ N " W '. .' . . '~ + ::!.. 1- , . " . ~ ~ :11111~"III- '" ::>9 .n N ,,[ ,,>II. 1=::1111=11111'-- z~ ,,>l/~ ~ IIII1 111II 11111- C!:I1:J II. oy HlIm .ldll!l3A "I' ~A lSOl!l:l ::!~ IIY.'€' ,,[ IIS-Il ug-,Z ll~-,l ..... I- UJ UJ <( III Cl ' <f)Cl ~ OCQ lO' ~~ !!!I- :t:t),t ~UJUJ , Cl ~~lJ ll:~ Oo}- ~ UJ~~ ijlG ~' ijli15 ~~ ~~1l1}- 0... ~Qt'f :n~Cl <( -1-<( Q<f)- -1L1ll U O!~LL ILllt--' UJ <f) 1llI:;~ --'~ ~~li:Cl :n~ UJU ~8~ UJ :t_ ~~~~ <1:- ~= Q ~o U~ ~Q~ ~ :rd lLt::!d ria E1il<t ~~ :;,.~ia lM~ ~ \ \ ---r I I I I I I I I I I I I ---L :;,. , en z o ~ OJ ...J W Z " 05 !z w ::!.. ::>0 Z) OJ ::!~ ..... ~ , '" "'C ~o 00 ~~ 00 Z~ u o tr) tr) .... 119-11 11(211-11 uY..€ "I' II€-IZ "I ',UI:J ),,9 03l1l011'1'lH'D13H wnWIX'I'W 11(21-19 - SPECIFICATION MANUAL FOR r- - - A PROPOSED NEW FACILITY THE: NO REX, INC. PRIOR LAKE, MlNNESOT A - 41400 - 02047 POPE ASSOCIATES Architects Interior Designers 1255 Energy Park Drive St, Paul, MN 55108-5118 Phone: (651) 642-9200 Fax: (651) 642-1101 www.popearch.com PROPOSED NEW FACILITY FOR: NOREX, INC. PRIOR LAKE, MINNESOTA JUNE!7, 2002 REPARED BY: CBITECT: OPE ASSOCIATES INe. 255 Energy Park Drive t. Paul, Minnesota 55108 651- 642- 9200 1 hereby certify that this Specification was prepared by me or under my direct supervision, and that 1 am a duly licensed professio 'teet under the laws of the State of Min License # 13041 roject #: 35742 - 01120 TRUCTURAL: cCONKEY JOHNSON SOLTERMANN, INC. : 144 Hennepin Avenue South 1 hereby certify that this Specification was prepared 'nneapolis, Minnesota 55408-2619 by me or under my direct supervision, and that 1 am a 612-822-6950 duly licensed professional engineer under the laws of the State of Minnesota. , / thard W. Jo~on Date: June17,2002 roject #: 02255 License #23406 IVIL: UNDE ENGINEERING INC. 200 West Old Shakopee Road, Suite 230 loomington, Minnesota 55437 952-881-3344 Signature and Specification for Civil Work is on Drawings, 2047 - Norex, Inc. Signature Sheet 00002 - 1 OWNER: ARCHITECT: GEN. CONTRACTOR: STRUCTURAL: CIVIL: LAND SURVEYING: LANDSCAPE: 2047 - Nora:, Inc. PROPOSED NEW FACILITY FOR: NOREX, INC. PlUOR LAKE, MINNESOTA ruNE 17, 2002 NOREX, INC. 1581SFranklin Trail SE Prior Lake, Mmnesota 55372 952-447.8898 952-447-8854 FAX POPE ASSOCIATES INC. 1255 Eaergy Park Drive Sl P...~ Minnesota 55108 651-642-9200 651- 642 -110IFAX KRAUS-ANDERSON BUILDING COMPANY 32500 Minnehah& Avenue Minneapolis, Minnesota 55404 612-721-7581 612-721-2660 FAX McCONKEY JOHNSON SOLTERMANN INC. 3144 H~in Avenue South Minneapolis, Minnesota 55408.2619 612-822-6950 612-822-8385 FAX SUNDE ENGINEERING, INC. 4200 West Old ShaIcopcc Road, Suite 230 Bloominglofl, Minnesota 55437-2967 952-881.3344 952-881-1913 FAX SUNDE LAND SURVEYING, INC. 9000 East Bloomington Freeway, Suite 118 BI~;qgt.... Minnesota 55420 952-881-2455 952-888-9526 FAX INSITES 117810 SccoodAvenue North Pl}1DOUth. M""'-a 55447 763-476-9573 763-476-4939 FAX Consultants Directory ??oo3 -1 000 1 - Cover Sheet 0002 - Signature Sheet 0003 - Consultants Directory 0004 - Table of Contents 0005 - Schedule of Drawings IVISION 0 - CONDITIONS OF THE ONTRACT 0220 - Soils Investigation Data 0700 - General Conditions (Reference to AlA ocument A201) IVISION I - GENERAL RE UIREMENTS 1400 - Quality Requirements 1731 - Cutting and Patching IVISION 2 SITE WORK 2230 - Site Clearing 2300 - Earth Work 2741 - Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving 2751 - Cement Concrete Pavement OTE: Landscape specifications are on the dscape Drawings. 3300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete 3451 - Plant Precast Architectura1 Concrete lements IVISION 4 - MASONRY 4810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies IVISION 5 - METALS 5120 - Structural Steel 5400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing 5500 - Metal Fabrications IVISION 6 - WOODS AND PLASTICS 6105 - Miscellaneous Carpentry 6176 - Wood Trusses 6402 - Interior Architectural Woodwork 2047 - Norex, Inc. DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210 - Building Insulation 07241 - Exterior Insulation & Finish System 07311 - Asphalt Shingles 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07840 - Firestopping Systems 07920 - Joint Sealants DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames 08211- Flush Wood Doors 08212 - Stile and Rail Wood Doors 08311- Access Doors 08411 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 08665 - Pass-Through Window 08710 - Finished Hardware 08800 - Glazing 08814 - Mirrored Glass DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09253 - Gypsum Sheathing 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies 09310 - Ceramic Tiles 09511 - Acoustical Panel Ceilings 0965 I - Resilient Tile Flooring 09653 - Resilient Wall Base and Accessories 09680 - Carpet 09720 - Wall Covering 09900 - Painting DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10350 - Flagpoles 10431- Signs 10520 - Fire Protection Specialties 10725 - Fabric Awnings 10801 - Toilet And Bath Accessories 10990 - Miscellaneous Specialties DIVISION II - EOUIPMENT None TABLE OF CONTENTS 00004 -PAGE 1 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12484 - Floor Mats and Frames 12491 - Horizontal Louver Blinds DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION None DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14240 - Hydraulic Elevators DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL By design build contractor DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL By design build contractor. . END OF SECTION 00004 . 02047 - Norex, Inc. TABLE OF CONTENTS 00004 -PAGE 2 05 - SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS ENERAL DRAWINGS 0,1 Title Sheet Survey 0.2 Partition Types, code Data, Abbreviations Grading, Utility and Erosion Plan Notes and Details NDSCAPE DRAWINGS 1 Landscape Plan TRUCTURAL DRAWINGS .1 Foundation Plan ,2 Roof Framing Plan ,3 Structural Notes & Sections, RCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS Site Plan and Site Details Floor Plan, Enlarged Plans, Interior Elevations Exterior Elevations Trash Enclosure Plan, Elevation, Sections and Roof Plan Wall Sections / Details Wall Sections / Details Wall Sections / Details Details Opening Schedule Frame Types and Door Types 9,1 Reflected Ceiling Plan and Details 10,1 Finish Plan, Materials Schedule ECHANICAL DRAWINGS ontractor Design Build LECTRICAL DRAWINGS 1.1 Site Photometric Plan ontractor Design Build "END OF SECTION 00005 " 2047 - Norex, Inc. 00005 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS -PAGE 1 SE TION 00220 SO LS INVESTIGATION DATA T 1 - GENERAL 1.1 INCORPORATED INFORMATION A The following information incorporated in the Project Manual is supplied by the Owner for the Bidder's/Contractor's information only and is not part of the Contract. B Soils Borings have been made at the site to assist in the design process, Soil Data and/or Logs are included in the Documents for the information and convenience of Bidders/Contractors, 1.2 DATA USE LIMITATIONS A Because the subsurface conditions indicated by the borings are a sampling in relation to the entire construction area, and for other reasons, the Owner, Architect, Engineer, Soil Exploration Company reporting the sub-surface conditions based on the borings, do not warrant the conditions below the depths of the borings or that the strata logged from the borings are necessarily typical of the entire site, 1.3 BIDDER RESPONSIBILITY A Bidders/Contractors using soil information described in this Section shall accept full responsibility for its use in preparing bids and obtaining additional soil information which may be required for any bid, 020 7 - Norex, Inc B. The Contractor represents that it has been given adequate opportunity to collect borings, soundings or other soil information concerning the soil conditions which will be encountered in the performance of the Work. Where borings, sounding or other soil information are indicated in the Plans and Specifications, or are otherwise provided to the Contractor with respect to the Work, it is understood by the Contractor that, due to the nature of such testing and the subject tested, such information may not be completed or accurate, that the Company shall assume no responsibility for damages or increased cost with respect to the accuracy of any borings, soundings or other soil information and that unforeseen rock buried foundations, debris, rubbish..., etc" wet excavation or other soil conditions shall not relieve the Contractor from fulfilling its responsibilities under the Contract Documents. 1.4 EXTRA PAYMENT A, No consideration for extra payment will be given for conditions occurring which could have been anticipated from the geotechnical information, If conditions occur resulting in extra work which could not have been anticipated or reasonably inferred from the geotechnical information, the Conditions of the Contract shall apply, 1.5 GEOTECHNICAL DATA A, Soil boring logs and report: Reference supplementary report listed below, B. Reproduced on the following pages are follow- up letters and documentation to the soils report: GEOlECHNICAL EVALUATION REPORT FOR KRAUS-ANDERSON CONSTRUCTION COMPANY PROPOSED NOREX BUILDING SOU1HWEST OF COTTONWOOD LANE AND ADELMANN STREET PRIOR LAKE, MINNESOTA Dated: May 23, 2002 To: Mr. Dennis Minske Kraus-Anderson Construction Company 2500 Minnehaha Avenue Minneapolis, MN 55404 Soils Investigation Data 00220 - 1 From: BRAUN INTERTEC CORP, 6950 West 146th Street, Suite 131 Apple Valley, MN 55124-8520 (952) 431-4493 (952) 431-3084 FAX Braun Intertec Project Number BODX- 02-058 PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED, PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED . END OF SECTION 00020. 02047 - Norex, Inc Soils Investigation Data 00220 - 2 N0.6094 ,p.. 3/42 A Geotechnical Evaluation Report for Kraus-Anderson COlUltruCtiOD Compey PropoIed Norex.BuIldIDg Southwest ofCaUllDwoocl Lmc IUId ,i,4,o1........ S1I:cct Prior LaJal, MlImciota' ProfeuIDIDI Cet1IfIeatloa: I hereby oerti(y lIIal: tIdI pllD, ipeCificatioa, or ~ _ ptllII8l'ed by IIIIl or 1lI!dcr my ctitect 81lpelVisicm IIId 1hat lam a dilly UGCIIICd J!agiueer UDCIer tba IaWl oitba Slate otMJIIDllIolL ' . Si~~ ARwiale ~lDcip81 P'lliDUoa NUIlIhr. 24017 May 23,2002 Project BODX-02.QS8 MI.)' 23, 2002 BrI1m lDtcrtec Corporation In-Kay-Q2,..12:'3?P I i MaY,23, 20023; 2:42PMll'lM K/A BUILDING DIV, Nc.609! ID, 4/42 BRAUN'. INTERTEC ,...... InIertec: "'......... 6950 W.sll461h .....,. Soite 131 ""pl. Volley, M_"", SSIUSS20 952-40104493 F_ 952-43 l 401A Eng"-a a.J 5deY11''', "MIIJ 1/1. 911I1, <<Id Notutol ",","","",on'" , May 23, 2002 Proj=t BODX-Oll-058 " Mr, DcmdI Minske Xra1lll-ADdcraol1 ~on~ 2500 Minnehaha Aveuue . Milmeapolis, MN 55404 : Dear Mr. Mhuke: Re: Geoua.....ftf-l Bva1uatiClll,P!OpoaedNorexBuiIdina.Ult I, BlDGk I, SoIubweaof Cotfm1WClod Lane and Adehnaml. Priar Lab, Mizmesota ',I'hc poleolmioal ewlpatioD ~ IU1IIarlliIld lm AprfI2$, 2002, bia been oomp1eted. ThJ plIIJIOBC of tbiI ew.lualilllS^V&s fD obtafn IlIb8urfaI:e IOiIIIId ~iDfilrmulCIIl.fD au lD ""'~ . ftOC'''' -<!atloal witbrCgllrda l6mlel!'ldill8 ancllD prepa.iuap!lZlUDl!lp...18...ot_ tbrl!l1e proppsal but,,",,, and ft\tlU'e IddIUlIIlD 1'rior LaIclt, Mlnaeaola: Our aervlces _ ,-iL.....d in , 8ezIel'Il accarcIa1ce with Olll' CaIt -... dared April 19. 2002, and IJlIr' GcnaI3I Conditions elated P~~,1996,. - .-. - - _ ..... . Sn...",.l'f ofRaaltl . 8oflI. Six Itlu1dard P-"1ZPb 1I::Itborlup (ST.U throuah ST-I') __ ddIIe4 at 1be p10_..4 de tor tbH eva1C11iou. E18IIIft lOll tIarlIlgI wa'C pmloua1y pc:fonned by 131'111I1 rmen.c an tllia _ 'I'1u: boriDgs ~ about 1 fa 2 112 feet oflDploll iII4 fDJIIllIJ. ftl1 at the aurtlIce. Below tho l:apsoil and fDpI011 tuI, all the boziDp llltC8pt ST-3. ST"". ST-i1l14 ST-14 ClIKlOIIIltclre .m~ fiJI fD a cIeptbs rangfDg 1l'oII1 about 3 112 fD 10 feet. Balow the tlIpIIOil, topIail fill and BldstIna' fin, aI1uvi1land alaoill ~l>>'WII'O _~ fD 1heterlJl~...... depths, ofthc:~, . .. Grouadwatu- Meua..-euta. BIIId 011 lIIe barfDr cOllducted 0IlApri130, 2002, srouudwmr was not observed in !he boriDga willi. drIJlIq. -""'ty.. witbdrawal oftbc auger, water wu DOt .. oblerwd in the borIllp fD caw-in depths lIlI8iq from 1Ib0lll14 fD 17 teet. Bued. on the 1998 bllrlDp, ~ wu cmlyoblemcl while cIrilIiDa in Bmlzlp ST.IO and ST. ' 11 atdoptbsofabout61Dd5 _~ ~ -'"'wfDalnatillJUl oftbout94.21121Dd941. rcspcctIvcIy. Iulnlcdlmly dllrwldrdmra1 oflbulIaar, WDlrWU ~ inBoringa BT-2. ST-9 and ST-l1 at cIepths of about 8.1/2,S IIId 5.112 _lllII:nIpCIIllIto c1~ofabout940. 936- IJ2l111d 942,~. Groundwater MaDOtobeerved lD thef'!l'llo.mn,ll'bodngsto c:aw-ln clcplbs l'U1&iD8 frODl about 15 fD 16 1/2 foal, ImmI'(lIalcJf a&r withdrawal of the lIIIFl'. AbouI24Iloun.. withdrawal oflhe snaer. ~wu ob->'IllIInBorirJgST-2 atacfe.pth ofaboPt 8-' carrespllZldiD& to an elevaUca of about 840 lI2. SeIIOIIlIllDd IIIIlIlal fluctualiona of ~ IcwIa should be anticipated, apcaially tbllowiqlpriDg Ihllw or bea~ rainfan.. Snm....17 of Rec!olDDlllldatlou Buell on fbc 1'llIWIs of the soil bariasa. it appem tbat fill IIV.. plaoed aaoaa the lJllIiority of the sileo il QIIf oplDion that the topsoil. topIOil fill and exiItiDa fill IlDCOlmllll'CC! lD the son borinp are otentialIy compre8lib1e. The 1IIlC!erlylDg IWlIra! lOlls g=eraUy lIppear !IlIitable for bul1dma II1lpport. C 1011 bDriI1ge pg fu.Aa..d for thi. evaluation did not CllDtIln dabrla. ttuh or organil3l within the atlDg fill. The peDelratiOl1 rcsisbmces i"tIi-"1be lilllll&Y not have been placed in a controlled anner. No dootm1cnll1t1on was provided showing that =va.tion bGtloml ",ere obsme4 or ~cM.y,02 12;J7~j 1,11,.23. 2002a; 2:"2PMIAM </A BUILDING DIV. N:,6094 10. 5/42 bua-Andllrllon ProJ~ BOOX.o2-058 May 23. 2002 P&~2 ., compaction tutli were performed Supporting the propoaed..aad futurc building on the existing fill dOCll entail a rilIk of detrimezrtal BdtIemcnt due eo possible 1IlIkn0Wns within the till, For site preparal10n we areprovicllDi two aeueral approaches. TD aob~ reduce the earlier dOllCrlbccl riIlla, . eOllleIVUive approach otremovlng the exlstln, Bll from the proposod and Mare building me! oversize areas and placiq ea,gineered fi11 to c.mbliah fln;llh~ pd. GOUld be used. A le11 ocmservatlve approlllh to prepUl ~ lite cmafJs I1lppOl'tlDa the ptOJl~Bed and t\ltur1: ~ on the extsting fill after 'ClIIIe ClOIrUttve arthwork II pedbmlecL For tbc less GOQSCtVIItfvc IIpptOllch the foo!lDp GOUld be exteIIded cIowl1lz1 bear 011 the UIIdiIl:urbo4111tura1 aoila or the lllIiatinr ft11 could be !elllOWd tl'cm below the fo01lnp and ovenia &rail lIIId)'1aafDs backftU and ftlll8!'eC011ltnCt1dc in 8llction c.3.b 1zI ob1ain deehed.... Tbete 1_ ~ 1JI)lRIaCbe. support the floor I1ab9 Oft tke exiJtiDa till.. SUppcll:dug b JII'OPOIeIl bui14ln, alab on tbe exlItlng fill cIotI entail.. rilk of .dt!e:n:sent due to poulble 1IIlb0Wll8 wi1blD the fin. The riIk of JIOIIibIe bWlcliD, IlIb aeIt10mmt DIlIIt be aBsU111C4 by the owner, 'lbia tlIk OlD be nduaecl by p...!to......QI additillll&l tat pita prior to ut l1uriDa COIlBtrllotioD to further evalIlatlI the tllitabillty aflhe flIllOIls. CompaeUon tom IIld I1IriBce comp8Cting with .. krp, lelf-prope1lecl vJbratoty 0- ..., .."fu. coukI alao be Jledl...-S to lMluaa the cOllsiatency of the fill, . ,Sued 011 OOIllp1ianoe with the lite prIlpamiou approaahel, it II 0IIl' oplllilll1 the pl'O]IOSed and 1hture bufldinp can be ~1IeC1 on & 'Wlca11ba1low Jpn:ad footlDg four1dati= BYllIm d-"'aull:l for.._ allowable soil bLllriDg pl'OIIIInl up to 2,SOO po1IIIds per square iilOt (psf). Sued on land)' lCUl cky BDd cJ."., a-' ~ ... flOC "II1l a pavem=t lecdOll COIIIiitina at ~ inches OflritumlDOU8 avr:r 8 inchea of cruabed aaareaate hue for _ pIIt'ldIIg ucas. For drive lrc:IIa, we rec:""""""'d a pa9CD1Cllt-Uon consialiDa 014 inches ofbmlmioous ~to OVlll' 9 mQhes of' crushed &areaafe bue. GeIleral P1_ mer-to the atlac.hecl report for Il more ~ed ~of01ll' ana1yaea __.........datUms. Tlw1k)'OU for the opporl:w1I1J to be of 8IlrVlce on this projeat. Ita 0111 provide ld4itIona1 assis1anca 01' oblervation 8IId ta8llDs ICI'Vice8 &IIlZiIlg llOlIItrucliCJll, pleue call Rob Galllll at ($07) 281.2SfS or Gn:g Bia10n at (952) 43104493. Sincerely, , B~/7jv Robert A. Golish. KI.T Sta1r&gineer . ~~~~ AMociate Principll! AtllChment: 0e0tec:.bnica1 Bvalwltlon Report ....lib:lpk\Q2DS8'q1I !23-May'O.21,a:37pl \hY u " ,- 200213 2:42PM4AM KIA BUiLDING DIY, "- 6 0 94 )\',.!- p , . 6/42 Table of Contents Description Pase .A. liltr'oductlcm....__.,......._._....................._............_.............u..........H.................H..'"'....................... 1 .A.I. Projcct..........._............_...._....................._.........._.........__....__..._..._..._......_._....... 1 J..2. Pulpose....._04.................;......_......_..........._...__........_......._,.........,_........_.......,_, 1 A.3. Scope _...'.....,........._.................."....,........__.:__...__...._.....................................................1 A.4. Available Iwfv...~OD.-.....__._......................_........._...._....A_._..".._.._._.--.--.........2 .A.S. LoGItICJl1I and BIe\1a1ioDs..._...___...__....._.........,............__.........._.._........_......2 B, ResuJ.ts......_.............__""................_.............,.................,........_..._.__.._..........___...__............ 2 B.I. 1.0.. ......,....--......_.____.................._...~u_.._.._...._...._......,_............._........2 B-2. Sail. ........--.............._....._.1"'..._.__.___....._.........._...................-..........................3 I B.3. ~_......._-,-........-...........I.......N..I.........____..__-l_..........__....1..4 C. AMlyaeaad.R.eoo~.......__.__..._....__.I1_,..............___.__....___......_.....,...4 e.l. ~"'~CaaItruodcII...".......__...._"..".._.._._~__......"............._......._........_4 c.1. DisGuBIioI:I."~'",........_.:...._~__u,._..._.,...It..............._........_.....~...__...___........... s C.3. Site ~_._..,-_......,.........~.......................;;.......:..._._...._.I.I...,U....U..I...I..H..".."'...... 6 <=-4. PoUDdatlOlll._...,.."_...:...._........~.....:__......._........_............_._._..___....__........._.8 CoS. F1oor1.....-....-....-_....._.I_.........__.___...__...__....I."..._.....lrHI...._............. 8. e.G. :BxtcIicr SJal!ts ....,..-_.."........_...__...__............_....._...._.____.._._..........,.9 C.? Site Gradk1s 8D.d Dtamap:.,............~._..._...AA.A..._.........._............_........___........ 10 c.s, Udlitlea__....._~_.._.._.......__n'_..........._._.....__........_...........................10 C.9. Pa'vcmmtDes!gn.. . . ~..--..-_._................-.....--__.__...._..........10 D. ~otiOZ1t1,.",...._.....I_..-.._.............-.._._,......._......II.."..........".....,..............................12 D.l. mcavaticJll...__....__.............._..__......_...._....,..........."'...................,._................. u D.2.. Obsc:rv-til'lrllll .---..-..-...................._-_.._.__..................~...l._..............12. D.3. Test:fcla.....-.....,.......-_.._............__......_..__........:........................__.............13 D.4.. Cold Waa1!Jer _...._._,..,....._......................._......._..._AI_......_.._.........__..........,....13 Eo Prooi:d1.Jrea _..,.....__...___.......__..............__......__..._................_................._...........13 'B.I. DrilIiDg axul 8"""1_.....;......._._........._,................____.,.__.....____......_....13 . B-2. Roil t"!I...Mca.tIoD.s__.................._"..,...."'...._........,................._.._............_............,_ J4 B3. ~ObIcrvatiana_....__...__........___.........._"....._._..._..__.........,_.. 14 P. GeDeraI Rea 1".1- F.2. P.3. PA. P". ....~QDI......._,................"...........~,....._-........-......__._....__.._....._..........14 Buia af'RIoomaIenda: ...-......_..............._..._....._......._.........__.................. 14 R.evi.. of.Dcs:lIDo_............................_..........._.......__........................__.._......._..... 14 0r0Imdwaer Pluott"'ftft. .....--~..-....._....._...t-..._....._.._.....;."N'.............,.............lS UseofR,cpart......_.._......,...._............................._.....__....____.._......15 I..c:vc1 of~"........__n"......".,,,....,..........~._......,........._._......_......_,..__....._......1' ProfeaaioDal CertificatiOD Appendix BOJfDg Loc:atlon Sketch Daooriptlve TennIIloIogy Loa ofBoriag ShHls ST-! tlu'Dagh ST-1? Pence IliaaDm 1230'~.y-O.2 1<!,'J7I>1 MiY2: 2DD2a; 2:43PM>AM KIA BUILDING DIV. N0.6094 IP. 7/42 BRAUN" I INTERTEC ....." .......C C8rpc0ratlan 69S0W..IA6th SlIM', S.....I~l Apple VoIloy, Min_ 5'124-8~20 9S2.43104493 Fax: 9S2.431-308A Sogi..." and ScfOfIH... s...m" fIl. 8uIh and NGtutlJl El!vilDlMIll/1'" , " .. A. Introduetfon . A.l. Project . , It is plannod to deaip 1114 OOllIlrUCt a DIle-stbry, a1a~ buiIdiua Ioaa1ed in Prior Lalce, MinnC801a. The propoad buil4lBs hu a.lbolprlnt afapprcm-ly 21,500 square feet. It is our lIIIdel'StMlt'ln,g thet a Illmikr balldlq may be ~ OIl the west Iicle orllle proposed butldlDg In the n.ear fi1ture. A.2.. Purpose Tho parpot4 oflbia geotecpnical.,.u....d"'lWU to fIYIluate ~ lOilllld aroundwater CondftfOlllatft1e lite. 1110 iftfl . "'.,'''' o~ Wlllalclm....tm,g.~-".._.ltbItillllS with reprda to 1i18 sradiDc lIIIIi 11M blaoADdIrIaD CoIlIlruatiaa Company lIIIIi their COIIIU1t1l1t1 in d08lSDfng toundallonallld in pl'l!pIriDlll'llIIIIllICl apllllifiaatiou :lbr tbc proposed constructicm. . , A.3. S&:Ope Mr. DermU MiDsb with ICraus-ADdlnon 0lIIItru0tlcm CODIpID)' mtbarizecI.llIlD pmgeed with OOI1ductlDg sotI borlnIIlID4l""""'.uOll afagootocbatcV ewIaation re,pcll'tOl1Apnl25, 2002.. Our services were provided In general accozdsnce with our Cost Bstimae dated 1Ipri119, 2002, md our General CmutitlllIIS clatcld Pcbmary I, 1996. . Our proposed aoope of semces oonsisted of: ", . : . 51aking the requesrecl borini Iocatiou, . ,coordiDatIn,l12le c1cu1ng ofpub1i!l1llililiel, . drilUDs Ifx IUmdard pcnelrIliOlllelt borinss to cIept'b. of.'II4M 20 filet bolow exilting arade 18 I1IpplCDllll1t the ariai1lI1 e1ewm borinp DOlIdua114 u part ofBnan Jmertec Pra:i- BODX-97-389., . datlmniDiDS ~Oldw.lte around sunIIce clcvatioaa at the bariJIs 10Clt1ollll, . t'lltIIrnlq (he lIIIII1ples to our Iaboratmy for 'Vinal olallfiOltlon and 10PB by a poteolmical enafneer, , . eClllduoUDg labcntory testa on llC1ect SlIDIplea. . sna1)'ZiDJ tbe results IIId fommlatinIteCClII1DllIDdaliOlll, and :23.-~.y-j)212:307P.l MIY '::, 2002~ 2:43P~AM KIA BUILDING DIY, No,6094 rP, 8/42 . .,KtallSoAndenron -Project BOOX..o2..oS8 : May 23, 2002 Page 2 . subtniWng a aeotvclmieal na1uaUo1> tepQl't &)OntalrIiIIS lags of the bDl1ngs, a dtseuBalon of tile 8Ubsur1llco soil snd lIfllUllI!\OiUer ClOIlditiaal, &lIIIour racOl1llllClldlltions far lite at'ldillS snd foUlldation deaian: . ., AA. AvaDable IntormatioJl Mr. MiDaIce provided UI WI1h a Bile plall titIe4 ''Nllllllt'' wbich tboMld tho JIfOPCIIIld bw'ldiDg, fIrture buildina. propotlld parldnl arna, topop'aphiGal f'catllrc8, odatiq IIrllIllI rmcl p1'OplB'l:)' , linea, Tho plan ...... p!epue4 byPope AIm*' cd wu dated .April 23. 2002. A gIlOteolmical evaluation was ~ CCIIIdw:Ial ~ this lite for AmaoD. ~CXl, The results of the eYaluation were anltmItMd 01' ll1Il' rapon da!Ild IIl11l181Y 22, 1998, IlII4er Bmm Interteo Project B0Dx.97-389. A.5. Locld1oulud Elavatioaa , Braun Intertec staked the dedred berIq lOO8I1GIII In 1he fieklllSing the exisliDg ~ III retel:euaes.. The approximata barllIg 1OllllUcmI_ .mwn CXl1he IIcelch m the AppeIIdilI. , ., SwlBoe elevatiOlll at the barbIIIIl~Zlaas IWR rafcmncod to the 1XIp DUt o''lbJI fll'a hydrant located on the south side ofCcltrw"uudI.l8 _theno.ttbeasl.c:omeroftbaplllpllfly. An c1l:V1Uon of'948.03 _pr0ftde4ftlrour~ Barfup ST-! tbrousJtST.U eaad=et1upmof Project BODX-97-.3&9 uaed. sn U8UIIlIld elevadCXl of 100 far tbIs datum. . 'B. Results 8,1, Lop Las ofBariog ahllCllS !IllUoallnItheclcpths ami ~ oflb8 'IIIlriaaa soil Sll:IllI, peneb1ion I'elilbn05, labcltaury testreau1ts aIld 8lO\llIllWaUIr ObscrvatiDDllll'llltllC~ The strlIIa c:1Ilmecs Wllra irl&rred from the cbanaes In 1Iu: penelral:illllll:lt IlIlt'IlPI-1lId aupr "''*"''p h cleptbs II1o\w 88 ClbmpI betWeCl1lhc stIalI Ira aaIy appnlltimatIl. 'lbll cIwlgea ara ~ 1rlmBiti0llS and the deptba of the ahmges wU1 \I8t)' b.,t,.-. the borinst, Oealogto arisina presented for eaah Itratum on the Los ofBorins sbeels are based on the soil types. bloWll per foal, and avallable CODlIDlIIl knawladga of the depos!Ucm.tl hlslmy of the site. Because of , 123"Ka~,02,: 12:3.7PI :~1Y23, 2:02a 2:43PM>AM KIA BUILD[N~ DIV, No,6094 p, 9/42 Kn.1lS-Andlll'lOn Projellt BODx.o~-o58 May 23, 2002 Pagll3 the complex. ilacial8lld JlOSt-slWal cIepostIicmallll1W-"" "Ill. aeolllJic oriPIs III'C frequently difficult to alcenain. A detailed!ll~ ofd1e polopc hiatoJy oflhe Iita wu not pcrful1llCll. j- B.2. SOUl The 8oi1a l!llIllOImtered in the borings are ..........ri2ed in the .MtIOD' below. During ciriJliD& pene1rat!on reslstallce tests _ peaomled III tbo bariDp. The TllINlt& are &hown on the Loa of Baring IIb=Is iD the col\llDlllllllbd "BPF' (blowa per :ilIot). Peaetration mIstaIlce valuell JlrcMdo 'an indication of1be rolalIve dentltilll or atreIIatha oltJ>> mmrials cnco\lllt=d. B.Z.a. ToplOlJ lUIcl Top.oil 1IIIL The bcdnp _Un1meCI about I to 2 112 feet oftopaoi1 and lOpIOI1 ftlllll the aur1kce. The topIo!I ftUwas seneraDY 1eID clay wilh IIIIIi and lI8Ildy lean clay that were dark brown to black lD Color. B.2.h. Jm. Below die topSOil ad topeoil fill, aD CbeborlDp CllllCpt ST-3, ST-4, ST-811ld ST. 14 CDOOUIlCtlred fill 110 dcpdII of about 3 1/1 to 10 teet. The tm was ~ II1ldy leaD oIay, a~ 1III1I.d, cilt,y sami, pacr'Iy gaded IIftd IIId 1lOOd7 gradccl and wflh I1lt t!Iat,wcrc brown, liaht brown, clark: brown IIlcIpylsh bzown in color. l1Ie p....a1loD rcslI1auocs ill the clay and clayey _d fill l'IDgCd bn" to 13 BPF. ThependraUcm ~ lD the I&IIC! f111 nnaed fiom 10 to 17 BPF. ll.2.~ AJluvial DepcIIltI. Below tbo lIOpIOlI, \IllpIOI1511 &IIll1!ld0!ftt8 fiI1. aU the Bodnp DXcopt ST.S, ST.8, ST.9, ST.l1, 9'1'-12, ST-lo4 aud ST.16 8IIOOIIIltmd alluvial depollu to depths %I1\Iiq fiom about '6 to III teet. The exaeptiOD WU BorIIlg ST.7, which ~ ill an al}uvial dep08lt. The lUuvial ~ ware plIcn11ylcsnolay. tan clay with IIlId, IlIIIdy leIm oIay, lilt, sf1ly sand IIDd poorty gradccl.un4 with lilt lIIu were Uaht browzI, ~Ih Imrtvn, ~ _ bm__ . in color, . . PCIIlltratiDII reslJllmCeI in the aIluvlallalds IIIlIlI1ts raapcl ftOZll6 to 16 BPl', iDdieatIJla loa. to DlCCti1lD1 dINe conditiou. Penmtian reeI~ in tba aUuvial c1a}'l1llll olayay IIIldIlIIllFd ftom 4 to 11 BPF, Indicatlni 1'lIIber IOtt to ratber lUff 9'lIl1lltioall. B.2.d. GIu1al Depolita, Below tbe topaoiI, toplOll1!11, qlllfi"l1ill aud alluvial depoaita, the llorinp IDaOWltol'Cd glada1 dapoatta to tile c......l._II"" clcptbsoftba borinp. TIll glaalaJ c1epollit! WIII'e poera11y leau olaf.1csn oily wlth I8Il4, IIIldy lain oI~, ola3NIY 1aDd, lilt)' aDd and poorly graded II8JId with 1I1t that ware brown, dark brown. arayi8h bmvit, llI'IlY IDld dazlc: gray in color. - . " . 123>-M.v-02: .12:37P1 MaY.23, 2002a; 2:43PM;!'lM KIA BUILDING DIV, N0.6094 IP, 10/42 XrallA.A:Ilderson ProjCllt BODX.o.z.o,S May 23. 2002 Paae 4 Penell'atlon resistallCC In the ~laaJal8and was 14 Bl'l'. lndloWi a medium dense CODditiOl1. PCl1elration rclistanoea ill the a:Jaolal clay. mlllllayey aand& rqed ft'om 7 to 20 !In. lndlcallng lllIldium to ve:y .tiff cand1tfDDS, with tile ~orlty beJna ralher stlft. ., B.3, G\1IUDdwatir \ BuecI on the boring clll14W112d CII Aprf130, 2002, grcun4watet was not observe4 in !be borines ' while drilliDg. Immedi&tely IftIr 'Wilbdrawal oflbe auger. 'WIler 'WU nct obacncd in the borinsa , to cave-in depths 1'8DIi11e from about 14110 11 fllIIt. . Basecl 011 the 1998 'borinp. ~ wu oaly oblcrvcd while dri11ln11n Borinp ST-IO and ST-ll atdl!pt!lB orabout 6 ancI5 k.lI01ftIJIClIIdfllll e1evatlollJ otabout 94Z 1/2 and 941, respeotiVely. Immelllatcty a&rwitbdmval ofd1e &Iller, 'WatIr 'NU oliscrvcd inBorillgll ST-2, 87-911I4 ST-lt at depths ofabout 8112, 5 ~ 5 ]12 feet, aomspcmdfngto 01cvati0ll8 ofabout 940, 936 112 mi 942, rupclll1:i9D1y. OroD..dtr_ was not oblmlllClln the r=:aaining borinaa to ca'Ye-iDdeptbs...n&i"r1i-oJlubout611O 161/2.tllet,I"""""t"'elyaflcrwlthdnwal ofthuuaer. About 24 hours s1ler withdrnaJ. bfthe 13Ipl', &nl\III4water was obtcn>ad in BmiDs ST -Z at a depth of about 8 feet, CI~ 110 lZlal_lion ofabout 940 1/2. Seuonal eld &IIftU&I f1Wltl11ticaa of 1J:'Cl'IIIIdWll1a' 1neIJr'.bcNld be IDtialplted, eapellially follmrlDs IIpI'Ins 'IIlaw orheayy...m4Ion. ., C. Analyses and Recommendations Col. Proposed CoultrlU!tlaD. . The propoaed building wlll be a ~i ~ sbuoture '&pJll'Oldmately 21,500 square feet III _. Mr. },IJtt.~ lndicated the Ilructure8 willlibly be Ileol fi'amc4 'With masomy blook folD1dllion walls. ~ IIId drive _ 'WIll be IDeated to tile IIOrtb or1bc: l'fOP08cd building, II ill our UDderstJmd..... tbat a tIIlIn buIIdfoa of the same ~ may bo ClOII&tnJotcd Oll the west side oithc proposed buildlq ID the De. ft1lIIre. Specific loads wen llotawfillhluUbc time ortis report. For lbe basi! otthla report, we ha"" lUJDmllld wall lad will be leas thJD Sldp& (5,000 polllldl) per linlla1 foot mi column loads will be JelSS than 60 kip.. Mr, Mlnslce indicated a finisbed flDor elewtiClll of 949. , " " 123-H.y-(}2',la~'37P I MiY,::, 1002~; 2:44PM;AM KIA BUILDING D1V, No.6 0 9 4 IP, 11 142 Krau..AIl.denOl1 Proj=t BODX.o2..QS8 May~3.200.2 Paa:e5 If the ptopOle6 loads exceed tbeIe values, if the JInlPOIOdJrldll dUl.lD by I1lIl1'e than 2 feet liom the usumed valllCS, or if the desian or location of the ptapOud 1114 fttture bultdlng II1'As c:banp, we should be fnfonDed. Additional aDalY8es ~rmaech'llCl""'~CIldal1lU1S !Il&y'be neceuuy. '. , , C.2. DJsclW10ll Baaed lIIlltle relUl1l oithe sollllotilla8. it app .. WIt fill WII previously placed across the majoritY of_lite. It Is our opinion thu tbe tllPIDll. topsoil ftI1 and exlJtinc till eacollllWred in the 8ClIl b~ arc potantiali)' vomprulible.. '1bI ~ III.t1DlIOl'ls er:ncn1ly &JlP8lI1' IIIIUlblll for building IlIppOrt. The loil borlnp pertbmuld for this ~ (ST.12 d!roughsr-l7) and the aoIl borinas pre'lliolllly pIll't'on:qlld &1 thls site (ST-t tbroush, ST-tl) did not contain debris. truh or ozpniOI wftbin the eldaUng.iUl. The penetrat!1IIl 1'IIfIlDIIeI iMlr:J.w the flU may not bave been pIaGGd ill s OOlUrOllecl-m1~, No doc\lmealItIlIII \VII pmvIded BbowIn& !bat excavation botlama W\InI ob.served or oompIOtion teItI WEn ~1h.-4. Supr-lb.g'the pIOpOIed and 1iIturt 'bIIIldia& on 1be lllCiJliD. fill ~ cmtail a rilk of dldr.in1Imal .-1 clue ll:l poisible 1mbovmI witbiD 1ba fill, It is ow ~I that the ~ ofl"rJor Lake _ involved with the prevIouI padlDg on this property. Iftbere is cm..1au ltlral:lonawi1ablc fCII'oiiq the IIIIta!Iilit)' Didio _ftIlcmbollum 80ils end the exi.tiag fin IOn.. """l\!~0II could be siv= 10 buil_ dtrecl1y lID the ex.Istina 1illlOils, The =aindc of UIlJ report UIUIlIeS that this infomwIon Is not lMi1able. . ., For lite preparal!0I1 we an: providiag two apJll'lIIIIhes. To suba!Intlally redaao tbe lllII'tiIlr deIoribod tIIlca. .: DOlI8e1'fttnoe app:aaah afr.......v!I.g the exlIIlDI fillliam thll propolllld and 1'uture bl1iIdin. and oversize lll'IlII and pI.omg engI!Iecn:d 1!U to eIlIhlilh fmf""lId JPdea could bellied. A leu llClII8erW.Uft approaoh to pt8pa.O tbia an. ..ua IlIpportlDg the propolGd and t\1turo bllildu,g 01> the uia!!ns flll abr _ llOtl'IIl!lve eII1I1walk Is pcrfcirmcd. Far tb1ll1pp1'01Cb, we 1'llCIn......_d exml~me the footizIp cICl"Mlto bell' on the 1IDdiatuzbed''Il&NrI111OiJ. or l'C:lIIOVing the c:xiltlng tnI ftam below the footinp ed overI* ueaa IIICl p1acina 'bIDldillIllld:lillu reoommen4ed In Section C.3.b to obtain deJIred pdeI. The soil comc:tlO1lS should be complllWllIDder ell m1llldalioDa. !Ilc1wltng !D1mor colllllll1 pads. Suppw, dbg lhe buildine a1ab 011 the exiI!IDC 1U1 does entail I ItIk or ,-..........t ~ to possill1c lUlbOWlll within tho fill. The rla1c of'powale Ind1dina a1ab ~--tJllIlIt be I18I1mllld by lhc owner. 123,.Hay. (12 . 12",37P 1 i;',,23, .2002ai 2:44PMiAM KIA BUILDING DIV N0.6094 ,p, 12/42 bUll-Anderson Project :aODX.o2..QS8 ~ 23,2002 Page 6 " rithe 0_ lCaclplS d1e risk of aupportlng the building slab 0Il1he axislilli ftIl in cmlClJ.' to III.va the COlt ofl'lllDoWll and rep1aciD, it, we reco=d fUrther obBerv8ticm. IlId denlity tllItI of the existilla fill be OOftducted at the _ of cOll!lNction to filrther evaluate 'the till, The llXiatin.i fill .bould have ~ClIl values ofat IClISt 95 permmt ofitlllllllimum dry _ity .. dlltem11ned in accordance wilh Amcrica:n Soaiety for T8ItitIS IIDd y,~l. (ASTM) Test MetI10d D 698 (standard Proator), In addltlOll the Bum- ~iIa IhcNl4 110 IlIdlIIlC llOIIIp8Cltcd with a 1~ self- ' propell1l4 ~ratDry compllCtm. It areu WllD't oampaat, thGy aboul4 be 1'elIlGVed and replaced with a oompaotablc material M.lIll'W lIlIl: --. dlfI C""lp"oUOll criterion should be removed and repJa0e4 With a oompaotable \1lAl8risL pm IICIII1lIIJIlDg dCbrla or ~sab1e materialJ lbould 11.0 be re:rtIDWll Jffbe risk ofbul14lq a1ab 1ett1em=t 8IIOOiated with un~ OOInptesaib1e at de....wpv..ble matllrtalJ IllIIIIGlIIIplllble, the 811 should be _d from. , beneath the JlIOPosed floor IIlId ftpIaaed WIll1 MlP'~ t1IL Co!, Site Preparation C.3.a. SltbueavIUOD. The ~tabla IIIIImIIIrIzeI tile ~'.jp~ c:xcava1Um dap1hJ at the boring loc:aloIlB r.o nlmove 1he topllllll" UlpIolI an and moHtlg tIIlln tbc propcjaod aud wtllro buildi!lg area. " , Table 1. >>...._ ElevatloDl ofV..1I1talHe SoDa , ApprnilDate Depth ApproxImate Bottom S1Irfaoe Elnatloll ofUuultabJe SoIl efJ!:lravadOD ll_tiOD BorIDZ (teet) (feet) ((elt) ST-l 948.4 (1ooA) Pad:iq Area ST-2 948.5' (100.5) Parkins Area ST-3 945.9 (97,9) . . 2 944 ST-4 94U (98.9) 2112 9441/2 ST-S 9S1.1 (103,1) 4 947 ST-6 9S1.1 (103,1) 4 947 ST-7 9S0.7 (102.7) 7 943 1/2 ST-& 944,7 (96,7) 11/2 943 ST-9 941.6 (93.6) PlIl'lciDa Area ST-IO 948.4 (100.4) fJrldDg AJ:e& 123,Mov'02 12,!7P1 r~ ~ y . 23 20020 2: 44PM7AM KIA BUILDING DIV, ~ N0.6094 p. 13/42 . - K.ra1l8-Anderson ' '.. I'roJeot BOPx,,0;2-0S8 May 23. 2002 - Pag~ 7 .., APprox11DJtl Depdi' , Approxbnatc BottolD Surfaoe :el'VatlOIl of UllRitlble SoIl llfEJa,wtlon EJnation !Joma (feet) (feet) (feet) ST-l1 945.8 (97.8) Parking Area ST-l2 948.2 4 944 ST-13 948.3 4 9441/2 ST-14 946.6 1112 r 94S ST-1' 948" ... 4-IStf2 942-9441/2 ST.16 946.0 4 942 , ST-I? 951.5 *4-61/2 94S - 94? 1/2 ... These areulhDl1ld he filrIIler tvIluallld dllri1lS ilia 'lIIIle of COIIUUOt!OII tor suitability of the lean cla1 with.. for ~UIldadoa IIuppart. , The depth ot'thc subexCA'ftliall wlll1lkeJfwry between tile borIIlp aid shoI1I4 be db~"d ill. tlto :Iitl4 at 1be time of the Ii1II pdlq. Tho!lllllllllulD depth otUllllli1ab1e aoI1s wlllllbly exce.ed the depths eJIllOU11=ed by 1he bQrInp. Al8o, it II typical to exCllVlSC 1/2 lD 1 foot deeper thm the """9\1t'111""" IJO........-yto olea !he boftOm of a mbexcnadcm. S11be:la:avatiDDllbould be cmalr.ed tlI p1'09Ide latmal ~ for tbe b8cldUl. The boImma of the lllIbexc:avaliDDllhoukl be 0YIl'IIzecI1It leg 1 fool beylIIId tI1e pcrh:aclla- edges otthc lbotlnas , tOf caeb foot of subexcaw.tlclll billow 1lI11 bclIlomI afme toodIlgs (IH: IV ovenlizlna)_ c.3.b, lJto~-llUId i'UL Wllf'W''''''''''1'' "--11 be: delJtia :he, ~...ac. miIIalIl soil placed and compallIlld ..rec. IL"._._"'d In die tDnowing~ Sanely gmellDd IIIId are gmamDy preterred IDIlllnaII, ..they are euter to compact. '1h: OIIoeilll.on. (aoepi tapllOSl IIDd tlIpICIIl ftD) are pacn.lty Judae4 to be JIIitahle fino reuse II C:USiMete4 bao1cfill or fill. , We n:camma 1he fill be placecI in lifts !:lOt elt~-ollnJl8 to 12 iftaIlu m tl.l,,1mftq: depc:uding on the type of DllIfe11al and size of l'''"ll'''ator beIna usccI, The malIlria1 abcla1d 1Iaw: mal8lure <laI1tea.ta within 3 ~ paiDra ofiU optimum moIRlre cODlcDt. Eaah 1ifl: IIbould be computed to a ndaimI&m of9S percent ofiU maxlmlDl1ch)> clc:usily 1& delermiDed in 8mlOl'dance wifh.Amllrican SoGIaty for Teatioa and Ma1erla11 (ASTM) Ted Method D 698 (1I&IIdan1 , Prootllt'). 123-M..,02' 12:3.7~1 --, ---- ---'"-.-.-- - ....,.. "'-'.'-- ----.-----.-----..---- ., ., Ivl;y,23. 20020; 2:45PM,1'IM KIA BUiLDING DIV. N0.6094 IP,! 4/42 ',' Kraus-Ancle:rsOIl Projo<:t BODX.o2..oS8 May 23, 2002 Page 8 CA, Foumdatiou. CA.a. Depth. We recol1llMlld the foolinp tbr heated atr1lctures bean minimum of 3 112 feet below a4jacent ext1:riot sm- for 1toJC pmeetiOl1. ImIll:IOX' 1'wd\.8& may be placed iJnmecIiately Dlll\ath the .lall, If winter _1tl'IlCtI0Il1J bclDg llCIIlIilIered, we l()Ou..........d the interior footines a1ao boar II minDzmm of 3 113 fa~ llaJoolv srade ~ 1toat protcdlon. ., , We =ommend 8llY isola1l!d lIlIJICrio: 1'oo1:l:ap bave . mlntmIJ'1l of S teet of caver over the top of , the foDtmas. We recomml!lld pi- otfaolated exrcrIar 1botlDga (it any) be .ewrely tied to the footinllS with reinfcm:ina 10 that!'DalllOl1 adilIlrlq lID the lido ortbe piers do not heave the piers, , ,CA.b. S1Ibgnde, At these cIeptbJ we 1IltIal]latc that the fbuDdatiolll will bear OIl the en,aineerecl fill or JIllturlI! solls. CA.e. Bearina Preuun~ Bued OI1l11e feIU1ts ottbe borJnaa II1Ii completion of the rcc..._cIec1 site prepamlcm, It II 0lII' opfIIIcm the foundations CIlD be """;Il"ed fbt a net aIk1wable IOil bearina plUllll'll up 10 2,500 pcIU1Ids per IlqIW'e foot (JIsf). This bearm, prl:18lII'e includes a fllCtor of wel;Y 01'3 with Mpld to IheBr flI1Ime. , CA.d. Settl_blt. Baled OIl tbo IISlIII1Cd loads, we IIltioipate lIDtalllld dtft\;.C1tl&1 aettlmlIem ~f'tbe :Iil1lllclaUOIIS lVi1l be lell tban 1 btch IItICI. 1121Dcb. reapeGlive!y. Suuatum IIimillll'to the proposed lIlruo1mo CIlD pac:raIly tolerate sett1e1l1C1lt DtthiS tIIIIgnitude. . ., CA... berior B..~wm, W. rea.............. bacldUl plllce4 OIl the exterior sldu oftbo follDdiltlOll waUa In laudseaped IIl'CU be C""Ip"m.ed 10 II ~m'"" of90 pcrllCDt of _dud l'roctor maximlIm dry clen8ity. Benet1h steps aad slabs, It should be CO"lp.IJtBd lID a minimum of 9S P_Illt. SoiJI ti:om tho tootlll8 excavations maybe IeIIIlld as btlQWiIl. BsDkfill sbou1d be . bfcluIbt up wltbnll1y on both Ildes of1he foundation wa11s to m1nm;t.... 4I&p1at--"'lt of the t'oandllioa WIolIL C.5, Floon C,5,II. Subgrade.' Aftec the buildiDapad pnIJlal'atim1llu been eomplclod, we anticipate tho tloor subgrade will eonsist DflClU1 o1I,y lolls. Baoldill t!I fooling and mecbanioal trenel1ea shou1d be ~ to a minimum llf95 pmellt otm ITlIIUfard Proctcr (ASTM D 6118) m..Ahu..... dry dlllBity. r~3'M.y.-02, J2.3.~1 " MaY.:3, 2002~i 2:45PM'AM KIA BUj~DING DIV, N0.6094 ,P, 15/42 bUS-Anderson Project BODX.02~58 May 23, 2002 Page 9 , , C$,b, Sand CluhtOD. We re"""'"'l""" the 6 iIlchea of fill ~llOed immediately below tIu: llOJIerete 11th 00DIi.It of sand c:oDtainins leu thau S penl8llt fine. by wetsht pwlng a '200 liave, ThllIIDd ousblcm, will provfcle a lcvelini base. 'The smd ClllbiOl1 should bDlllm1I*ted to at lout j5 peraetofthe lIIIldanl Prootormui",n", dry dCZlliW, , C.5.c. Vapor lbtJu'd../BIrrJer. Iftloor ~p or"""" 10Is JNlnIlCJble 'lban the COIICrlIte .lab will be lISed, or llma!alllre is I oonoem, \W rcc:............d that a V&pCIl' flllIrder be placed 'beDea1h lIIc Jloor .slab, (ioIlI8 covarlDgI. C08IfDp or ~ lIIIY nquiro a vapor barrier, 1.0., Ii IDeIlIIbrane with . Jll'l1""'IIIllO .. dlan 0.3 peI'IIII.) Induatly Il8lldardI obi ROllJIIUl107J<I b~ the '9IpOl' rellInIer or hemer beAeaIh a layer of IIJId to =- CIll1Jna md .n.m.....r oftbe c~, but 1hi8 practice riJlal tNpp1IIg lIVItIcr-bew.am lhe s1ab .~d '9IpOl'rellrder or bmier. , c.s.d.. SlIbJradeMod1lluJ. W....fI.f8lbfloaraubgrlden.I1lCOllSlltofc:laysoiIJ, We. mI_ .., -" a ZIJillcllllllA of IU!lsrade RlICIlClll, lr" of 100 p"'md. per lq1IIreiDah per iIIch of 1!~-ti0ll (pci) be uud fa design _ flaar wi1b a c]q 1IIlbarade. If 6 tDcbDI c4 CftI8bed &\GA. or 8l-awl road bale ia p\lced f..""..MI~1y bCDealh the alab, the JlIlICIu1I18 aouId be inlIruse to ISO poi. C,6. ~or Slabl We 1lK~ ~d liJat veptatiOl1aD4 topsoJl be .~vad from beaeath exteI'!Dt IIaba. Filla IDl1 ,*,~I. should be camplllfe4 10 a mm""'lll of9S pe:centofItlndamProclDrmt-"" dry . llensi1:y. , The 0IWtlc 1elIll clay, sandy lelll cla)>. o1ayey &aDd 1IIIll1i1~ IIIIC1lOil1aro clII1Stdered tmst- ~Ie aolb. If these soIlI b.l. - ....-ted IIId ~ 1 to 3 incbes ofheaw m~ 000tIl'. ThII heave DIIY be a nui88DCO for IIlaba or.. ill bat of cIoClflIlld at other critical grade araa. 0J1e way to reduce this heave ia T.O _ me talMll8cCptlbJe Ioi1a clown T.O bottom-of.foDtiDg . level orJeP1acc: them with ~ -= or andy er&wl. Sand or SlI%2dy IIl'&Wl wt1h IllS 1han S percent of lhe parliollla by waJPr POO-. & JIIIIIlber 200 sieve is COllBid=ed norma. a11lllC1plible. U'thIl approach is used, we l\lllo ..,n""'" .. dr8izI pipe be blsta1lo4 TD mnow my wamr tIw ~ cDllect In the 88I1d lIl' aanQy gravel. The belliom otiM aubexcawtlOl1 &ho1l1d be sra4ed 80 the water flows to where it can be aolleaT.e4 by dill pipe IIUI. dmiDed to another drain die 01' a WUAlr collector syBlem for clisaharp. 123''''.v,02;, 1~,37P I !0]y,23 2J02i). 2:45PMlAM KIA BUILDIN3 DIV, N0.6094 ,p,! 6/42 " KnIus.Anderson Projoct BODX-02-OS8 May 23, 2OD2 PIF 10 An ai_live Jllethad ofreduoblg!'oat be&ve Is to place I minimum of2 inclles of extruded '. , po1yatynmc fallt1llna\llalioll benealh the Ilaba aDd c:xlelldiD& abom 4 fl:ct bayand the BIIba. The lnaulalion will reduce frost penetmian in1D ~ unclerly\q 1IIbgnu!e am:! tb.eteby redIIllO aV1:. Sbc to twelve \nolle. at granu1ar material D 1l"ZU'falI1 pJ.sead over tbo lnaII1l1tion to pIlIteclt it chu:iDg eonltrUotion, Arlotbt:r a1lema1ive for reduams ~ Ilea'" Is to 1UppCIlt!be Ilepl IIl'slabs on trast..depth :lbolinas. A void space of at lilaat 4lnchal BhcNld be pIIIVicled'Detlrleen the botrmns oftbe 1f8.ps/81ab8 aDd fro9t-suslleptible soils to a1Jow the IO\la to lleaYe w1thout .~-tinJ tile stepsfslaba. ., C.7, Stte G1'IIdlng 8nd,DraIDap We recommencl the site be graded to provide a posSI1vctuDoOtflWll':/ from tbe JlflI\lCI8Od am:I == bulldIng. Wc ......,..........d that 1_...'II*t... be sloped a mltrinmm of6 inI:ba wilbia 10 feet of the S1l:IICtIIrC8,lIId tb&t slabs be s10pacIa MW........ ot2 inclulL 1h addI.1fao, wa recommead 8utlIen and c\owNpouls with lcma,aplad1 bIaaka or IlltliIIDItcma. C.B. UtOJtIes Soil types encountered clurMs utilfl;y iDsta1Iatlon v.dl1 Ukc1y be lesn D1ay, IClSlloIIY with lIlIZld, sandy lesn clay, elayey U!Id, 1I1f,1Ilty smd, pearly aracIed SIIld IlIId poorly sradai aand wifh sllt soils. Based 011 the bomlga, tbe aoiIa lllICO\IIIleI'e at typieal invert e1evatiCJIIJ lIl'B geDlll'a11y sililablo for utility support. Acld1UOaal suhcluttiIlg anc1 TOp\R~~ with crusbed ruck tIIIIY be required if IDA olays at loose Il1ts arc encOllll1l:red at Invert gmde for pipe support. We TllllGmIl1eod B srmmJar soil be used fill- bacldiU or '-Illing aroIIlll1 tbe pIpeI. So!1a from the tl'ellllh l!XaavaliCllll may be ullld 81 b~~ above the bocldiDg. , We reodrmMlld utility treDches uot'bo CClIIItrl1GtIId \IIIlIer 1botIDp or witbin tbe _ ofiDfl_ of'f'OGlmp (I: I area). Above f'QotD1su1!d below me floor slab, wa laee..... __",d baok1il1 be 0CII'llJlIlft8d T,I:l a Jftlnimnm of" pIftlGIlt CIOIIIpIlItiCllL Fill' U'ImCb baold1n In lIlY paridq and drive 11'eas, .,. feCommeIld the baekfi1l1011 bd ~184 f,G B z:nmlmnm of9S pelIICt lQ wI11ltn 3 tl:et of subgrade IllIllOO percent in tile uppet 3 feot. C.9. PavllJIleJlt Daillll C.D.a. SlIbgrade Preplll'atloD. We l'8ClllIlIMlIcI that the BUlface vegetaliOll, topeoilllllll. tapsoil till be romovcd from beneath the ~ plvement and. oversize area&- II ia oflcn lypioal to l23cM.,,",Q2 liO,37P I ',',Y.23. 20020; 2:46PM3A1 KIA BUilDING DIV, N0.6094 IP, i 7/42 , ICraus-Anclwson Project BODX..o2-058 ~ 23. 2002 Page 11 etcaVllte 1/2 to 1 foot deepe:r ~ the miuimum necessaty to clean the bottom of a SIl~a""ti011. The ~.vatiOA should be ovmizcd 1 foot behind the curb for caoh foot of fill placed below lbo lIIIl'b (lH:l V ovmizing), We ~lIIuend the zuultillllllbgrade be 8111iaell 4aDlpaeted to holp denllfY the upper 10010 roils and provide a _liable 1Ubgrade. If IlfeU arc llIICOUDtcred that will not OCIIIllplct, thOle IOi1a sbould be fCIDIllVC4l11C1 ilpwlCt with . COIIIJlactable material. Fin to IItIbllIb. grade llII1 then be plloe4l111d ClOIIIJIIllllld 10 a minim."" of 95 pe:r'Ca1t of ifll8flllldard Proolar IUlCImum dly deIIIlty to witbiD 3 feet of llIogrado end 100 percent i11 t1\e llppe1' 3 feet. Moisture """~ lbou1d be wtmin 3 percxintago poinflI of DPtlmum , to within 3 feet of suberade and_ more 1baJ11 pl:rllCllfllp point over opWm= in _lIpJlClf 3 feet. The higher colJlP&Ol:lcm IIIIcllower mofst1:e .Al~t wiU aid In Jll'OVidiq. _1IabI1I lII'berade tor r-nment _)M1. Prior to pleoement of the qarep18 bile, Oft reDIIIlIIJaId1be perldnalot IIDd chiveway ... be proofrol1~ with a ftIIly toa,cled tmIdml axle tnIok. Thill pm:aut1011l1r)' mea&\ltll wiIllHilt ill detecting localized soft 1pClts. Jmy 10ft Ipots IIIlllld cIurlng the proafrolliDc proClllll1llll\Y RqUim ad4tlloDllIllo1bouts, A qlllllfied soila eqirlear IbollId 'obaerve the proofrollilli prooeaa to make a 1Ioa1 evaluation of the l\Ab~ C,9.b. ADtIclplltCd Subllnlde. MrI:t the recaDInIIIlded p:apmt!on is oompJeted. we 8D1icipato the IIIbgrade WIll JIIlIin1y llOIlSist of an4y leII1 clay and ala"., uod. Laboratory tDstI to c1ct=md1lo the Hwem Stabi1ometm':a-tuee _1IOt i110Iuded 111 our ICOpC of.maca. Baed onl undy lcau clay ani! lIIa}llOY lIIAd lubsnde. 'M ___"" ,"'IJV! 1lIlDB BD uaumed R.-val1lD of 12 !or the pav=unt desian. c,I),e: DesIp Seetionl. Wo _d the 1'ollllWiDa mfnimum _ tbialalenos. Table 2, llecolJUllellc1ed l'aV8lllllllt Llyer ThJclmeu. Drift aDd hrJdag ArM GraJra1I1' Tnwk Area Grtllllllar , T1dclaws EquIv8Jent Tbl~'!M Equlvalmt - Colll'li. (lnell") , (aE) (Ia"') (GJ:) Bltum!noUl 811rlkce 1112. :u 2 4.5 B1tumlnOlll Bue 1112. 3 2 4 Aaregate Base 8 8 II 9 (MnIDOT Clau S) Total GnmlIlar Equlw1ent 14.4 17.5 123-M.y,OZ,. , 2':37P I M".23, 2002" 2:46PMrAM KIA BUilDING DIV. IN0.6094 FP. 18/42 , Kralli-Anderson Project JlODX-02-OS8 May~. Zool Page 12 .. , " This desisn i& baaed Oil a 2O.,.ear life expcctalllly, This is the ImOlII1t gf llmc bllfor<: major ~ ill Rl1t!cipated. 'Ibis perfonnance ualllllll proper aarc, IIWIh u ac:a1 coating and eraak.. is fllUtmelY~ A thlJmerpavcmam uadan aould be UJed but would UkaIy relull in It thoru:rpavemmt Ufll with moretlumllOmlll maiulIIDmoo. .. C.9.c1. MaterlalllUll! Campactloll" We recODllJlelld ~ aruslled gravel bue meeting the r requimn=b ofMll/DOT Spec1fIcati0l13138 for Olu. 5. WII'ClIODllIIeD4 tb8t the bltlJmln01lS I1Irlace BDd bull DOIl'IlllDeet the requircmalts of Speoffiaaticm 23'0. We TeCClJIlIIIe:Dd that the tlrUJhed aggregate 'bile be compaoted 111 a ...;........... of 100 p_t otlts I1IIIldard PI'ocrtor maximum. dry c!eoIity. We I'CllOIIIIllmId that the bitamiDDul........... bo cotlIpIctc4 III & minimum of9S percelll oftbclrMarsbaU deDaitiea (ASTM D 1559), D, CODBtrUcUOJ1 D,l. Excavation It is our opDUOl1 tb4 lOilIllIICOlIIltered by lhe borinp 011I be ClIClmted with a backhoe, dour or ' aerapet'S. However, !he pr-1....m...,t lI8nlIy lam clay IolIa arc IIIOiIlllt'll JeOJitive and caiiJy disturbed from oaamuc1ion 1raffic. J1 i& our opImclII.1\lIl1OJlle Ofthc lOilI eIIClOUlltlnlcl. by lhC bormllll may require they be lllalIIvatecI with a bladccl-buaklt baGkhoc. AU ClICSWtiOllS llID&t 1lO1UP!y with the requlrcDlcDts ofOSKA. Z9 en.. J'aIt 1926, SubpIrt p, "ExDa'vaticms and TnIIlohe.... 'Ibl1 4ocumel1l atalea_ exaavatlOll aaf'ety is the reapooaiblli1;y ofthc con1ractor. Refm!noea to tids OSHA. requiremem ahauld be illclw1e4 fD 1he job 8)l8Oiiillatioas. ., We RacmmIllIld proper lite clralnap be providacI dudIIIJ oaIlIlI'UCtion 111 preveIlt paI\diIlg ofwater in the bui1dIl1S area. Wau:r, whiahla aJlowcd to pond, will ~ 10ft IUbgradc solI DOIIdtttOllS, MOdcrlng the subamdea IIIIJl1iIable lbr Jll:C1CtlIrtlllll'~ U mft or unstable aM are noted dw-iDs CIOIlIINCtiOll, them lalla Ihou14 be nmoved. and raplacacI with computable bacldill. D.2, OblervBtloDl A porallhniaal englneer shauld obacw all ~ 1botiq &lid al3b IlUbgradca1l1 CI1Ialuem tf'lbe IIIbgradc SOilllllUImllU IlIlllosc lIIICOUI1tacd by tbII borIJlgs and adequa.le to auppon the prapOlCd collllruatiGn. OVerWmg otsubCltClvaUOIIIlho1l1c1 be Ilhe;ked. These obaervationB .ho~ be condllcted prior to placlng~.. filla or forma for footillg8. 123-.ay,Q2. "2,;37p:1 May.23, 2002~; 2:4Hi~A'1 K!~ BUILDiNG DIV, No.6094 ~,19/42 Kl'aua-Andcnon Project BODX-OMS8 May 23, 2002 Page 13 D.3, Testing We recommelI4 dlmsity teSII ofbtl..w;llll and 1i1Is placed 'benealh AJatinp, llabSand plio>" ,..I~ s.mpll!ll of propoIIjl baGIc1Ullllld 1Il1 mausriaIs should be Il1bmitIad tD 01ll'tatina: labora!D1y at leaSt, .two days priorto 1'1"'--' tllr eva11lalIon ot:1hdr IlllitabllitY and de~...il..dion 0{ tbe optimum ftlaUture ~lt ma"1n'llltll cIIy dImIIty. , ., D.4. Cold Wutbor If IJla srading IlIII 0IlII8ImCti0Il are lIltIoipIlIe4dudr1c cold ~, wa .ll(' .......-Il\IIOd wimer oanatruCtiQl:l praollDlII be obler1ed. An snow IIIIi Ice Ibould 110 ~ fi'am aut and fill aau prior to ado;tiOllal pdias. No filllbou1d be plae*! on soils that bave frozm ~ ccmuln ftooIIII1 _terial. No frozea..oD 1II0000d be 1UC4 as ml. . 'Coocrel:= de1iva'cd to l!uI Jim shoIII4meettbe ~.dlIte ~ of ASTM C 94. CcIIIcnte cbould J1llt be placed upclIl fMIen IOiIJ or IOiIs tbat COIlIlIin frooam materiaL Caoarete lIboIIId be pIOtllClted from liealDg IIIItil the 1IC( [....1111a1cth iJ oblabd. &a.ll!llnlld DO~ be l""whtl.4 lID pllllelratll balow too_ ~ 011 frostosusoc:pll'ble lon, s/nlle IIIllh fI'eeIlDg could bca~ lIlld tIJSClk the fcoliDglllftdlor fDunda1Iem. walla. , E, Procedures . E..l. DriJUIlg ad SmnpJlng The pcDlIl'lltIIm teIt 1latlnp for 1bis IIftIua!iaIl were _1I:oiwe4 em. April 30, 2002, with a 1rUOk- mcnmted CllI'C and auger clriD. ~IlI\S fM tbe bll1'blp _ ecm.ducried in acoordaloe wi1h.ASTM D 1586 "PenelrItIon Testmd Spll>..Bme1 ~lotSoIll.' UsIIlgtlli8 metlxId, wo IliwDcad the boft:holCl wfih the ho\1CJw-llan IIQlIlr lill1he daIrad tell d8pCb. 'l'h= a 14O-pouad hammar &l11q :JO inabes cIrcwe a IIlIIlclard. 2-iDah 0]), ~lit-bmftl ~ a IDIU peneUatlcm of I In. re.t below the 1ip otlbc hoUow-stcm auaar. 'l1II blow8 tllr tile ]q foo~ otpc:cettaliaD _ _cxdcd IUld. are an fnde;x of 8011 BtreDCthabaraaterlltla8. Samplea ware1lllcen at2 1l2-bltVBl'l:iaaI interwlll tathe , IS.foot depth lIIIli then at '-foot!mlrvallto 1hc 1amlDalI1DI depth afthe boriugI. A ~ portlon of~h sample Wlllllblm ~ In a g1aasjar. I':<-M.V" 02. 12,371> I MaY.23. 2C:2e: 2:46PMlAM K/A BUiLDING DIV, No,6094 IP, 20/42 " :Kn1l8-Anderson Projeet BODX.02,OS8 May 23, 20()2 Page 14 ., , , E.2, SoU ChII.l1Icadona SoIls encountered In die borlngJ were vtsually aIId mlImmlly claslf:lled In d1c t!e1d by tile crew ohief In aco~ withASTM D 2488, "Dcsctiplian aIId Jdc:ntUicatlOll of Soils (Visual-Mmual Praocdlll'O)." A IIlmI2lI1'Y of A5TMD 2488 Is ......nlt.... iJlllllll]lles were tben rellImOd ~ our labo:atary for review oftlle fiaId ~IIIl&a!lcllll by a geolllCllmloal qIneer. Representative mnples (l3arinas 8T.12 throughS'I'-l7) wi111'eI!lIIDin OIU' Apple VaDey olbl tor a period 0(60 dql to be avai!llble far your .......m.UOZl. , '. ., E,,3, Grouudwater Obaervlltlou Immediately after laIcms tlle thlallllllplllll ill 11m _. offbe borInp, tile holea were probed through the hollow.stern 11II811I' to _Ilk lattlle pIUCIIDD of~. Jmmedlatelyafter withdrawal oftbe auser, the hoIaa _ qaill probllllmd dill cIeptlu; to 1lIIIter or DItVe-InS wetll noted. The barlnp were tbm baolrflil1ocL F. General RecommendaUons F.1. BasiJ ofRAlcommeDdaUoDll The llDalya..1Od raoommezidatioD IUbJ:aiUed ill this zepart ae based upoI1 the data obtailled ltom ~ mil boril:lp p<ldt..:.:.leCI at the looatiaDs hldlaatedon the -..h"'ll abtch. 0_ ~ occur be&wtlDIl tb_.., the mture an4 extent ofwhlcb do not bec:amo GVidc:IIl UDlil edciitiouaI l!Ilqllamion or aollltlUClion II COIIduoted. A ~W1t-OD of1hc RIllCIIIlr:lIllODl in 1bIa report llhou14 be made a1tcr pcrfhmri", CIII~1c observatiOllS dllriDg COIlIllWltiCIII to!lOlllb characte:rlstlcs of lIIlY vamtiOl1S. The wrlatians mayresultin I,Mitllmd GOIlIlnIltion ollllB, IlId It Is ~ that a oont1ngcncy be jI11JVided tor tbla purpClle. , " It Is _clcd that we be l'lllldDD4 to plIl'flIIIII die oblarvadon IlIlli tIlIl.!Dg proJlrl!D for the site preparation phue of thls project. ThiI wlIl allow 0CIn'8Iaticn of tile IOilllllJlC!!tIoua eI1COIIIItered l1unng COIlBtIUGtion to the aoiI borinp. IDd wlIl pnlvi&l 0ClIltIImI~ otpro1bss\oaal respoll5~. , , F.2. Review of Design Tb!s report Is based on 1ba desip ofdlo PftlPOIlld 1Iui1dIIIg u toIered to WI for prepan.tion of this report. It is recommended lhB we be reJatned. to fll\iew the g,eotecbnical aspllQta oflho dcaIAIlIlIld Epellificatiaaa. WllII W rovlcw, we win evaluate wbetber any chanaes in dl!l!p have If*cled the 1230Mav-OZ, lZ,37P I May,23, 2002e: 2:47PMlAH KIA BUILDING DIV, No .:094 IC, 2' 142 . bus-Andenaa Project BOOX.o2.0S8 May 23. 2002 Page IS validity oftbe reClII!lIIIeIIdltiolla, aud whothcr our=lIIII1,endatlciDI have belen lXlmetly U~jA"bo.d ll1Id iJtIpleJMllted in thll design mil spccl11cadons. ,F.3, Gro1Uldwater FluduatiOJ1t We made water level abl8r\'llltaas In the barlnp at 1110 times IIId lIllder tbe IlOlllIitlOl1l slatc4 Cll1 tile boriJlJ lop. This - was tDto..p.:ele41n the text oftbls %llport. TIlII paiod at' obtrcrvation. was relatively sbon, IIId tlWlt1laUaD In the glQ1lIldwatcr \evel:ll:lq _ dw: to ralD1III1, 1'Ioodin& irriptlon, sprIna thaw, cIraizIap, IIId olher IIeIIOIla! IIId lIIIInlII f&o1cn I10t evident at tbe time the o1l.lervalioa. _ made. DesIan drawillp 8lId IIpIllI1IallZlaDs IIId CODStructiaa.plmm;..g IIhauId recognlle the posaiblI~ oftl......'I"'ans. F.4, U.e of Report Tbia!eport fI tar 12Ie oxc1uam 1ISll aflttaus-AIl4cmln ColIstruatiou Compmy IIId Ulelr COIISII!tIIIU III use to dcsip the prllpOIed buiIdlnp aue! prepare cxmImllIon dl''''-'' In the ableDae ot our writteII ~~o)U!. WI mate DO representaUan aDd USlIIIlII10 !'IlIpCCIS1bilfly III other panles n:prdinglhlareport. 'l1Ia cIa1I, IIIIIJysee IIlCIteCCJI1IIIIaDdalDlY1lOtbe Ilt-!,."...Iate tar odler.1NOtllftlS orpurposes, WOIcc:orl~ 1batpmtica 00I1lllmp1l1ill!l other aIrUctQrCs or purposes cOntact us. P,S, Level of Care Services pe..A..med by Bqim ~ CorporaIion persoIlI18l far thla p:oject have been eanducllld wltb 1hat level of OUD IIZllI aldl1 ordInati!f cxcrci&ed byDSDberJ otlbe prnf'MoIon, ClIltftllt1y ptlICticiDs ill this ana UI1der a!zDi!.r budaDt IIlCI tima~ No WlIlI'llII1y, exprqed ClI' imp1lcd, is made. . , " 123"M.y,Q2:,".2,37PI MaY,23, 20D2a 2:47PM~AM KIA SUILDING DIV, '. '. . ,- t . IT"" 11'-11 .:=. .. B . .. II-t ... r. " ' fl., ...... , ' JCUt.. ........lIlOllIICn lIl-e _AlES IG. _C UlCA1llIl_ ..."'-.. ~r__ -'-- BRAa.. INTERTEC No,6094 p, 23/42 , . :'. ..".. .... ,- 121.148".02.12,371> I M,y,:3 2002e 2: 47PMaA/1 KIA BUILDING DIV, No,6094 P, 24/L2 Descriptive Terminology ~~r~: 81.nll.... Cl ,.., . 00 ClaJ8iflealian of loils 'DI' Ing~ Purposes (UnmeClloll C1l1SSii1auon ,,._1 ., CrII",. "r~""""""".'" - ...., N_UMt&l......4lq'..... 'I - -_. . . . .. - ___II ..............e C .4 . ,I' -- .... Ii- -.. --- .....- ,....,. 1ft.... - .c.. ..... __I ... I' ...-.... ,"".......... . .. . . - --- I- ... ....4_ -..... t2S.... PI....... .. U. - . ....-- .... ........' . -... IIIIlIlfh"."'_ ceLl' ...- .. - Iii .... ....... ................A.. I~ lillO_a.,. - ..,.........."... ~I -- ~ SIl.._ - ............-: ...7f .... .... - ., .. .....-.............M1C'1......... .. .tIiiI_....._.........."...........,..................... .. .........._IIIM.............. GWGM ........,....... ~ ................- ...... ____"" G\lGC ___.... .. ....._...1..__..~ I\QIIf .............'" = ~~'":.-:.."" . INC- ..,....., Co a.,..q..ta. 0-- to ...........".~.....,.",.............. ,. .""'_..-........__..,-. ... ... ............................. , ...._11........"..".......-. j, .......__Ili.............GM.._ L ...__,s._......._.........,..~~.~.............. L ...........~_........_.~.1~....... JIIIII#I........ .. .._a_........~~&~~..............,........ . fill,................... .. "e'...._.A.... ... """-.--.~- '" ,,--.,.~.... .. I ., . . . III ........... .,......., .. :t.....~.......... l .......".. ............. ...... i ... ......,.... .......v_. B ........"'....,. III -'''1''' 11 .:!. . 1II ~ .... "" o. ,a " ICI 10 "0 .0 10 to ID !IO 100 110 Liq..ld !.imll1oQ Laboratory 'llISUI 00 011I11I1. _.m. " 5 P.... <11_... !Ii so SpocIIto I"aYiIY c ~"" e I\nglo<ll-...lfrlcI"'" qu u~ MJlI'laJt~..,.... pili qp ~IP'''.'__Jl8IIloIll " ~ ~=:'r MO Nov.__lIi lL llql*! 1Irft;l,,, PI. . PlIIlIo 11m.. " PI P1aSliOi\Y ....... " P2IlO "-"'9 2Ol) -. ""rUcte 81.. Ido""1Iaotion lSouIder. .,........................... ever 1211 c.&tlel .............,.._.......".3" to 11" Gr.wel , CoDrII,"..."..u,'''.n,...._3f41f 10 alii Pine ......_....._................. No. ~ to 1/4"' S.nc1 Coarse ......................_.n... No. 4 10 No. '0 Madlum .-..................u'" No. '0 tD No. 040 Fino .........,_......_..........No. 40 10 No. 200 SI1L......................................No. 200 to ,006 mm c_.......................-...._.a-lh:In.OO5 ,"m RelatiVe D_1y D' Cohesionleo Soils ..." '- 0 III -4BPF 10_ S 10 10 BPF ~- '1.,30llI" ~.. 31.aO~ very clWo OWl' 50 BPF ConIIsIeney of Col1eeive hils VfIIJ Iaft .................._........0 ID 1 BPF toft ......._.......".__............! 1O.s BPF ,....,_..,..._,..,..........~..4IO'O BPf" rD8diUrn .............................116 tit 8 8PF r'lQIIr IInr ...,.,....__.........8 10'2 BPF' Itifr' .......I_~.,.._400.........__.. 1 3." ,alPl' VIIfY rIJIf ....................h....... 17 IQ 30 8PF tIIIrd_....,...........,_.....,....~ 30 BPI' , PIfIII.._ QandWcl__... -01-0_ by a 1/4" ot e 114' I!l 1llI_ ..gIlI...........d ...-- 1oIIlt_-...."'....,IlIIl.ugl!l'pr.....1O IIlIIIIIns .." -1ndiAIed an ~ 5IIMM'cI1lJIIIItI'Ol"'" "'llGIqI.. d.....__ by \lie ptII1J. "Sf" \liPIllilllel. '- "'lI'!lIcrinos_ __1lY 4" ""e:'..b-;~l ...rr.....~, ........ ~ Sail . apa _ .....,.____0Jl~0IIgMla1D. , .. __..... .... '*""_ -....,Il.~ ..... _llOrlrIp.. -1;nI1ItI by.... prIIlll-.', """"_'''''"''....._...~....Ih. 1 1/2' -____IDIhe.,,__"'" !"'JlCl' CCIIld III _~ ...... ......IlOrirlgl.... _1ly...,...."tI. ............' All..". _101om WIll ... ..."".... 2" 00 ~"""""".___. 'JW1nll__ WlIIIcI_IIIUIIlIQj_Y!llpIe. . "'" ___ b1_e!rG.&~din_ r:'""0Ii0n'" 1IIIlI"- II N' -. ll1e___ · ..... _...11101.. ..._ _1IIgor. , ~ --- """ _d Jar IIOIlIld IIIIIl d*d 6' .....ana-I09'lIlPF. Wlln~_ ~:::r. aw,y- m>ci1IIllln" r_~ {lIl'II\l :zJ12 "" .. andlhlrcl$"~1"I1J1.1NeJ;f WH: WH 1lldI.... UIo _ pon_a mil "'__ilIll1 0(_ _... _, drI~ nIIlaquIred. WR: WIl....... IIInPIor __1QjI unClCrWlillIl '" -._ noq..., -'lII1lllllll drlWlll nat roqv-. N_ 1II__I\II1I1l_I_WlG1 .ppIIc_ ASIM ,,"~ord', BRAUN'" INTERTEC Ro.. 05/02 1:;r~I\Ji4"\I'-02~ 12~37P I MaY,23, 2022 2:48PM '<llt.2~2a.j,ow.r ., . 1 4 SlIll H4 1IS4 KIA BUiLDING D;v, No,6094 P, 25/L2 LOG OF BORING -.em"""... ~BVAl.V":rION .Jl<oJ - ~ oaICII/W...... l'dorlAllek,s bLllI'Irk, Cr~ "_d~ PIiar LIkt, MI,,"W&a DOIUNO. ST-! 1.OCA1'lON: .. 11 -......... 20.3 I)AT.Elt 11"" !It. I.a Depd& 0.0 P""CripIIaa. of V.I..;oI. CAS'N DZ4I1) PILL: x- CIa)'. dIIk bran III IIIII:k. wet. PILLJ aay.y Sad, ....11I ......;..... '-, wlIIllaJm ofPaady CIIIIIB4 Sad.1lr-. .... ... fill. to 1IIIIdi_. I rJ. wllk.Ja1Irof.X-Clay, ' ' '--.1IIlliIl. , IraY III lInIWA. 111&, ..... wlIIlla,.. ofl'aorlJ G&d8d SIad. BFP WI. 1.5 I , 13 4.0 . 5.0 la 10 , III -- JnIIIlId.1IDMa, IIIlIiIIID WIl. ~-- ..... 16 , U4 lLD '-- cea- AIJIMlIm) to...,., _; 14 COW=lal 'nil) 1:1 BND OF BOlUNG W__e'-mil wilh 111 1121io11taf lIoIlow.... usv ill tb& pIIIIld. , WIIIIl' IIIIt lII.rYed III GIYHl_ of 14 liIol iauzIMIatet, after ~...' ...1 of Ibe lIlIpr, Ioda8 _ _!mod SCAUI: Iff oa ~ TutlI 01' NoCIa 'LR 1 J. 1~ TopllUtof IIydaat CIIlIOldh Ilda Of C'oCICIIlwaod X-_ NI "a~MiY_. AI~ IdH cIew.tioa of 100.0 teet. - -. ~;Y.23. :002 2:tSPM ~'Z.O"^,w,Q: KIA BUILDING DIV. No.60Sa p. 26/42 LOG OF BORING '. PRomct: BODX..f7-3U GEO'l'ECIUaCAL EVALtlATION " Po... III' 0fIiaIW...__ . l'rilir~ IadlldrW PIrk, Coltaawoad Z- lrfCll'LIke, MbIIIeroll. JOBINa: ST-2 LOCAnON: see--'iIec11ketcb. .. DAm: 11"" SCAtoB: 1. ... 4' iIov, Deptb 100.5 0.0 Bl'F TCIllI 01' Nclllls IIS.S 2.0 , 10 N.5 4.0 4 MolJlara CacdIat (Me) - M~ 6 ! -. II A I01icI tdlaa1e tlld;_.. ... able paIIIlIlwa_ ItwIlID tIIa lIDriIIg ell ... date '-'dl~ted CinluD4wIIlar IoveIJ _..... liaise ref<< 10 .. cII.uo-"" ID f~"". 1.3. .... P.4. of 0Dr npa&t. (GJ.cIa1 nu) 8 .u , 14,0 CLAY willa 8AJolD. lIatIc SfA1 ImIn. maW III 'Mlt.1IIff. (GIIcial Till) 1.2 :&mI 011 BOlUNG 14 .0 20.5 .. . WIlllfIlllC ......wlIh 19 112 fIIIt 0' lion- T'ND.1II8W ill... paIJQd. W.... ........... at cave-iD cI8plh of 8112 fIIIlt '--';.ttly dw~ ofdle qer. WIIIIf tIaMl a !bet 24 !loan ailw wllhdmwaJ of Ib8 aupr, llorillg tlulD ba:Idi1Ied. ,.. I MiY,23, 2002 2:48PM dLlC:~r20,^.w-Izl KIA BUILDING DIV. No.6094 P, 27112 LOG OF BOR.ING Cl': BOD&fJ-at ~BVALVATJDN 1\ ~ . 0IIieeIW..~ l'riIIrl.tdlCliI" . Iall'lrt, ColtaUDGJJ.M I'rior Lab. Mr.}la llOKINGI 81'-3 1.OClA'17ONI lie .-v"lIIIldI. DATB: 11'1'" 8CAU1; I" .. 4' 9S, AI'1'M DZ487 n.cdptioa ofU.' . t.. (.AI'l'K iY LEAN CLAY, lIrDwB. (1'opIDiI) ,IW :m.v, f1'1. 1'-. ... NatM 2.0 , 11 Me -205 ~ 51 11 au I (Alhni1UD) 85.l1 13 . 51 20.5 13 END OP BOBJN(J W....lIOt~.II.IId wilIIlP 112 foo&ot hDIklw . "..... ill .. pllUIId. w.... DOt c.bJJlIltclIO cuHI depth of 12 lIIeIm-MiIltel7 ..wi.... -a ofdlo IIIIIW. BlIriDg lhoa lit........,... o P&omeT: BQDX"".. GEOTECIDUCAL SVAL1IATlON I'l'opaIed 0JBaIW~ .L_ Pda:ra. T-.......l'IrII, a.............41.- PriGr LaIIIf. W<v-ta May,23, 20:2 2:49PM Idll'i'Z. ,zo-^eN;rzl "" , '. KIA BUILDING DIV, No,6094 P, 28/42 LOG OF BORING BOlUNG: ST-4 LOeA'l'lON: .. ..........1keIdL ])A'l'Il: 1f1/f1 SCALJ!: 1" - 4' , EIov. >>-pIll Bl'I' 111.11 0.0 T..ta Dr NDle8 -. IIU z.s 114.9 4.0 P2.!l 11.0 163 12.0 .. , 19.' 19,0 77.4 11.5 .. CLAY, wltb. a- of GraVII.IfIIY.1IIDUt tel wat, Ililt (CJ1IcIaI TIll) END Of JOlUMG W__ olb-,Illl with 19 UJ.1iIIlt of JriI---"-1I1I&W ill Iba pllUIIll W__ ob.e.\clD --'n cIapth of 14 tllet lwoo-I~ Iftw~ Dftbo apt. BodJIa tbaa. ,..."wn,-". , 12 10 lJ Me .. 15" 12 "l7 1$ 111 o May,2:, 2002 2:49PM d.!r:<t 'zp."'ow-\: KIA BUILDING DIV, 1'1 err: Jt~ ~EVALl1ATlON h~---" 0JIIeeIW...... PriDl'r.u.~'" I W!V1e, ~""w. 1'rior WIre, )fm-oea ., ~ . a_or O.wI, 1mIwD, _ ....1Iiff III Iliff. (GIIlial TiD) .1 14.0 ...7. -. , (GIuiII TiJl) a 20.5 1lND OP JlQIIING Willi' IIIlt oIllt4 ...1 wiII& 19112100& of h..tl~ h..../IlIpr ill .. JIQIlIId. W__a.. ,.4ra_..mdllpllaof16 112 .... i.-.ll'ltillfdlr wlIIMkawal ot lho IIIF. ~ IbIIl boolttiI1"". ~-- N0.6094 p. 29/42 LOG OF BORING BCIRlNGI Br-5 LOCATION: See --'I".... g 12. 10 11 17 13 - MaY.::, 2002 2:49PM ~'zo"^ew-.al KIA BUILDING D1V, Pl\0J1!Cl': BODX-P7'11U GBOTBCBNlCALEVAU1ATION ~ 0ftl0IW___ Pdcir LIllIe Td 1'-i111'l1d1, CoUmIwuad Laae I'rfor LIIIe, MJlUICIOta . ., Bkv. Depth llB.1 0,0 10%.1 1,0 ".1 4,0 !.BAN a.... , bIowa, wee, IIIIllIUlllIO nIIIIt IIl1r. (AI11aviuao) 84.1 111.0 , :DoS CLAY,III)', --,11IIIII' 1tIIf. (GIIaial TiI1) END OF BOJUNO Wa.!8r lIOl olMened wi1111ll1lZ c..t of ~ lIIIpr ill tII& pDIIIId. Water DOt obIerwd 10 caYMI dIplIl of U foot l--1fatel7 aftcr1rill' 1111III of 1M IIIIW. BoriDg fhlIIl baakIlIIecI. ., No,6094 p, 30/42 LOG OF BORING lIOBlNGl ST-6 .LClCAnON1 ... .......~'" 1IceIcJI. DATIl: SCAL'B: I" ... 4' BPF T_ or Hotel 1 Me.. as" 11 . '8 . 8 10 . '.'" /' 3 '._1. . dLt"2t2o'AOIH; . ' 'no' "4QDM lei /,-<. KIA BUILDING DIV. PR err BODX",,-3U GBon:c:mac.u..JllVALt1A.tlON PiD~ O1IbIWanIuI_ l'rtor l.aellldultriall'uir, Ca&to_lI ~ l'tior take, M1".....ca N - 0 - . 0.0 ~~ P. j' /42 LOG OF BORING BORJNGI ~-7 LOCA1IONr &II "-'''edJkeIdl. DATB: 117/98 SCALB: 1" '" 4' AI'1'.M . D.,lIa D24I7 ]!pit 7 0.0 S)IDIbat or.. Of NOIllll 7 2.0 III' 'III "I t.l, III' . Sllldy lAm CIa1. _a.. at I. I GIPtl, 1mrwa, wt. "'I I'll III ~'1 .U!. 1.111 II' t. I, . 10 ~ oft.- Clay, Imrwa 10 dirk llrowa, IIIIIIIc /0 WIll, ,,"'IIt.. dlllIIL (c:-. AIIavi1IIII) 10.5 BND Qll BORDtO WII8rIlll& ab.._ /Q1 wIlh II va bt of w.... . L.....IaO'~. WII8r _ abnned to -..fa depIIr. otIS t.t 1-""'-1, .ftIr w1l1Jdrawa1 of IIrlIIIlIpr. JIarirq: I&c lrIGIdlIW. , II 6 11 15 . _ 0 MaY,23, 2002 2:50PM 1.d;!r:~t'2()-^.w-'t21 KIA BUILDING DIV, No,6094 P. 32/42 '. LOG OF BORING PROJEct: BODX-lI7... BORUm. ST-8 GEOIECBNICALBVALll'ATION LOCATION. .. Pu~ -.. 0II'i-.IW....... '. Prior LIIb ""oIbIhlal Park. CoUaawoH Lane Bee attacbellllllltd&. f'rior J,.aII:e, Mirmaota DA'l'.Il; 11119. sCA1Jj: I" = 4' ., lIi'f !P6.7 ,.. fit Nil" 95.% t.5 , ,2 10,$ 13 89.7 7,0 87,7 9.0 , --.,a..c.!, wllII...... of G.oMI, --. Wlltlllllllllll, ~1U1.1.__. 20 (C!IIclI1 Till) , WlIt, . (OJ.oial TlD) 9 ., BKD OF BOlING W.. IIIlC o1lwnwd wllb' 1I.Z felt of IloIJgw "-lII/&V ill tire paaad. W_lIOto1llllt\-.! ro-w clepthalltMt ,-- '1""'l7l1ll1cr wilWraIlIII of tire qer. 1cxlqtb8a L- . '"'.... , po 0 '.':\' 2~ --"2 2,'50PM .,.... v ..._... dlr'lL lO-A"I<- z' ~ . I .. KIA BUILDING DIV, PR cr: BD.DI:.f1-.38 GEO'1'ZCBNIr.U.EVAUJ.mON !l.v~ III' om..rwlllllbcN8 Prior I.aIra w...~IIl1'Jdr. Colfaawoo4L111e Prior LIJce. V......DIa ., ASTI( ~ D2487 0.0 , 1,0 . , 9.1 .6 10.5 %.5 TOlSOIL l'1LL: \xuw.a., III 6.0 ex. CLAY. WIIll a a- of ~.1D1iIIa bIowIIlII tIfIIT. __ III MIL (GIIIlial TD1) BND OF BORlNG w__ GIlIIIVllll. wiIIl9112_of haIIaw' lIIprilllb& pmal. W..'~ I ,0chU" after CII'IINa cItpIb .&6_'- - ... ..ly *11'111>.1, _11 of'" 1\IiW, Boriq _ L.....'I1J-1. No.6094 p. 33/42 LOG OF BORING BORlNG: ST-9 LOCATION. See.1IIdIed IbtdI. :DAm 1/7". BPl' , SCALi~ 1" .. 4' T..... or No.. 18 1'1 g - AallpCll~illlllio Wlller Ifvel (WI,) oom- 1....1?0o.., !be depIb It 11 wldah llallll4,wtenru obo.v.l wbiIc cIdIIilw, 14 '- pac. May.23. 2002 2:50PM ~ .ZQ,),ew-[zl KIA BUILDING D!V, No,6094 0 34/42 ,. ". . LOG OF BORING PRomer: BODM103D GEO'J:ZCIIMC&L EVA-UlmON !\......... 08IeeIW___ ' Prior lab Iitdastriall'adc, c..... -.....~ PdarLalrl, w....-1Il 1l0lUNG: ST-I0 LCCA.T.lON: See .ttII~""1IleIch. DAn!: 211m SCALB, 1.=~ AI'l'M Blav. Jn4I1 n-lptlcll otMaledlll BPF WL 100.4 I (AI1'M D2A8& Tea ~ NOlI8 99.4 FJLL; IudJ Lea CIll1. IIut lnwD, WIt. , , II ., SILT, wiIIl ~ otLlm aa,. SIDd, graylD 1mIWA. ..... __ (All1lvi1llD) 6 92." ..0 CL 8AJiI)Y :r. &IIICOG GmveI. gray 1Il1mrMl. Wlt,1IlIIlIr-, 9.9 10.5 (GIaciII Till) BND OP~RING WIlIr ~ 6 fII8l willig lJ.2.. of boI1ow 1'-1lIpr iD Iba ~ Walllr_ .:\>.....v...1D __ deplbof'lAet 1o.-...II_WI1 aflw""~ of Iba.mser. ., BmlDg dIa '-'WlW . 8 10 ., ,. . M-' " 2002 2:50PM KIA BUILDING DIV, N0.6094 p, 3'/' ~ ' ~? . L J . Ii "":.. l.lr;~1'20"^.W~~ . . . . , , LOG OF BORING em Jl0DXrf7-38 BOllING: ST-ll GloTzcInuc.u.BVAUTATION LClCATlOH: _ !'rcI,..s 0IIceIW.... .. .......~ .Gtateb. PriG&' r..u. T.... L.iaIl'1dr, CoItoIlWOOd LaaB 1'riarlaR, M"m'M8llla DATE: 1I71H llCALll: 1. = '"~ - !~. AS'D( ~ D" D2487 IL-,i;1kI& of..... lIPJI 0,0 S1mbol CAITM P34U) T.ts or No_ liii; TOPSOIL FIL1<i 8Iao\7 ~ C1ar. brc1toIa, ,,, - 116:J 1.5 '1';' WIl. - - 1111 PIU.: 8iIty 811III, ... to -_.~.- ..... , 10 willlla1mot.:-CIa7, Inwa,... "II, WIlIID~ , illl . g '" 13 I- ~h - 91.1 6,0 I'" ii;i rJUol ~ GI8IIId S111111ritla 8lJt. fiu.1lI ~ III "'l-lr..~ wfIllGmel.Inwa,_1lI . 10 1'" ---. - f- 1.1 - .jll r- " . ',1. a7, 10,0 Ie', 7 --....1.... ' l.IlAN ClAY. llS)'iIh 1mIwD, WIll, I - (Ol-=II111D) JIND OF lomNG - 0 WllBrdawa 5 r.e wItIa , ua.. of . f-- ~. , -IlIIWUaIlMJrDaad. - r- w..... 1JI....lIelIlI&" .... ClL'IHlI dIpth - ?- M 5 1/2 I -~-l,11l1ir wJtIadmwd or !be . . ...' - - . Boriq .. ho..w;Jled . - - '- - - . - 0 - - - I- - f- . ~ . r- . f- - t- o . UIoM.. ..-u po".... + -" MaY, 23. 2002 2: 50PM ~ ~O-^.w-RI KIA BUILDING DIV, BRAU N" INTERTEC Braun Project BODX-02.058 GEOTECBNlCAL EVALUATION PropclB4ld Norex BuJd1laI. Lot 1, Bloc.k2 SW lit' Cottoawood Lane Sollth aDd Adtlmlllll Street IE Prior r. MiIlDIIOCa OlULL8R: Glf/TC MmHOD: 3 v.' HSA, Aalobo:lr. mev. Depth ,.. fMt ASTM 948.2 0.0 bol m.L No.6094 P, 36/42 LOG OF BORING BORING: ST.1.2 LOCAnoN: See A!W:hed Slcetch. OAn: 4130102 lUP;;4' 1_ D1'NoIw ., 70 . 5 .2 4.0 browD. ;wet. 13 8 ark: S1lr&;. elCYlliona at tho borblg looallOlll were~ Z2 Ul1lle tODIIDI of1lul fire , bydnmt Ioollled 011 tbD .ou1hlide flr~ La. _the lIorCh.lI8l GO/IIer ot'tho pnlpmy, elmll:lOll of94a.oa. ., 7.7 20.5 II II I I I W_1I1lt obnMcl with 19 lilol flfhollOW-llG.......ln lhe&l'OIlJId. Wotar DOt flR.-1Ii t.......1D dllPlh of 17 feot llDmediale1y Iller wItbdrawII orille .... Sollltg IItGn baddi11od. " S i< ~ ~ BQt)x..o I -"""'=oAjlp Valley " 12 11 13 20 l1u: ==' ~11lI the WI. oollllllll ilIdiartes th.. ob.orved _obi d~ aflIIllIIIpr w1tl1dnWal. 19 8T.12 pip 1 . '~aY,23, 2002 2:51PM dlf'2L, 20'~.~, KIA BUILDING DiV, No,6094 P 17/A' " v "r<.. BR UN'. INT RTEC Bra n Project BOD -O2-0!8 Gll: n:CHNIC.u, EVALUATION Pro <I Nom; B1aItlliJae, Lot 1, Block 2 SW f Cottollwood Lalle Soatll ad Adelmallll Street Sit Prio Lab, MiDIl.lota D . GHII'C BkY. Depth tftI UOl 948. 0,0 LOG OF BORING ,~~ ST~13 LOCATION: See AlIIchecl Sketch. MIl1HOD: a 1I4',III4,.wtobmr, DATE: 4I301l12 SCALE: 1".'" , 046. DllaripIicn ofMlllriala (J\STMD24BB cr PILL: SIDCI)> ~ , .... (TopsoilJPilJ) FI1J..: /!IIIdy Clay, Inowa to anIYiIh (PHI) BPI' WL Me ,. Tuto or N,,* , Ml. 6 21 4,0 I '8 s ,llao- to, .....Il......piDod, . 1_'" silt, b1owo, IIlOlat, DIIdlam dwi. (AI111.Lum) 14 '. ~ :' " 16 .tI 936. 1 o . browa, WI!, II (GlIolal Till) LEAN CLAY 'lrilb 1IAND,IIId II trIlle of a browII, Mt, rlIlbat IlIItto_ (GIaclaI TDl) 9 ! .e 14 7.S 20, 13 It :!i I ~ i ~ I ~ ~ i BODX-o I Wiler IIOt obMrvecI wi1ll19 fill afllo1l~ .......... hi tho IfGII\lcl. WlIlIr IIOt obsmvecl to aMoin daIllII of 14 feat ar-...n...ty aftetwltil.clrlwa1 ottbo lUger, BorbIalbell boooltllJ1ad. B__ Volley ST-II ''I' of 1 M~',23, 2002 2:51PM RImrZO-Ml<'[Z!' KIA BUILDING JIV, BRAUN'" INTERTEC Braun Projecl BODX-OZ- 8 GBO'BCBNICAL IlV ALUATION Propond Nol'U; Buid1iq, Lat 1, BIOl!k 2 8W of CottoD'lVood LaDe South aDd Ad.lmaan Street Sl!. Prior Lake, MiDDesota DRILLBR.: CiHII'C MB1llOD: ) 1I"HSA,AuIobmr, Blev. DIlp1b f1lct fl:Ot ASTM 946,6 0.0 SY/IIboI PIlL S.l I.S "0 ng' '1' "..I L,. 4 o "x/40 v. ( LOG OF BORING BORINO: ST-14 LOCA11ON: Seo Altaohecl Bkeloh. DATE: 4130182 .. , '\;j .s D .. ] .11 '. ~ ~ ! ~ i ~ ~ I BODX-<l2. I END 01' BORING w_ DOt ob.orwd wI1It 19 fill ofhol1o_....... ill 1he1llQUlHl. WIllarIlO& ob.emd to cavo-in cImh of 15 Rel inIlIIecIlal8ly a80r w1lhdmlll oftbo ... Borillll1b1ll bIQIdUIed. IbaUIl ...., Apple Valle)' SCALE: 1" "4' BPF WL Tosti or NoIooS 8 11 13 12 13 14 11 .14 pop I of , Ma-y,23. 2002 2:51PM ~.20-J\81t, No.6094 p, 39/42 KIA BUILDING DIV. BR UN'" I NT RTEC B un Project BODx.o2.oSS GE CHNI~,M, EV,M,UATION Pr ..d Noil'U Bllidli..llo Lot 1, Bloclc2 SW Cottoll"'ood Lalle South ud Ad..u Street 8J!l Pri Laka, MhIa... 947 , 944. i 942. ~ .1 I '- ! .. ~ 8 ~ ~ I BODlll 2 58 LOG OF BORING BORING: ST -15 1.0CATION: See AftaahecI SlIotoh. . GH/]'C MB'l'HOD: 3114WHSA,AuIaIImr. DAT.B: 4130102 8CA1.S: I"..' 'BPP WL Me " Tem gr NQtloI 15 18 . ,'IIlII, ~ 5 ( AI11lvI1Im) ORA vm.. browII. WIt, (G!MlII 'I11I) 8 12 14 u 16 END 01' BOlUNO WIlarIlllC obllOMCi wItll191'c1t oflloUlIW-IIIm ...... ill the SfOUIId. WalerllOt observed ill .-..lu dIIIIh of 11 ful lnlmedlale1y alIerlIllbdlaWII offhe supr. BodD; lbCIll baoIdlIIcld, U__,ApplooV ST-!5 ,..,. 1 of] ., May,23. 2002 2:51PM ~ZO-^.w.ElI KIA BUILDING DIY, BRAUN"' I NTE RTEC Braun roject BODX.o2-0S8 GIOn:CBMCAL EVALUATION Proposed Nol'R BaidliJal. Lot 1, BlocU SW of CottoJlWOod Lane SolltllaaclU.I"'''"llltl'..t IlE PrIor Uke, MlDlletlota DRILlJlA: GWl'C MB'rHOO; 3 1/4' SA, 4Im>bmr. Elev. Depth r.ot feiot ASTM 946.0 0.0 bol PIU. 944.6 1.4 rn.1- ., .0 4.0 8 " " I 8 ~ .. ~ H ~ " ~ BODX.o200SB No,6094 P, 40/42 LOG OF BORING BORING, ST-16 LOCA nON: 8~~ A1tached Sketdt. DATSI 4130102 r POORLY GRADBD SAND wilb 8]l.T, fIDe. to . asedium-craiDed. with .... G.RA vm.. brIrND, IIIOIIl, mcdiJIm delISe, (Otaolal Oatwuh) S Y J..S.\N a.A Y. llIIJet of S8IId from 12 to 14 CeeI, IHawD, 'lNI,1IlI4Ium to IIIIft (G1ad81 Till) END OF B W_lIat obleMd wilb 19 fell of bo11l7w..1elD IIIpI' In the ;rollllcl. WatIt ADI obaeMd to _in cIcIrtb of 16 Dot llOlllllllislely lIflIIrwithdrawal of&, auger. BoriD; 1II0J1 o..wod. B_IIl_App v. SCALE: 1" ..4' BPP WL Me % Te8lI orNotea 4 24 14 s 9 12 11 13 ST- 6 ,...1 I I,' 2^ L^Olu-2 ^L",52PM ".;y. I, ~dLI'iH 20-AVW.r B AUN'" I NT RTEC B un Project BODX.()2.()SS ell! TECHNICAL EVALUATION Pro OIed Nor<<r Buldlhlg, Lot 1, Block 2 SW Cotto1lwoo4lAa.o Solidi and AdelmaDD Street 5E Pri Lake, MiIllllllOta J:I . GHIl'C M!T.HOD: ' 3 1/4' H!lA, AulDIuar. BIllY Doplh tell feel ~1. O,D \149. ., J t II ~ i I Ii I a ~ ! .. KIA BUilDiNG DIV, N0.6094 p, 41/42 LOG OF BORING BOmNG: ST-17 LOCATION: S.. ............., Sketch. DAti: 413010: SCALB: 1"-4' BPFWLMC " Tllsll otWo=a , CIIy, ~ WIlt. , 19 LBAN a.AY wilh8AND. modIum. (AlluvlUIIl) ~ 6 22 a.A Y, wiIll IDIIIItan to "aylti1L . (0I11lll111lll) wet, 8 11 12 IS 20.5 17 OP BORING WIIcr aot "b.1MIeI \lIllII U !'ecI of hollowollan aupr ill 1110 GrOtmd. WIIIoI' IIOt obremd to _fA depdl of., 1/2 Aft IIaIDocIfabIIy atlerwllbdrawa1 ofihc au;er. , Boring than beokfilled. lS UAl'matw:lI, pity fI'J S1'~17 ~tGf'l ~:y,23. 7002 2:52PM I dlFZ'L ~~"^C"JIiI~\.'1 . '. KIA BUILDING DIV, No.6094 p. 42/42 , U2 "0 948 N P4G P44 N3 .. 940 '3' >>16 934 ;;; r; 9ft 130 928 .. ' m lIZ4 ! Fence Diagram: Point to Point ~ B,.aull Project Bonx.Q2-058 a GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION g PJ'llpoaed Norell Bllld1lag, Lat 1. BloDk 2 Ii! SW of CottollwDod LIllie South aad AdebnlUUl Street 51 5 Prior LallAi, MilUlelota 1l~-451 BRAUNIlA INTERTEC Pi el S CTION 00700 G NERAL CONDITIONS P RT 1 - GENERAL 1. CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AlA document A201, GENERAL CONDmONS OF THE CON1RACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, 1997 Edition, Articles 1 through 14 inclusive is hereby made a part of the Contract Documents, to the same extent as if herein written out in full and as amended by Section 00800 - SUPPLEMENTAL CONDmONS, A copy of the AlA Document A201 GENERAL CONDmONS OF THE CON1RACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, 1997 Edition, is available for review at the Architect's office during nonnal working The above stipulated GENERAL CONDmONS as amended by the SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS apply to Work executed in each of the Specification Divisions I through 16, RT 2 - PRODUCTS . END OF SECTION 00700 ' 02 47 - Norex, Inc. General Conditions 00700 - 1 SE TION 01400 QU UTY REQUIREMENTS PA T 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verifY compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements, 1. Special inspections shall be performed by a qualified special inspector as per the 1997 Edition of the Uniform Building Code, Section 108 - INSPECTIONS, and 1701 - SPECIAL INSPECTIONS, 2, Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 3, Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality- control procedures that facilitate compli- ance with the Contract Document re- quirements, 4, Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Ar- chitect, Owner, and/or Construction Man- ager, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section, C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 01731 - CUITING AND PATCHING for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and in- specting activities, 2, Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for spe- cific test and inspection requirements, 1.2 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated, 020 7 - Norex, Inc. 1, If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional in- formation to Architect. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Independent Testing Laboratory and Special Inspector shall submit a certified written report of each inspection, test or similar service, to the Architect, Engineer, Owner, Construction Manager, if appropriate, and Contractor, Test and test reports must be done in a manner to allow for review and response to errant results, 1. Submit additonal copies of each writen report directly to the governing authority, when the authority so directs. 2, Where structural elements are involved, submit an additonal copy directly to the Structural engineer, B. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience, Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to bedesigned or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated, Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services, D, Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. Quality Requirements 01400 -1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE B. Contractor Responsibilities: The Contractor shall provide inspections, tests and similar A, Professional Engineer Qualifications: A quality control services, specified in indicidual professional engineer who is legally qualified to Specifcation Sections and required by practice in jurisdiction where Project is located governing autorities, except where they are and who is experienced in providing specifically indicated to be the Owner's engineering services of the kind indicated, responsibility, or are provided by another Engineering services are defined as those identified entity; these services include those perfonned for installations of the system, specified to be perfonned by an independent assembly, or product that are similar to those agency and not by the Contractor. Costs for indicated for this Project in material, design, these services shall be included in the Contract and extent. Sum, Unless otherwise indicated, provide B. Specialists: Certain sections of the quality-control services specified and required Specifications require that specific construction by authorities having jurisdiction. activities shall be perfonned by entities who are 1. The Contractor is responsible for recognized experts in those operations, scheduling times for inspections, tests, Specialists shall satisfy qualification taking samples and similar activities in a requirements indicated and shall be engaged for timely manner to avoid delay of work, and the activities indicated, avoid the necessity of removing and 1. Requirement for specialists shall not su- replacing construction to accommodate persede building codes and similar regula- inspections and test. tions governing the Work, nor interfere 2, The Contractor shall give the Special with local trade-union jurisdictional set- tlements and similar conventions, Inspector or Independent Testing Laboratory a three-day notice before C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency inspections or testing are required. with the experience and capability to conduct 3, Contractor shall employ and pay an testing and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types Independent Testing Laboratory to perfonn oftests and inspections to be perfonned, specified quality control services, a, Contractor shall not employ the same 1.5 QUALITY CONTROL entity engaged by Owner, unless A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control agreed to in writing by Owner, services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, 4, Contractor shall pay for all pre- Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to qualification testing, perfonn these services, 5, Contractor is responsible for retesting and 1. Owner will engage a testing agency to reinspecting conduct special tests and inspections 6, Where qualilty-control services are required by authorities having jurisdiction indicated as Contractor's responsibility, as the responsibility of Owner. submit a certified written report, in 2, Costs for retesting and reinspecting con- duplicate, of each quality-control service. struction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the 7, Testing and inspecting requested by Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor and not required by the Contract Contractor. Documents are Contractor's responsibility, 8, Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having juris- diction, when they so direct. C. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, 02047 - Norex, Inc. Quality Requirements 01400 - 2 1. The Contractor is responsible for schedul- ing times for inspections, test, taking samples and similar activities in a timely manner to avoid delay of work, and avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and test. 2. The testing Agency shall bring irregulari- ties and deficiencies observed in the Work to the immediate attention ofthe Contrac- tor for correction, then, if uncorrected af- ter a reasonable period of time, to the at- tention of the Structural engineer ofRe- cord, the Building Official, the Architect, the Construction Manager, if applicable, and Contractor. 3. Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-contro! service to the Building Official, the Structural Engineer of Record, the Architect, the Construction Manager, if applicable, the Contractor, and other designated persons in accor- dance with the Special Structural Testing and Inspection Schedule. 4. Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Substan- tial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Testing agency will retest and reinspect corrected work. D RetestinglReinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Structural Engineer of Record, the Architect, Construction Manager, if applicable, and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify all parties promptly of irregulari- ties or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from re- quirements. 3. Submit a certified written report, in dupli- cate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contrac- tor. 4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Comply with the Contract Document re- quirements for Section 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING. B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality- control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. . END OF SECTION 1400. 020 7 - Norex, Inc. Quality Requirements 01400 - 3 Special Structural Testing and Inspection Program Summary Schedule Project Name Norex Project No. Location PMor T ~1cp. MN Permit No (1) Technical (2 Type of Report Assigned Section A l1icle Description (3) Inspector (4) Frequency (5) Firm (6) CONCRE1E, SPECIAL INSPECTION NOT REQ'D FOR FOUNDATIONS (FOUND'S. 1701 5.1 DESIGNED FOR r c = 2500 PSI, r c = 3000 PSI NOT REQUIRED REQ'D IN PLACE) AND NON-STRUCTIlRAL SLABS ON GRADE REINFORCING STEEL, PRIOR TO CLOSING OF 1701 5.4 FORMS OR CONCRETE DELIVERY ON JOB SI-S PERIODIC SITE 1701 .5.1 FIELD WELDING ETC. FOR: .. WELDS ~ 5116" SI-T PERIODIC 1701 5.6 mGH STRENGTH BOLTING SI-T PERIODIC 1701 5.7 STRUCTIlRALMASONRY .. TYPICAL - ONE HALF ALLOW ABLE STRESSES NOTREQ'D USED FOR DESIGN 1701 .13 SPECIAL GRADING, EXCAVATION AND SI-T PERIODIC ffiLING (1) Permit N . to be provided by the Building Official. (2) Referenc Ict to the specific technical scope section in the program. (3) Use d~ ption per UBC Chapter 17, as adopted by Minnesota State Building Code. (4) Special spector-Technical, Special Inspector-Structural. (5) Weekly, flonthly, per testlinspection, per floor, etc. (6) Firm com acted to perform services. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Each appropri te representative shall sign below: Owner Firm Date Contractor Firm Date Architect Firm Date 5/31/02 SER ( I Firm McConkev Johnson Solterrnann, Inc. Date 5/31/02 SI-S II Firm Date SI-T Firm Date TA Firm Date F Firm Date . If requested b engineer/architect of record or building official, the individual names of all prospective special inspectors and the work they intend to bserve shall by identified. Legend: S R=Structural Engineer of Record SI- T=Special Inspector-Technical TA=Testing Agency S S=Special Inspector-Structural F=Fabricator Accepted for t e Building Department By Date ---- _._---------------- . ^ --_. ---------. 9/89 1, SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 07841 - THROUGH- PENTRATION FIRESTOP SYSlEM for patching fire-rated construction. 2. Divisions 15 and 16 - MECHANICAL and ELECTRICAL for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical instal- lations. 1, SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. 1. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load- deflection ratio. 1. Review with Architect and Structural En- gineer the proposed method of cutting and patching before cutting the followng structural elements: a. Foundation construction. b. Bearing and retaining walls. c. Structrual concrete d. Structural steel. e. Lintels and miscellaneous structural metals. f. Structural decking. g. Exterior curtain wall construction. h. Equipment supports. i. Other building elements that could change load-carrying capacity. B. Operation Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements or safety elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. o 047 - Norex, Inc. C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2,1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and func- tional performance of existing materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verilY compatibility with and suitability of sub- strates, including compatibility with exist- ing finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. Cutting and Patching 01731 - 1 D. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to minimize interruption of services to occupied areas. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or per- formance of other construction, and sub- sequently patch as required to restore sur- faces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. Ifpossible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cut- ting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diarnond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in waIls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other for- eign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and in- spect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed fin- ishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining con- struction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or parti- tions that are removed extend one fmished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Pro- vide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and re- place with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermedi- ate paint coats over the patch and ap- ply final paint coat over entire unbro- ken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even- plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch com- ponents in a manner that restores enclo- sure to a weathertight condition. . END OF SECTION 01731 . 02047 - Norex, Inc. Cutting and Patching 01731 - 2 SE TION 02230 SIT CLEARING PA T 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Protecting existing trees and vegetation to remain. 2. Removing existing trees and vegetation as indicated.. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 02240 - DEWATERING. 2. Section 02300 - EARTHWORK for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading. 3. Section 02900 - LANDSCAPING for finish grading including preparing and placing planting soil mixes and testing of topsoil material. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing orgauic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects mOre than 2 inches in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials. B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated. 1.3 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. 020 7 - Norex, Inc. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and au- thorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by au- thorities having jurisdiction. B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract. 1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect. C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing. D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Section 02300 - EARTHWORK. 1. Obtain approved borrow soil materials off-site when satisfactory soil materials are not available on-site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated. C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. Site Clearing 02230 -1 3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. E. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. 3.3 TREE PROTECTION A. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before starting site clearing. Remove fence when construction is complete. 1. Do not store construction materials, de- bris, or excavated material within fenced area. 2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area. 3. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash. B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated. C. Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. 1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and wa- ter regularly. 2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected and covered with soil. 3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches in diameter with an emulsified as- phalt or other approved coating formu- lated for use on damaged plant tissues. 4. Backfill with soil as soon as possible. D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. 1. Employ an arborist, licensed in jurisdic- tion where Project is located, to submit details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs. 2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as deter- mined by Architect. 3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. 1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be re- located. 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees in- dicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 3. Grind stumps and remove roots, obstruc- tions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone. 5. Chip removed tree branches and [stock- pile in areas approved by Architect] [dis- pose of off-site]. B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. 3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. 1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials. C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree pro- tection zones. 2. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for re- spreading deeper topsoil. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Site Clearing 02230 - 2 3.6 DISPOSAL A Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. . END OF SECTION 02230 . 02 47 - Norex, Inc. Site Clearing 02230 -3 5 1.2 SUBMITTALS E A. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results P T 1 - GENERAL for compliance. SUMMARY 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE This Section includes the following: A. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation 1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, work and disposal of debris in accordnace with walks, pavements, lawns, and plantings. applicable requirements of governing 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings authorities having jurisdication. and structures. B. All excavations and trenches shall comply with 3. Dewatering of subsurface water from ex- the requirements of OSHA 29 CFR. cavations, site and surrounding area. C. Geotechnical and Inspection Services: 4. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade. 5. Subbase course for concrete walks and Contractor is to employ the services of a pavements. qualified independent geotechnical engineering 6. Base course for asphalt paving. testing agency to classify proposed on-site and 7. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and borrow soils to verify that soils comply with trenches. specified requiements and to perform required 8. Excavating and backfilling trenches field and laboratory testing. within building lines. D. Survey Services: Contractor is to employ the 9. Excavating and backfilling trenches for services of a registered land surveyor, registered buried mechanical and electrical utilities in the State of Minnesota, to perform the and pits for buried utility structures. specified layout work and to prepare a grade Relared Sections include the following: verification survey. 1. Section 00220 - SOIL INVESTIGATION DATA for site condi- 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS tions and requirements. A. Monuments and Stakes: Do not disturb any 2. Section 02230 - SITE CLEARING for site stripping, grubbing, removing topsoil, monuments or stakes found on or off iste unless and protecting trees to remain. approved by the Archtiect. Stakes removed 3. Section 02740 - ASPHALT without the Architect's approval shall be CONCRETE PAVING replaced at the Contracotr's e"llense. 4. Section 02751 - CEMENT B. Protection: Ensure safe working conditions at CONCRETE PAVING for exterior con- all times in and around excavations and crete work, including curbs and gutters, adequately mark and barricade excavations to sidewalks, paving, and equipment pads. protect pedestrian and vehicular traffic in 5. Section 02900 - LANDSCAPING for accordance with MnDOT 1710. City Engineer finish grading, including placing and pre- shall be notified, not less than 24 hours, prior to paring topsoil for lawns and plantings. partial blocage or closure of any street or public 6. Section 03300 - CAST -IN-PLACE right-of-way. No street or public rigt-of-way CONCRETE for granular course over va- shall be closed without proper approval of the por retarder. City Engineer. 7. Division 15 - MECHANICAL for C. Environment: excavating and bacfilling buried mechani- cal utilities and structures. 1. Control of dust shall be maintained in ac- 8. Division 16 - ELECTRICAL for cordance with local and State require- excavating and backfilling buried electri- ments. cal utilities and structures. 2. Comply with Section 02230 - SITE CLEARING for temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures. 02 47 - Norex, Inc. Earthwork 02300 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols. 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfac- tory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials. E. Subbase: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2- inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. F. Base: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a l-ll2-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. G. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. R. Bedding: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a I-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. 1. Drainage Fill: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse- aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2- inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No.8 sieve. J. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1- inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No.4 sieve. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. 1. Protect excavation bottoms and bearing surfaces against freezing when atmos- pheric temperature is less than 35 degrees Fahrenheit (2 degrees C). C. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. D. Protect trees, plant growth and features designated to remain as final landscaping, according to Section 02230 - SITE CLEARING, and indicated on the Drawings to remain. E. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, curbs and other items indicated on the Drawings to remain. F. Do not allow surface water, rain water, and subsurface (ground) water from flowing into excavations and from flooding the site and surrounding areas. Provide and maintain necessary and adaquate dewatering system(s). G. Stabilize all sidewalls of excavations, in compliance with most current OSHA regulations and applicable local building codes and ordinances. Provide and mainatain adequate shore and bracing. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Earthwork 02300 - 2 3.2 DEWATERING Prevent surface water, rain water, and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 2. Install a dewatering system to keep sub- grades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required. 3. Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids endangering pub- lic health, property, and portions of work under construction or completed. Convey water removed form excavations and rain water to collecting or run-off areas. Es- tablish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside exca- vation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. Cost of dewatering shall be considered incidental to the Contract. 3.3 EXPLOSIVES Explosives: Do not use explosives. 3. EXCAVATION, GENERAL Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions. 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materi- als and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. 02 47 - Norex, Inc. 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Oversize excavations at least three (3') feet plus one (1') foot horizontally from face of building for each one (1') foot of excavation below finish floor grade. 2. Excavations for Footings and Founda- tions: Do not disturb bottom of excava- tion. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 3. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Ba- sins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bot- tom of excavations intended for bearing surface. 4. Surface and Subsurface Water Drainage: Provide temporary drainage where con- struction interferes with existing drainage. 5. Stabilizing Sides of Excavation: Slope the sides of excavations to a safe angle of repose for materials being excavated. Shore and brace where sloping is not pos- sible because of space restrictions or the stability of the materials being excavated. Maintain the sides of the excavations in a safe condition until the completion of backfilling. a. Sidewalls of all excavations shall comply with the most current OSHA regulations and applicable local building codes and ordinances. 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades. 3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. 1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. Earthwork 02300 - 3 B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide 3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION a working clearance on each side of pipe or Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from A. trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of or wall footings by extending bottom elevation pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. of concrete foundation or footing to excavation 1. Clearance: 12 inches on each side of pipe bottom, without altering top elevation, at the or conduit. Conractor's expense. C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench 3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory provide continuous support for bells, joints, and excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and materials without interruixing. Place, grade, bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. and sharp objects along trench subgrade. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, mul- of excavations. Do not store within drip tiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate line of remaining trees. trench bottoms and support pipe and con- duit on an undisturbed subgrade. 3.11 BACKFILL 2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench A. Place and compact backfill in excavations to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe cir- promptly, with a placement method that does cumference. Fill depressions with tamped not disturb or damage foundation perimeter sand backfill. drainage, foundation dampproofing and 3. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than protective cover, but not before completing the elevation required in rock or other un- following: yielding bearing material to allow for 1. Construction below finish grade inc1ud- bedding course. ing, where applicable, dampproofing, wa- terproofing, and perimeter insulation. 3.8 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE 2. Surveying locations of underground utili- ties for record documents. A. Notify Architect when excavations have 3. Inspecting and testing underground utili- reached required subgrade. ties. B. If Soils Engineer deterruines that unsatisfactory 4. Removing concrete formwork. soil is present, continue excavation and replace 5. Removing trash and debris. with compacted backfill or fill material as 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, directed. and sheeting. 1. Additional excavation and replacement 7. Installing permanent or temporary hori- material will be paid for according to zontal bracing on horizontally supported Contract provisions for changes in the walls. Work. 3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL C. Proof roll subgrade with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of A. Place and compact bedding course on trench excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding saturated subgrades. course to provide continuous support for bells, D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or fittings, and bodies of conduits. construction activities, as directed by Architect. B. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom offootings; fill with concrete to elevation of bolt om offootings. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Earthwork 02300 - 4 C. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the full length of util- ity piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system. D. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as sheeting is removed. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade. 3. 3 FILL A. Preparation: Under Section 02230 -SITE CLEARING, remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satis- factory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfac- tory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engi- neered fill. 3, 4 MOISTURE CONTROL Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or con- tain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air- dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. o 047 - Norex, Inc. 3.15 COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698: 1. Subgrade Soils, Subbase Fill, and Back Fill: a. Below Asphalt and Concrete Paving: 1) Upper 3 feet: 100% 2) Below First feet: 95% b. Below sidewalks: 95% c. Below Floor Slabs: 95% d. Below Footings: 98% 2. Drainage Back Fill: 95% 3. Site Fill Outside Building Area: 90% 4. Utility Trench Backfill: a. In Floor Slab, Footings: 95% b. In Landscape Area: 90% 5. Lawn or Un-paved Area: 90% 3.16 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adja- cent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required sur- face tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. 1. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: a. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or mi- nus 1 inch. b. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. c. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. Earthwork 02300 - 5 2. Rough Grading: Spread subsoil to an ele- vation six (6) inches below finish grade. Soil most suitable for lawns shall be spread as top layer. Rough grading shall include spreading the material on the site smoothly and evenly with dozer or equal equipment, leaving it similar to backdrag- ging with a dozer. a. Grades shown on the Drawings are proposed finish grades. Contactor shall grade to the prescribed sub- grade elevations except landscaped areas which shall be graded to finish grade with approved topsoil. b. Contractor is solely responsible for determining quantities offill and waste materials to be handled and for amount of grading to be done in order to completely perform all work indi- cated on the Drawings. Costs of im- porting fill and/or exporting excess materials from the site shall be con- sidered incidental to the Contract. c. Provide surfaces free of debris and building materials. Remove stones over two (2) inches diameter, branches and other vegetation. Ease new grades into surrounding existing grades without awkward or abrupt transitions. 3. Finish Grading: Spread topsoil to a depth of six (6) inches. 4. Compaction: Compact subsoil and topsoil as necessary to prevent settlement without inhibiting vertical drainage and subse- quent turf establishment. If overD- compaction occurs, the Contractor may be required to scarify soil and reblade. Depth of topsoil shall be measured after compaction. C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10- foot straightedge. 3.17 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES A. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on prepared subgrade and as follows: 1. Place base course material over subbase. 2. Compact subbase and base courses at op- timum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. 3. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches or less, place ma- terials in a single layer. 5. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches, place mate- rials in equailayers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted. B. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches wide, of satisfactory soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. 3.18 DRAINAGE COURSE A. Under slabs-on-grade, place drainage course on prepared subgrade and as follows: 1. Compact drainage course to required cross sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 2. When compacted thickness of drainage course is 6 inches or less, place materials in a single layer. 3. When compacted thickness of drainage course exceeds 6 inches, place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted. 3.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing. B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Earthwork 02300 - 6 Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At sub- grade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or build- ing slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. 2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each com- pacted backfill layer, at least one test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests. 3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted ini- tial and final backfill layer, at least one test for each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarifY and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3. 0 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil mate- rial to depth as directed by Architect; re- shape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restora- tion to the greatest extent possible. o 047 - Norex, Inc. 3.21 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. . END OF SECTION 02300 . Earthwork 02300 - 7 5 CTION 02741 H T-MIX ASPHALT PAVING P RT 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Pavement-marking paint. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 02230 - SITE CLEARING for removal of existing asphalt surfaces and curbing. 2. Section 02300 - EARTHWORK for aggregate subbase and base courses and for aggregate pavement shoulders. 3. Section 02751 - SITE CONCRETE for concrete curbs, gutters, walkways, equipment pads and paving. 1. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Provide hot-mix asphalt paving according to materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of standard specifications Minnesota Department of Transportation, (MnDOT),current edition of Standard Specifications for Construction. Design Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated on drawings 1. Heavy Duty Pavement System: (BIT-I). a. Minimum 9-inch aggregate base course. b. 4-inch thick asphalt binder/wear course, applied in two - 2-inch thick equal lifts. c. Striping. 2. Light Duty Pavement System: (BIT -2). a. Minimum 8-inch aggregate base course. b. 3-inch thick asphalt binder/wear course, applied in two - I -1/2-inch thick equal lifts. c. Striping. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. B. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work. o 047 - Norex, Inc. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. 1. Manufacturer shall be a paving-mix manufacturer registered with and ap- proved by authorities having jurisdiction or the DOT of the state in which Project is located. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with Minnesota Departruent of Ttansportation (MnD0T), for asphalt paving work. C. The Contractor is to employ the services of a Registered Land Surveyor to perform the specified layout work and to prepare a grade verification survey. The grade verification shalI be submitted prior to project close out. 1. Reference Field Quality Control. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp or if the following conditions are not met: 1. Prime and Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.5 deg C). 2. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) and ris- ing at time of placement. 3. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum sur- face temperature of 60 degF (15.5 deg C) at time of placement. B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) for oil-based materials, 50 deg F (10 deg C) for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AGGREGATES A. Coarse Aggregate: Aggregate shall be 100 percent crushed quarry rock meeting the requirements ofMnDOT Specification 3138, Class 5 gradation. ASTM D 692, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or properly cured, crushed blast-furnace slag. Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving 02741 - 1 2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide Asphalt Binder Course Mix: MnDOT #2331, according to manufacturer's recommended rates A. and written application instructions. Apply to Type 31b (3/4-inch aggregate). dry, prepared subgrade or surface of B. Asphalt Wearing Course Mix: compacted-aggregate base before applying 1. Light Duty: MnDOT #2331, Type 41a. paving materials. 2. Heavy Duty: MnDOT#233l, Type41b C. Tack Coat: (l/2-inch aggregate). 1. New Asphalt: Apply tack coat if there is C. Bituminous Tack Coat: MnDOT #2357 a delay of 72 hours or more between base RC250. course and wear course. a. Apply uniformly over surface of 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS compacted unbound-aggregate base course at a rate of 0.15 to 0.50 gal/sq. A. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed yd. Apply enough material to pene- control, registered by the EP A. Provide in trate and seal but not flood surface. granular, liquid, or wettable powder form. Allow prime coat to cure. b. If tack coat is not entirely absorbed B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, within 24 hours after application, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, spread sand over surface to blot ex- complying with FS TT-P-1l5, Type 1. cess asphalt. Use enough sand to 1. Manufacturers: prevent pickup under traffic. Re- a. J.E. Bauer Company - "Traffic move loose sand by sweeping before Paint". pavement is placed and after volatiles b. Tnemec - "Traffic Paint". have evaporated. c. Glidden Durkee - "Romark Traffic". c. Protect primed substrate from dam- d. PPG- "Traffic & Zone Marking age until ready to receive paving. Paint". 2. Color: 3.2 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING a. White: Parking lanes and traffic con- trol markings. Pedestrian crossing A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared and safety lanes, as marked. surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place b. BlueJWhite: In compliant with Slate asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to ADA requirements, Blue field with equipment in a manner that prevents white symbol markings. segregation of mix. Place each course to c. Yellow: Not applicable. required grade, cross section, and thickness d. Red: Fire lane, where applicable. when compacted. 1. Place hot -mix asphalt base course in PART 3 - EXECUTION number of lifts and thickness indicated. 2. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION 250 deg F (121 deg C), or as recom- mended by MnDOT for cold weather ap- A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt plications. materials, remove loose and deleterious 3. Begin applying mix along centerline of material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that crown for crowned sections and on high prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving. side of one-way slopes, unless otherwise 1. Sweep loose granular particles from sur- indicated. face of unbound-aggregate base course. 4. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain Do not dislodge or disturb aggregate em- smooth, continuous surface free of pulls bedded in compacted surface of base and tears in asphalt-paving mat. course. B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving 02741 - 2 1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. 2. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt surface course. 3. Base course shall be swept as required be- fore placing wear course. 4. Apply tack coat before placing wear course, if there is a delay of 72 hours or greater between base course and wear course application. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface. 3. JOINTS Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions with same te>.1ure and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course. 1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches. 3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 60 inches. 4. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. 5. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course den- sity. 3. COMPACTION General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory- plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. 1. Complete compaction before mix tem- perature cools to 185 deg F (85 deg C). Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements. o 047 - Norex, Inc. C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot -mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density: 1. Average Density: 95 percent of reference laboratory density according to AASHTO T 245,(ASTM D 1559) but not less than 94 percent nor greater than 100 percent. D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm. E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly. F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. 1. Remove deficient areas for full depth of course. 2. Cut sides perpendicular and parallel to di- rection of traffic with edges vertical. 3. Apply tack coat to exposed surfaces be- fore placing new asphalt mix. 4. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness. G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened. H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked. 3.5 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances: 1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: 1. Base Course: 1/4 inch. 2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving 02741 - 3 3.6 PAVEMENT MARKING A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect. B. Allow paving to age for 30 days before starting pavement marking. C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils. E. Markings: Lines shall be four (4-inches) wide. The parking stalls shall be the width called for on the drawings. Paint the international Wheelchair Symbol of Accessibility in each handicapped parking stall. The painted symbol on the pavement shall be in accordance with state code requirements. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. 1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested Work complies with or deviates from specified requirements. B. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to deterruine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. C. Frequency of Test: Provide a minimum offour (4) compaction tests, but not less than one for every 5,000 square feet, at locations as directed by the ArchitectlEngineer. D. Aggregate Base Compaction Testing: Performed in accordnace with ASTM 0698. E. Grade Verification of Aggregate Base: A grade verification survey shall be performed, by the Contractor, after the aggregate base has been installed. The surveyor shall issue a letter certifying that the grades are within the specified tolerances. F. Grade Verification of Bituminous Pavement: A grade verification survey shall be performed, by the Contractor, after the finalljft of bituminous pavement has been completed. The surveyor shall issue a letter certifying that the grades are within the specified tolerances. G. Take asphalt mixture samples and perform tests. H. Flood test: Not applicable. . END OF SECTION 02741 . 02047 - Norex, Inc. Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving 02741 - 4 5 CTION 02751 C MENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT P 1.1 SUMMARY This Section includes e"1erior cement concrete pavement for the following: 1. Site entrance aprons. 2. Curbs and gutters. 3. Walkways. 4. Equipment pads. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 02300 - EARTHWORK for sub grade preparation, grading, and sub- base course. 2. Section 03300 - CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE for general building applica- tions of concrete. 1. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. QUALITY ASSURANCE ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents. Concrete Testing Service: Contractorto engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. Mock-up(s): Not applicable. PROJECT CONDITIONS Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. o 047 - Norex, Inc. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMS A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. 1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a radius 100 feet or less. B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: AS'IM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. B. Reinforcement Bars: AS'IM A 615/A 6l5M, Grade 60, deformed. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. General: Use the same brand and type of cementitious material from the same manufacturer throughout the Project. 1. Comply with requirements of Section 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for concrete materials, admixtures and other site concrete materials, unless oth- erwise specified herein. 2.4 CURING MATERIALS A. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: AS'IM C 309, Type 1, Class B. 1. Available Products: Subject to compli- ance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Safe-Cure Clear; ChemMasters. b. W.E. Resin Cure; Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Day Chern Rez Cure (J-I1-W); Day- ton Superior Corporation. d. L&M Cure R; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. e. 1100 Clear; W. R. Meadows, Inc. f. Resin Cure E; Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation. g. Resi-Chem Clear Cure; Symons Cor- poration. Cement Concrete Pavement 02751 - 1 h. Horncure 100; Tarnms Industries Co., Div. of LaPorte Construction Chemi- cals North America, Inc. 2.5 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork orself-expanding cork. 2.6 CONCRETE MIXES A. Comply wtith requirements of Section 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for concrete mix design, sampling and testing, and quality control and as herin specified. 1. Prepare design mixes, proportioned ac- cording to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field e',:perience. 2. Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the following properties: a. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi. b. Maximum Water-CementitiousMate- rials Ratio: 0.45. c. Slump Limit: 4 inches. B. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 percent: 1. Air Content: 6.0 percent for 3/4-inch maximum aggregate. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional compaction. Proceed with pavement only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement. B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. 3.2 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating reinforcement and with recommendations in CRSI's "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement ofloose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials. C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain miuimum cover to reinforcement. D. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 3.4 JOINTS A. General: Construct construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. 1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated. B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour, unless pavement terminates at isolation joints. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Cement Concrete Pavement 02751 - 2 1. For slabs 6-inches or greater inthickness, provide preformed galvanized steel or plastic keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indi- cated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 2. Continue reinforcement across construc- tion joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indi- cated. 3. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. 4. Place lop of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not in- dicated. 5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together. 6. Protect top edge of joint filler during con- crete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. D. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt- coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. E. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows: Contracotr's option. 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and fin- ishing each edge of joint with groover tool to the following radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces. a. Radius: 1/4 inch. o 047 - Norex, Inc. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatter- proof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut I/S-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks. F. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. 1. Radius: 1/4 inch. 3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcement steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces. C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and alignment. D. Comply with reqnirements and with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. E. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. F. Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete according to recommendations in ACI 309R. Cement Concrete Pavement 02751 - 3 1. Consolidate concrete along face offorms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shov- els for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocat- ing reinforcement, dowels, and joint de- vices. G. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading dry-shake surface treatments. H. Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not approved, remove and replace with formed concrete. 1. Slip-Form Pavers: When automatic machine placement is used for pavement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce pavement to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as required for formed pavement. 1. Compact subbase and prepare sub grade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of paver machine during operations. 1. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggre- gates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. K. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to main- tain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to to- tal amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover reinforcement steel with water- soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature im- mediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog-spray forms, reinforcement steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING A. General: Wetting of concrete surfaces during screeding, initial floating, or finishing operations is prohibited. B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float- finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine- line texture. 3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and follow recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Cement Concrete Pavement 02751 - 4 B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: Representative retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or samples of fresh concrete shall be ob- windy conditions cause moisture loss tained according to ASlM C 172, except approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during modified for slump to comply with finishing operations. Apply according to ASlM C 94. manufacturer's written instructions after 2. Slump: ASlM C 143; one test at point of placing, screeding, and bull floating or darlJying placement for each compressive-strength concrete, but before float finishing. test, but not less than one test for each C. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not day's pour of each type of concrete. Addi- before free water has disappeared from concrete tionai tests will be required when concrete surface. consistency changes. 3. Air Content: ASlM C 231, pressure D. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by curing method; one test for each compressive- compound, or a combination of these as strength test, but not less than one test for follows: each day's pour of each type of air- 1. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in entrained concrete. continuous operation by power spray or 4. Concrete Temperature: ASlM C 1064; roller according to manufacturer's written one test hourly when air temperature is 40 instructions. Recoat areas subjected to deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 heavy rainfall within three hours after ini- deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test tial application. Maintain continuity of for each set of compressive-strength coating and repair damage during curing specimens. period. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cyl- 38 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES inders for each compressive-strength test, Comply with tolerances of ACll17. unless otherwise indicated. Cylinders A. shall be molded and stored for laboratory- cured test specimens unless field-cured 39 PAVEMENT MARKING test specimens are required. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until ASlM C 39; one set for each day's pour layout, colors, and placement have been of each concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd., verified with Architect. but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for B. Allow concrete pavement to cure for 28 days each additional 50 cu. yd. One specimen and be dry before starting pavement marking. shall be tested at 7 days and two speci- e. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose mens at 28 days; one specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing if re- material and dust. quired. D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to 7. When frequency of testing will provide produce pavement markings of dimensions fewer than five compressive-strength tests indicated with uniform, straight edges. Apply for a given class of concrete, testing shall at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide be conducted from at least five randomly a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils. selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 310 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 8. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yd., Architect A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified may waive compressive-strength testing if independent testing and inspection agency to adequate evidence of satisfactory strength sample materials, perform tests, and submit test is provided. reports during concrete placement according to 9. When strength offield-cured cylinders is requirements specified in this Article. less than 85 percent of companion labora- B. Testing Services: Testing shall be performed tory-cured cylinders, current operations shall be evaluated and corrective proce- according to the following requirements: dures shall be provided for protecting and curing in-place concrete. o 047 - Norex, Inc. Cement Concrete Pavement 02751 - 5 10. Strength level of concrete will be consid- ered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive compressive-strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual compressive-strength test result falls be- low specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. C. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 24 hours oftesting. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in pavement, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. D. Additional Tests: Testing agency shall make additional tests of the concrete when test results indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. . END OF SECTION 02751 . 3.11 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet requirements in this Section. B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epo,,"'Y adhesive. C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, din, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Cement Concrete Pavement 02751 - 6 SECTION 03300 ST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE RT 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. 1. Cast-In-Place Concrete includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Footings. b.. Foundation walls. c. Slabs-on-grades. d. Below slab-on-grade vapor barrier. e. Equipment pads and bases. f. Fill for steel pipe bollards. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 00220 - SOILS INVESTIGATION DATA. 2. Section 02300 - EARlHWORK for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 3. Section 02751 - CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT for site con- crete pavement and walks. 4. Section 03451 - PLANT-PRECAST ARCIDTECTURAL CONCRETE ELEMENTS for precast window sills. 5. Section 10350 - FLAGPOLES for foundation requirements. 1. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details offabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. 02 47 - Norex, Inc. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASlM C 1077 and ASlM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASlM E 548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Techuician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-l or an equivalent certification program. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the same manufacturer. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to A WS D lA, "Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel." D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete. " 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form- facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads. D. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. Cast-in-Place Concrete 03300 - 1 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSl's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar sup- ports. B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. 2,4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, or Type III. 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F, only when approved by Structural Engi- neer. B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, and as follows: 1. Class: Severe weathering region, but not less than 3S. 2. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: a. Footings: 1-1/2 inches. b. Walls: I-inch. c. Slabs: 'I.-inch. C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94. 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water- soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. Only when approved by Structural Engineer. 2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Vapor Retarder Type I (VR-l): Polyethylene sheet material that is resislnat to deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154. Not less than ten (10)mil thickness. Install with adhesive backed polyethylene tape. B. Granular Cushion Fill (placed beneath vapor retarder): Per Section 02300 - EARTHWORK. 2.7 CURING MATERIALS A. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. B. Water: Potable. e. Interior Curing Compound Material I (ICCM- 1): Not used. D. Interior Curing Compound Material 2 (ICCM- 2); Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forruing Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B. 1. Available Products: Subject to compli- ance with requirements, clear, waterborne, membrane-forming curing compound products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AH Clear Cure WB; Anti-Hydro In- ternational, Inc. b. Safe Cure and Seal; Dayton Superior Corporation. c. Aqua Cure VOX; Euclid Chemical Co. d. Dress & Seal WB; L&M Construc- tion Chemicals, Inc. e. Vocomp-20; W. R. Meadows, Inc. f. Cure & Seal l50E; Nox-Crete Prod- ucts Group, Kinsman Corporation. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300 - 2 g. Kure-N-SeaI WE; Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc. 2. RELATED MATERIALS Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt- saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. 2. REPAIR MATERIALS Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer- modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manu- facturer recommended for substrate, con- ditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recom- mended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109. Repair Topping: Traffic-bearing, cement- based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recom- mended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5700 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2. 0 CONCRETE MIXES Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows: 1. Proportion normal-weight concrete ac- cording to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis. o 047 - Norex, Inc. C. Design mixes to preovide normal weight concrete with the following properties unless otherwise indicated on Structural Drawings and Schedules: 1. General; All concrete except as specified below: a. Compressive Strength: 4,000 p.s.i. b. Maximum Aggregate Size: o/.o-inch. c. Slump Limits: 3 - 4-inches. d. Air Content: 0%. e. Water-Cement Ratio: -. 2. Concrete exposed to weather, including dock paving, foundation walls and retain- ing walls: a. Compressive Strength: 4,000 p.s.i. b. Maximum Aggregate Size: o/.o-inch. c. Slump Limits: 3 - 4-inches. d. Air Content: 6+1%. e. Water-Cement Ratio: 0.46. 3. Interior Slabs-On-Grade: a. Compressive Strength: 4,000 p.s.i. b. Maximum Aggregate Size: o/.o-inch. c. Slump Limits: 3 - 4-inches. d. Air Content: 0%. e. Water-Cement Ratio: 0.55 4. Spread and Continuous Footings: a. Compressive Strength: 3,000 p.s.i. b. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1-112- inch. c. Slump Limits: 3 - 5-inches. d. Air Content: 0%. e. Water-Cement Ratio: -. 5. Exterior Sidewalks, Stoops, Stairs, Ramps and Curbs: a. Compressive Strength: 4,000 p.s.i. b. Maximum Aggregate Size: o/.o-inch. c. Slump Limits: 3 - 4-inches. d. Air Content: 6+1%. e. Water-Cement Ratio: 0.46. 6. Masonry Grout: a. Compressive Strength: 3,000 p.s.i. b. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/8-inch. (fine grade) c. Slump Limits: 8 - ll-inches. d. Air Content: 0%. D. Fly Ash Use: Where permitted by Structural Engineer, provide as follows: 1. Concrete exposed to weather including dock paving, foundation walls and retain- ing walls: Fly ash replacement of cement shall not exceed 15 percent by weight. 2. Exterior sidewalks, stoops, stairs, ramps and curbs: Do not use fly ash. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300 - 3 3. For all other concrete: Fly ash replace- ment of cement shall not exceed 20 per- cent by weight. E. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. F. Admixtures: 1. The use of water reducing admixtures, salts or anti-freeze ingredients is not per- mitted. 2. The use of air-entraining admixtures is permitted. 3. The use of admixtures not defined in this specification section may be submitted for review but may be rejected by the Struc- tural Engineer. 2.11 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to AS1M C 94, and furnish batch ticket information. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain .formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. D. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. E. Chamfer exterior comers and edges of permanently exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated on Structural Drawings. F. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. G. Build-in sleeves, anchors, inserts, bolts and other devices indicated or required. Provide sleeves2-inches larger in diameter than piping to be sleeved, unless othewise indicated. InstaIl sleeves flush with finished surfaces, Install other items according to manufacturer's instructions. Coordinate and build-in sleeves, thimbles, and other items furnished or set in place by other trades. H. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. I. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. J. Coat contact surfaces offorms with form- release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required. 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork, for sides ofbearns, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Leave formwork, for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following: 1. At least 70 percent of 28-day design com- pressive strength. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Cast-in-Place Concrete 03300 - 4 2. Remove forms only if shores have been 3.6 JOINTS arranged to perruit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and otherwise damaged form-facing material will appearance of concrete are not impaired, at not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply locations indicated or as approved by Architect new form-release agent. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main rein- When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove forcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless other- fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. wise indicated. Do not continue rein- Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not forcement through sides of strip place- use patched forms for exposed concrete ments of floors and slabs. surfaces unless approved by Architect. 2. Use a bonding agent at locations where 3. VAPOR RETARDERS fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. Vapor Retarder: Place, protect, and repair C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form vapor-retarder sheets according to weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning AS1M E 1643 and mannfacturer's written concrete into areas as indicated. Construct instructions. contraction joints for a depth equal to at leaS! Granular Fill: Place vapor retarder over one-fourth of concrete thickness, as follows: Contractor's ootion. granular fill, moisten, and compact with 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances after initial floating by grooving and fin- of plus 0 inch or minus 3/4 inch. ishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 3. STEEL REINFORCEMENT inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. surfaces. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder with power saws equipped with shatter- before placing concrete. proof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut l/8-inch- wide joints into Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill concrete when cutting action will not tear, scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials. abrade, or otherwise damage surface and Accurately position, support, and secure before concrete develops random contrac- reinforcement against displacement. Locate tion cracks. and support reinforcement with bar supports to D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at weld crossing reinforcing bars. slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as 1. Shop- or field-weld reinforcement accord- column pedestals, foundation walls, grade ingto AWS 01.4, where indicated. beams, and other locations, as indicated. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, 3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT not toward exposed concrete surfaces. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable A. Before placing concrete, verilY that installation lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize offormwork, reinforcement, and embedded sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining items is complete and that required inspections sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of have been performed. adjoiuing sheet widths to prevent continuous B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with Project site, or during placement, unless wire. approved by Architect. o 047 - Norex, Inc. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300 - 5 e. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. Ifa section cannot be placed'continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Consolidate placed concrete with me- chanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and procedures for consolidat- ing concrete recommended by ACI 309R. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibra- tors vertically at uniformly spaced loca- tions no farther than the visible effective- ness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not in- sert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforce- ment and other embedded items without causing mix constituents to segregate. D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open- textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleed- water appears on the surface. Do not fur- ther disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggre- gates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on sub- grade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium cWoride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. F. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows, when hot-weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to main- tain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid ni- trogen to cool concrete is Contractor's op- tion. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water- soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature im- mediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch in height. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300 - 6 C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3. FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes. 1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces to receive mortar setting beds for ceramic tile, and other bonded cementitious floor finishes. C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power- driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, . D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in teJo.ture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient floor- ing, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system 2. Finish surfaces to the following toler- ances, measured within 24 hours accord- ing to AS1M E 1155 for a randomly traf- ficked floor surface: a. For floor finishes of vinyl tile, carpet and coatings: o 047 - Norex, Inc. 1) Specified overall values of flat- ness, F(F) 25; and levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and levelness, F(L) 15. b. For floor finishes of thin-set ceramic tile, special coatings: 1) Specified overall values of flat- ness, F(F) 35; and levelness, F(L) 25; with miuimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on- grade. E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partia1 trowel finish, stopping after second troweling, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarifY surface with a fine broom. F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before applica- tion. 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with comers, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300 - 7 D. Pipe Bollards: Where indicated, fil core of steel pipes with concrete. "Dome" off top of pipe, by forming a 1/ 2 sphere, unless detailed otherwise. 3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a combination of the following methods: C. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continu- ously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12- inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in wid- est practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period us- ing cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture- retaining covers to cure concrete sur- faces to receive quarry tile, ceramic tile, or other hard formed floor finish- ing coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture- retaining covers to cure concrete sur- faces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments, or urethane, epoxy or other special coatings. 3. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after ini- tial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaited and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Cast-in-Place Concrete 03300 - 8 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match sur- rounding color. Patch a test area at incon- spicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patch- ing. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding sur- face. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed sur- faces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing de- fects. Surface defects include spalls, pop- outs, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or com- pletely through uDTeinforced sections re- gardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or im- mediately after completing surface finish- ing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Fin- ish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to re- ceive floor coverings with a repair under- layment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to mannfacturer's written instructions to pro- duce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to re- main exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adja- cent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to mannfacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. o 047 - Norex, Inc. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent con- crete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patch- ing mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article. B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples offresh concrete obtained according to AS1M C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each con- crete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each addi- tional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. 2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300 - 9 3. Slump: AS1M C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 4. Air Content: AS1M C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; AS1M C 173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 5. Compression Test Specimens: AS1M C 31; cast and laboratory cure one set offour standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. a. Cast and field cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: AS1M C 39; test two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and two at 28 days. a. Structural concrete only. b. Test two field-cured specimens at 7 days and two at 28 days. c. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. e. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7 -and 28-day tests. E. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to deterruine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with AS1M C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect. . END OF SECTION 03300. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300 - 10 ECTION 03451 LANT- PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL ONCRETE ELEMENTS ART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Precast architectural concrete units- decorative elements, including but not limited to: a. Window sills. b. Wall caps. c. Monument sign base cap. 2. Section 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES for installation of decora- tive precast elements. 3. Section 07920 - JOINT SEALANT for elastomeric joint sealants and sealant backings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide precast architectural concrete units and connections capable of withstanding required design loads. B. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who utilizes a qualified professional engineer, licensed in the State of Minnesota, to prepare design calculations, shop drawings, and other structural data for architectural precast concrete units. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. 1. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of precast architectural con- crete units. Indicate member locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, cross sections, limits of each finish, and types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement. 2. Samples: Upon request of the Architect. 2047 - Norex, Inc. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that complies with the following requirements and is experienced in manufacturing precast architectural concrete units similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1. Assumes responsibility for engineering precast architectural concrete units to comply with performance requirements. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engi- neering analysis by a qualified profes- sional engineer. B. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 and the design recommendations of PC I MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook--Precast and Prestressed Concrete." Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality- control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with PCI MNL 117, "Manual for Quality Con- trol for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products. " C. Mockups: Not applicable. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver precast architectural concrete units to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of installation. Store units at Project site to prevent cracking, distorting, warping, staining, or other physical damage, and so markings are visible. B. Lift and support units only at designated lifting and supporting points as shown on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MOLD MATERIALS A. Molds: Provide molds and, where required, form-facing materials of metal, plastic, wood, or another material that is nonreactive with concrete and dimensionally stable to produce continuous and true precast concrete surfaces within fabrication tolerances and suitable for required finishes Plant-Precast Architectural Concrete Elements 03451 - 1 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS 2.7 CONCRETE MIXES A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, gray of same type, brand, and source. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C 33, with coarse aggregates complying with Class 5S. e. Coloring Admixture: Not applicable. D. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength of concrete and complying with chemical limits of PC I MNL 1 17. E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. 2.4 STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS A. Anchors 1 Dowels: Fabricator's option, furnish one of the following: 1. Steel Anchors: Fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A 36, and hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123. 2. Stainless Steel Anchors: Fabricated from stainless steel complying with ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304. 3. Steel Dowels: Round steel bars comply- ing with ASTM A36 or ASTM A 615, y,- inch diameter, and hot dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123. 4. Stainless Steel Dowel: Round stainless steel bars complying with ASTM A 276, Type 304, \I,-inch diameter. 2,5 BEARING PADS A. Provide bearing pads for precast architectural concrete units as recommended by the fabricator for the conditions indicated. 2.6 GROUT MATERIALS A. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I, and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 144. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2- 1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. A. Prepare design mixes for each type of concrete required. B. Design mixes may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified precast plant personnel at precast architectural concrete fabricator's option. e. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to the maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by ACI 318. D. Add air-entraining admixture at manufucturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content complying withPCIMNL 117. E. When included in design mixes, add other admixtures to concrete mixes according to manufacturerls written instructions. 2.8 SEALANT A. Reference Section 09720 - JOINT SEALANT for materials and procedures. B. Sealant Type SLNT-I0, a multicomponent Nonsag Urethane sealant. Type M; Grade NS; Class 25. 1. Product: a. Bostik Inc; "Chem-Calk 500" b. Sonneborn Building Products Div., ~'Sonolastic NP-2". c. Tremco; "Dymeric", d. Approved substitute. e. Joint Backer: ASTM C 13 30 cylindrical backing rods of Type C or O. 2,9 MOLD FABRICATION A. Molds: Accurately construct molds, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures due to concrete-placement operations and temperature changes and for prestressing operations. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Plant-Precast Architectural Concrete Elements 03451 - 2 2. 0 FABRICATION Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements. Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement or concrete placement. Furnish loose anchors, dowels, and other hardware shapes for securing precast architectural concrete units to supporting and adjacent construction. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" and PCI MNL 117 for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. Reinforce precast architectural concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection stresses. Prestress tendons for precast architectural concrete units by either pretensioning or posttensioning methods. Comply with PCI MNL 117 Mix concrete according to PCI MNL 117 and requirements in this Section. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from forming in precast concrete units. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 117 for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built-in items. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 117. Comply with ACI 306.1 procedures for cold- weather concrete placement. Comply with ACI 305R recommendations for hot-weather concrete placement. 02 47 - Norex, Inc. K. Identify pickup points of precast architectural concrete units and orientation in structure with permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or permanently mark casting date on each precast architectural concrete unit on a surface that will not show in finished structure. L. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 117, by moisture retention without heat or by accelerated heat curing using low- pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. M. Discard precast architectural concrete units that are warped, cracked, broken, spalled, stained, or otherwise defective unless repairs are approved by Architect. 2.11 FINISHES A. Finish e"'Posed surfaces of precast architectural concrete units by smooth, steel-trowel finish. B. Finish unexposed surfaces of precast architectural concrete units by float finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - BY MASON CONTRACTOR A. Complete installation under Section 04810 - UNIT MSONRY ASSEMBLIES. B. Install setting pins or other anchoring devices into masonry veneer wall. Grout solid. e. Lay self-adhering water barrier, where indicated. Seal round setting pins. Form flashing dams. D. Install precast architectural concrete. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment as units are being permanently connected. 1. Install bearing pads as precast concrete units are being erected. 2. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection progresses. 3. Install weep material. 4. When setting the precast units, grout in pin or bolt. E. All joints of exposed precast units are to receive backer rod and joint sealant. 1. Comply with the requirements of Section 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS Plant-Precast Architectural Concrete Elements 03451 - 3 3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install precast architectural concrete units level, plumb, square, true, and in alignment without exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 117, Appendix 1. 3,3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Not applicable. 3.4 REPAIRS A. Repair exposed exterior surfaces of precast architectural concrete units to match color, texture, and uniforruity of surrounding precast architectural concrete if perruitted by Architect. B. Remove and replace damaged precast architectural concrete units if repairs do not comply with requirements. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains. 1. Wash and rinse according to precast con- crete fabricator's written recommenda- tions. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations. 2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of ex- posed concrete finishes. . END OF SECTION 03451 . 02047 - Norex, Inc. Plant-Precast Architectural Concrete Elements 03451 - 4 S CTION 04810 U IT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES P RT 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Face brick. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Reinforcing steel. 5. Masonry joint reinforcement. 6. Ties and anchors. 7. Embedded flashing. 8. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS for caulking of joints within masonry units. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following: 1. Section 03410 - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE for precast concrete window sills, wall caps, and monument sign base cap. 2. Section 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION for rigid insulation applied at foundation wall. 3. Section 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND 1RIM for manufac- tured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing. 4. Section 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES for hollow-metal frames in unit masonry openings. 1. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified. Samples for Verification: For the following: 1. Full-size units (4-inch block) for each dif- ferent exposed masonry unit required, showing the full range of exposed colors, textures, and dimensions to be expected in the completed construction. 02 47 - Norex. Inc. 2. Colored mortar Samples for each color required, showing the full range of colors expected in the finished construction. Make samples using the same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of pigments used. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASlM C 1093 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASlM E 548. B. Mock-up Panels: Before installing unit masonry, build sample panels, using materials indicated for the completed Work, to verify selections made under Sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. If required mock-up panel is not detailed on drawings, build mock-up to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the complete Work. 1. Locate panels in the locations indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Archi- tect. 2. Erect one (1) face brick mock-up(s) as follows: a. Not less than 48-inches long by 48- inches high, but of size to include all face brick products specified. b. Each masonry veneer construction mock-up shall demonstrate a typical exterior wall and include the face brick(s) indicated with grout(s); proper air space; adjustable anchors; air barrier over sheathing; and metal stud backup. c. Include a weep system, complete with embedded flashing and wicking. Dam condition must be visible. d. Mock-up shall incorporate face brick types(s) indicated, and in the pattern indicated, using the grout type(s) in- dicated. e. Coordinate with other trades if other materials will be included in mock- up. Review with Prime Contactor and Architect. If applicable: 1) Aluminum window system. 2) Precast or cast-in-place concrete sills, caps or other masonry laid products. Unit Masonry Assemblies 04810-1 3) Exterior Insulation Finish Sys- tem. 4) Sealants. 3. Clean exposed faces of panels with ma- sonry cleaner indicated. 4. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writ- ing. a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents con- tained in sample panels, unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. 5. Maintain sample panels during construc- tion in an undisturbed condition as a stan- dard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove sample panels when directed. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover. e. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1,5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by cover- ings spread on ground and over wall sur- face. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto com- pleted masonry. e. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1 . 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air tempera- ture is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. 1. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F (38 deg C), or 90 deg F (32 deg C) with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph , do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mor- tar. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Unit Masonry Assemblies 04810 - 2 P RT 2 - PRODUCTS 2.3 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE UNITS - DECORATIVE 2. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS ELEMENTS General: Provide shapes indicated and as A. Precast units furnished under Section 03451 - follows: PLANT PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, CONCRE1E ELEMENTS for installation by jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bond- mason. ing, and other special conditions. 1. Precast wall caps, window sills, and 2. Provide square-edged units for outside monument sign base cap. corners, unless indicated as bullnose. Drawing Designation Types For Masonry: 2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS 1. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU) Types: A. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of a. CMU-l: Smooth face. portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, CMU-l: Smooth face. Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime 1. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C90. complying with ASTM C 207. 2. Unit Compressive Strength: Minimum 1. Available Colored Portland Cement Lime 1900 psi average net area. Mix Products: 3. Weight Classification: Normal weight. a. Eaglebond; Blue Circle Cement. 4. Moisture Control: b. Color Mortar Blend; Glen-Gery Corp. a. Type 1: Moisture-controlled units for c. Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color all exterior exposed applications. CementlLime; Holnarn, Inc. b. Type II: Non-moisture-controlled d. Centurion Colorbond PL; Lafarge units for below grade, non-exposed Corp. above grade and interior installations. e. Lehigh Custom Color PortlandlLime; 5. Sizes (Width): Manufactured sizes as in- Lehigh Portland Cement Co. dicated or required by construction. f. Riverton Portland Cement Lime Cus- 6. Exposed Face: Smooth face. tom Color; Riverton Corporation. 7. Color Natural concrete. g. Twin City Concrete h. Approved substitute. 2. BRICK 2. Pigment For the following masonry units - formulate to match: General: Provide shapes indicated and as a. CMU-l (concealed) Grout: Standard follows for each form of brick required: gray. 1. Provide units without cores or frogs and b. FB-l Grout: To be selected. with exposed surfaces finished for ends of c. FB-2 Grout: To be selected. sills and caps and for similar applications B. Masonry Cement: Not to be used in this that would otherwise expose unfinished project. brick surfaces. Face Brick: Pre-selected and available from: e. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. 1. Corning Donahue Inc., St. Paul, MN. D. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, A TIEN Mr. Greg Seaburg. 651-646- noncorrosive, accelerating admixture 8000. complying with ASlM C 494, Type C, and e. Face Brick Types: recommended by the manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. 1. FB-l: Belden #360, Sand cast, Modular, 1. Accelguard 80; Euclid Chemical Co. Size 4" x 2-3/8" x 8". 2. Morseled; W. R Grace & Co., Construc- 2. FB-2: Belden #730, Sand cast, Modular, tion Products Division. Size 4" x 2-3/8" x 8", 3. Trimix-NCA; Sonneborn, Div. ofChem- Rex, Inc. 4. Approved substitute.. E. Water: Potable. o 047 - Norex, Inc. Unit Masonry Assemblies 04810 - 3 2.5 REINFORCING STEEL A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615; ASTM A 616, including Supplement 1; or ASTM A 617, Grade 60. 2.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: ASTM A 951 and as follows: 1. Hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire for exterior walls. 2. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units where indicated. B. For single-wythe masonry, provide ladder type with single pair of side rods and cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. 2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL A. General: Provide ties and anchors, specified in subsequent articles, made from materials that comply with this Article, unless otherwise indicated. B. Hot-Dip Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating. 2.8 ADJUSTABLE MASONRY-VENEER ANCHORS A. General: Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows: 1. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbfload in both tension and compression witliout de- forruing or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch. B. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie section and a metal anchor section complying with the following requirements: 1. Anchor Section: Sheet metal plate with screw holes top and bottom and with raised rib-stiffened strap stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and plate for connection of wire tie. a. Plate 1-1/4 inches wide by 6 inches long with strap 5/8 inch wide by 3- 5/8 inches long; slot clearance formed between face of plate and back of strap shall not exceed diameter of wire tie by more than 1/32 inch. 2. Wire Tie Section: Triangular or Rectan- gular-shaped wire tie sized to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. C. Available Products: Subjectto compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer An- chors: a. DIA 213; Dur-O-Wal, Inc. b. D/A 210 withDIA 700-708; Dur-O- Wal, Inc. c. 315-D with 316; Heckman Building Products, Inc. d. Pos-I-Tie; Heckman Building Prod- ucts, Inc. e. DW-I0; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. f. DW-I0HS; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. g. DW-lO-X; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. h. 1004, Type III; Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America. i. RJ -711; Masonry Reinforcing Corpo- ration of America. D. Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer, No. 10 diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange by not less than 3 exposed threads, and with the following corrosion protective coating: 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS 1. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indi- cated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C 2.10 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Fabricate from the following metal complying with requirements specified in Section 07610 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 02047 - Norex, Inc. Unit Masonry Assemblies 04810 - 4 Contractor's Option for Concealed Flashing: For flashing partly exposed to the exterior, use metal flashing specified above. For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Manufac- turer's standard composite flashing prod- uct consisting of a pliable and highly ad- hesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness as indicated: a. ManufacturerslProduct: 1) W.R. Grace & Co.; "Perm-A- Barrier Wall Flashing", 40 mil thick. 2) Polyguard Products Inc.; "Poly- guard 300", 30 mil thick. 3) Williams Products Inc.; "Ever- lastic MF -40", 40 mil thick. 4) Approved substitute. 2. Vinyl Sheet Flashing: Virgin polyvinyl chloride with plasticizers. Overall thick- ness as indicated: a. ManufacturerslProducts: 1) International Permalite Inc.; "Lexsuco Water Barrier", 30 mil thick - minimum. 2) Nervastral, Inc.; "Nervastral", 30 mil thick - minimum. 3) Approved substitute. 3. EPDM Flashing: Manufacturer's standard flashing product formed from a terpoly- mer of ethylene-propylene diene, comply- ing with ASTM D 4637, 0.040 inch thick. a. ManufacturerslProducts: 1) Firestone Building Products; "FlashGuard" . 2) Approved substitute. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by the flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. 2. 1 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY CCESSORIES Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2Al; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene or urethane. o 047 - Norex, Inc. B. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). C. Wicking Material: Cotton or polyester rope, 1/4 to 3/8 inch in diameter, in length required to produce 2-inch exposure on exterior and 18 inches in cavity between wythes. 2.12 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 112- cup dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1I2-cup dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. of water. 2.13 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at the same rate for all mortar, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. e. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270 Proportion Specification. 1. For masonry below grade, in contact with earth, and where indicated, use Type M 2. For reinforced masonry and where indi- cated, use Type S. 3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. D. Pigmented Mortar: As listed under Article MORTAR & GROUT MATERIALS. Unit Masonry Assemblies 04810 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this Section and in other Sections of the Specifications. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to the opening. D. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide a continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Where possible, use full-size units without cutting. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 gi30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at the time of laying. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1 and the following: B. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and e>'pansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. C. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. D. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. E. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. F. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch. 3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 1. One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. 2. Stack bond. 3. One-third running bond. 4. As indicated on Drawings. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at comers. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back one-half-unit length for one-half running bond or one-third-unit length for one- third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar before laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Unit Masonry Assemblies 04810-6 F. Fill space between hollow-metal frames and e. Set precast architectural window sill using masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise bearing pads over shelf-adhering flashing indicated. membrane, dowel setting pins set in grout. G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in Units will have wet sealant joints. cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the grout into core. joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units 3.5 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless A. General: Provide continuous masonry joint otherwise indicated. reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a height of story to underside of solid floor or minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of roof structure above, unless otherwise indicated. walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a 1. Install compressible filler in joint between minimum of 6 inches. top of partition and underside of structure 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 above. inches o.c. 2. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 against structure above with small pieces inches o.c. in foundation walls and para- of tile, slate, or metal. Filljointwithmor- pet walls. tar after dead-load deflection of structure 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 above approaches final position. inches above and below wall openings 3. At fire-rated partitions, install firestopping and extending 12 inches beyond open- in joint between top of partition and un- ings. derside of structure above to comply with a. Reinforcement above is in addition to Section 08740 - FIRESTOPPING continuous reinforcement. SYSTEMS. B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control 34 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows: e. Provide continuity at comers and wall 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T' and vertical face shells. sections. Cut and bend reinforcing units as 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on directed by manufacturer for continuity at footings and in all courses of piers, col- returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe umns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to enclosures, and other special conditions. cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells 3.6 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including areas under cells. A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with B. Lay solid brick-size masonry units with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: completely filled bed and head joints; butter 1. Fasten each anchor section through ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints sheathing to wall framing with two metal and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed fasteners of type indicated. joints or slush head joints. 2. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. 1. At cavity walls, bevel beds away from Provide not less than 2 inches of air space cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions between back of masonry veneer and face into cavity. As work progresses, trowel of sheathing. mortar fins protruding into cavity flat 3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum against the cavity face of the brick. vertical differential movement of ties up and down. o 047 - Norex, Inc. Unit Masonry Assemblies 04810-7 4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceed- ing 8 inches, around the perimeter. 5. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 32 inches o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceed- ing 36 inches, around perimeter. 3.7 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build-in related items as masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow con- tour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake joints in exposed faces. 2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets de- signed to fit standard sash block. 3. Install interlocking units designed for con- trol joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake joint. 4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete. 3.8 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. B. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Unless otherwise indicated, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. C. Install flashing as follows: 2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flash- ing 4 inches at ends and turn flashing up not less than 2 inches to form a pan. PROVIDE END DAMS. 3. Where sheet metal flashing is used, ex- tend 1/2 inch beyond face of masonry at exterior and turn flashing down to form a drip. 4. Cut flashing off flush with face of wall af- ter masonry wall construction is com- pleted. D. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use wicking material to form weep holes. 2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing in brick sills. Turn wick- ing down at lip of sill to be as inconspicu- ous as possible. 3. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. 4. Space weep holes formed from wicking material 16 inches o.c. 5. In cavities, place pea gravel to a height equal to height of first course, but not less than 2 inches, immediately above top of flashing embedded in the wall, as ma- sonry construction progresses, to splatter mortar droppings and to maintain drain- age. E. Trim wicking material used in weep holes flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set. 3.9 INSTALLATION OF PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE ELEMENTS A. As furnished under Section 03451 - PLANT PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE ELEMENTS and approved shop drawings, install precast elements as indicated using steel anchor bolts and grout. 1. Precast window sills. 2. Precast wall caps. 3. Precast monument sign base cap. B. Apply flashing membrane over masonry wall after pins have been set in full grouted top course. Seal flashing around pin. Shim sill to proper joint size; install wick materials; set precast units with grout. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Unit Masonry Assemblies 04810 - 8 C. Apply rod stock and sealant to all exposed joints. 310 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application. e. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Archi- tect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or wa- terproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before ap- plying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing the surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean brick by the bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes No. 20, using job-mixed detergent solution. 6. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufac- turer's written instructions. 7. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 ap- plicable to type of stain on exposed sur- faces. o 047 - Norex, Inc. 3.11 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Recycling: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. . END OF SECTION 04810. Unit Masonry Assemblies 04810 - 9 CTION 05120 E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with A WS RUCTURAL STEEL requirements. 2.2 BOLTS,CONNECTORS,AND RT 1 - GENERAL ANCHORS 1,1 SUMMARY A. Non-High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, A. This Section includes the following: Property Class 4.6); carbon-steel, hex-head 1. Structural steel. bolts; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened 2. Grout. steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain, uncoated; Unless otherwise 1, PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS noted on Structrual drawings to be Hot- dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class C, A. Structural Perfonnance: Engineer structural or Mechanically deposited zinc coating, steel connections required by the Contract ASTM B 695, Class 50. Documents to be selected or completed by the B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: fabricator to withstand design loading indicated. ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel B. Enginssering Responsibility: Fabricator's structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex responsibilities include using a qualified carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened professional engineer to prepare structural carbon-steel washers. analysis data for structural-steel connections. 1. Finish: Plain, uncoated; Unless otherwise noted on Structrual drawings to be Hot- 1. SUBMITTALS dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class C, A. Product Data: For each type of product or Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50. indicated. e. Eye Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 108, B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural- Grade 1030, cold-finished carbon steel. steel components. 1. For structural-steel connections indicated 2.3 PRIMER to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and by the qualified professional engineer re- chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting sponsible for their preparation. primer. C. Welding certificates. 2.4 GROUT 1 COORDINATION A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic attached to other construction without delaying aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet mixed with water to consistency suitable for metal templates, instructions, and directions for application and a 30-minute working time. installation. 2.5 FABRICATION P RT 2 - PRODUCTS A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate 21 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992 specifications and Shop help Drawings. B. Channels, Angles, M or S-Shapes: B. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal ASTM A 36 cut, when approved by engineer of record, or C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36 Cold-Formed punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, metal surfaces. Grade B, structural tubing. o 047 - Nortex, Inc. Structural Steel 05120 - 1 C. Holes: Provide holes required for securing PART 3 - EXECUTION other work to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members. 3.1 ERECTION 2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC. A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface specified. of base and bearing plates. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened, unless oth- 1. Set base and bearing plates for structural erwise indicated on structural drawings. members on wedges, shims, or setting B. Weld Connections: Comply with A WS D 1.1 nuts as required. for welding procedure specifications, 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported and for methods used in correcting welding members have been positioned and work. plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with 2.7 SHOP PRIMING edge of base or bearing plate before pack- Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: ing with grout. A. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. bearing surfaces and base or bearing Extend priming of partially embedded plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish members to a depth of 2 inches. exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be to cure. Comply with manufacturer's painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and written installation instructions for shrink- spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces age-resistant grouts. according to the following specifications and C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural standards: steelwithin AISC's "Code of Standard Practice 1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." for Steel Buildings and Bridges." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, D. Align and adjust various members forming part apply primer according to manufacturer's of complete frame or structure before written instructions and at rate recommended by permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be than 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in permanent contact with members. Perform in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and necessary adjustments to compensate for exposed surfaces. discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL structure. Owner will engage an independent testing and 2. Make allowances for difference between A. temperature at time of erection and mean inspecting agency to perform shop tests and temperature when structure is completed inspections and prepare test reports. and in service. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is be- E. Splice members only where indicated. ing fabricated or produced to perform FIELD CONNECTIONS tests and inspections. 3.2 B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength and inspections indicate does not comply with bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for the Contract Documents. Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 02047 - Nortex, Inc. Structural Steel 05120 - 2 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened, unless oth- erwise indicated on Structural Drawings. Weld Connections: Comply with A WS D 1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design" for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 3. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will beinspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using AS1M A 325 or A 490 Bolts." Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to A WS D 1.1. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. . END OF SECTION 05120. 02 47 - Nortex, Inc. Structural Steel 05120 - 3 5 CTION 05400 B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, C LD-FORMED METAL FRAMING thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical p RT 1 - GENERAL fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, 1. SUMMARY bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, This Section includes the following: connection details, and attachment to adjoining Work. 1. Exterior load-bearing wall framing. 1. For cold-formed metal framing indicated 2. Interior load-bearing wall framing. to comply with design loads, include Related Sections include the following: structural analysis data signed and sealed 1. Section 06105 - MISCELLEANOUS by the qualified professional engineer re- ROUGH CARPENTRY for wood block- sponsible for their preparation. ing~ C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for 2. Section 09260 - GYPSUM welding procedures and personnel. SHEA THING for exterior sheathing board and air barrier 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3. Section 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEl\.1BLIES for interior non-load- A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced bearing metal-stud framing and ceiling- installer who has completed cold-formed metal suspension assemblies; Shaft-wall assem- framing similar in material, design, and extent blies. to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record 1. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS of successful in-service performance. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, B. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a qualified and erect cold-formed metal framing capable of and licensed professional engineer, in the State withstanding design loads within limits and of Minnesota, to prepare design calculations, under conditions indicated. Shop Drawings, and other structural data. 1. Design Loads: As indicated or required e. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel by Code. according to AWS Dl.l, "Structural Welding 2. Deflection Limits: Design framing sys- Code-Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural terns to withstand design loads without Welding Code-Sheet Steel." deflections greater than the following: D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where a. Exterior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/600ofthe metal framing is part of a fire-resistance-rated wall height. assembly, provide framing identical to that of b. Interior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: assemblies tested for fire resistance per Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the ASlM E 119 by a testing and inspecting wall height. agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Design framing system to maintain clear- 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by GA ances at openings, to allow for construc- File Numbers in GA-600, "Fire Resis- tion tolerances, and to accommodate live tance Design Manual," or by design des- load deflection of primary building struc- ignations from UL's "Fire Resistance Di- lure. rectory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. 1. SUBMITTALS E. AISI Specifications: Comply with AISI's Product Data: For each type of cold-formed "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" for calculating metal framing product and accessory indicated. structural characteristics of cold-formed metal framing o 047 - Norex, Inc. Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05400 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering cold-formed metal framing that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Clark Steel Framing Industries. 2. Dale Industries, Inc. 3. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 4. Unimast, Inc. 5. United Metal Products, Inc. 6. Western Metal Lath. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASlM A 570, hot rolled or ASlM A 611, cold rolled; cleaned, pretreated, and primed with manufacturer's baked-<>Il, lead- and chromate-free, rust-inhibitive primer complying with performance requirements in FS IT -P-664, of grade as follows: 1. Grade: As required by structural per- formance. 2.3 LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING E. A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASlM C 955, and as follows: 1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As required by structural performance and F. design: a. 0.0329-inch (20 gage) #33 uncoated steel thickness G. b. 0.0428-inch (18 gage) #43 uncoated steel thickness c. 0.0538-inch (16 gage) #54 uncoated steel thickness. d. 0.0677-inch (14 gage) #68 uncoated steel thickness. e. 0.0966-inch (12 gage) #97 uncoated H. steel thickness. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, complying with ASlM C 955, and as follows: 1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: Matching steel studs. 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches 2.4 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASlM A 36/ A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASlM A 123. B. Anchor Bolts: ASlMF 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by: 1. hot-dip process according to ASlM A 153, Class C or 2. Mechanically deposition according to ASlM B 695, Class 50. e. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as deterruined by testing per ASlM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASlM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant- coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard else- where. Welding Electrodes: Comply with A WS standards. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASlM C 1107, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time. Sill Sealer "Gasket" Insulation: Closed-cell neoprene foam, Y.O-inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and requirements in this Section. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05400 - 2 1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shear- ing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing mem- bers by welding. Wire tying offraming members is not permitted. Comply with A WS D 1. 3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 4. Fasten cold-formed metal framing mem- bers by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with A WS D 1.3 require- ments and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and in- stall according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined mem- bers by not less than three exposed screw threads. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 118 inch in 10 feet (1 :960) : 1. Spacing: Space individual framing mem- bers no more than plus or minus 118 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening re- quirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 118 inch. P RT 3 - EXECUTION 3. INSTALLATION, GENERAL Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. Install cold-formed metal framing according to ASlM C 1007, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. o 047 - Norex, Inc. C. Apply sill-sealer gasket at all exterior walls. Gasket to be full width of sill member. D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to mannfacturer's written recommendations and requirements in this Section. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shear- ing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing mem- bers by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with A WS D 1.3 require- ments and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and in- stall according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined mem- bers by not less than three exposed screw threads. E. Install fraruing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure fraruing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. G. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. H. Install insulation in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. 1. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 118 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. Cold-Fonned Metal Framing 05400 - 3 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control testing. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to inspection and testing. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace Work that does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to deterruine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. . END OF SECTION 05400 . 02047 - Norex, Inc. Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05400 - 4 S CTION 05500 ETAL FABRICATIONS P RT 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Loose steel lintels, bearing and leveling plates, ruiscellaneous framing and sup- ports. 2. Handrails; Type 'A'; Steel Pipe 3. Pipe Bollards; Pier Set Bollards. 4. Trash Enclosure Gate Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 05120 - S1RUCTURAL STEEL for structural-steel fraruing system components. 2. Section 06105 - MISCELLEANOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY for trash enclo- sure wood slats. 3. Section 09900 - PAINTING for site painting of metals. 1. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For the following: Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. I. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sec- tions. 1. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Handrails and Railings: In general, engineer handrails, railings, anchors and connections to withstand structural loading indicated, to comply with requirements of ASTM 985, the Uniform Building Code (UBC) the State and Local Code, which ever is greater, but not less than the following: 1. Top Rail: Concentrated load of 250 lbf applied at any point and in any direction. 2. Railing Not Serving as Top Rail: Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied at any point and in any direction. 3. Infill Area of Guards: Concentrated load' of 200 lbf applied at any point and in any direction. 02 47 - Norex, Inc. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS Dl.l, "Structural Welding Code-- Steel." 2. A WS D 1.2, "Structural Welding Code- Aluminum. " 3. A WS D 1.3, .. Structural Welding Code-- Sheet Steel." 4. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed A WS qualification tests for weld- ing processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36. B. Steel Tubing: Product Type (manufacturing method) as follows: 1. Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500. 2. Hot-formed steel tubing complying with ASTMA501. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structuraJ loads. D. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchorsof type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load imposed within a safety factor of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. Metal Fabrications 05500 - 1 1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized fer- J. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, rous castings, either ASTM A 47 malle- class and style as needed. able iron or ASTM A 27 cast steel. Pro- K. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory- vide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153. packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with 2.3 PAINT ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply exterior applications. with Section 09900 - PAINTING. 2.5 CONCRETE FILL B. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Organic zinc- rich primer, complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply compatible with topcoat. with requirements in Section 03300 - CAST- C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic IN-PLACE CONCRETE for normal-weight, complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a containing no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied minimum 28-day compressive strength ofJOOO asphalt emulsion complying with psi, unless otherwise indicated. ASTM D 1187. 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL 2.4 FASTENERS A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to A. General: Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless- greatest extent possible to minimize field steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only fasteners with coating complying with as necessary for shipping and handling ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into limitations. Use connections that maintain exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark and class required. units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat Remove burrs. washers. C. Ease exposed edges to a radius of C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal comers to smallest D. Machine Screws: ASME B 18.6.3. radius possible without causing grain separation E. Lag Bolts: ASME BI8.2.1. or otherwise impairing work. F. Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, D. Weld comers and seams continuously to ASME BI8.6.1. comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize G. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, distortion and develop strength and corro- ASME BI8.22.1. sion resistance of base metals. H. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or over- lap. steel, ASME BI8.21.1. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. I. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed assembly of material indicated below with welds and surfaces smooth and blended so capability to sustain, without failure, a load no roughness shows after finishing and equal to six times the load imposed when contour of welded surface matches that of installed in unit masonry and equal to four adjacent surface. times the load imposed when installed in E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; concrete, as determined by testing per coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified and space anchoring devices to secure metal independent testing agency. fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Metal Fabrications 05500 - 2 " F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening up of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. 1. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. 1. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indi- cated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous 2 7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions ofinstaUed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone lB): SSPC- SP 6/NACE No.3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning. " 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone lA): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." B. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-P A 1, "Paint Application Specification No.1," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. o 047 - Norex, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTAllATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal fabrications to in- place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corro- sion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or over- lap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. 5. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that wiU come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. Metal Fabrications 05500 - 3 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting offield welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 Section ItPainting. II 3.3 SCHEDULE OF METAL FABRICATIONS A. The metal fabrications shall include, but not limited to the following list of metal fabrication items. Contractor shall veritY completeness. Supply items and accessories, as required to complete construction and installation. B. Loose Lintels and Miscellaneous Structural; Items: Fabricate of A36 steel, of size and shape indicated. Make necessary connections. Comply with requirements of AISC specifications. 1. Loose Lintels: Prime paint lintels. Fabri- cate to provide bearing length at each side of opening equal to one-twelfth of clear span, but not less than 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated. Shop prime paint. 2. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: Pro- vide for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to re- ceive anchor bolts and for grouting. Shop prime paint after drilling. 3. Miscellaneous Framing and Support: Provide members that are not part of structural-steel framework and as neces- sary to complete the Work. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, to sizes, shapes and profiles indicated and neces- sary to receive adjacent construction. Cut drill and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. e. Handrails: Fabricate railings, wall brackets and accessories with smootll bends and welded joints ground smooth and flush. 1. Type "A" - Steel Pipe Handrails: When noted as 1-112" Steel Pipe, provide 1-112" O.D., Schedule 40, steel pipe with 0.145" wall thickness. a. Provide pipe sleeves where noted or required for removable sections. b. Provide anchor plates at vertical hung handrails, where noted or detailed. c. Wall Brackets: As required, provide a one piece malleable iron bracket equal to Julius Blum & Co. # 1378, for round bottom, pipe, handrail. Provide at a maximum spacing of 60" O.e. d. Adjust railing prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at butting joints. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction. e. Finish: Shop prime paint, for field finish painting under Section 09900 - PAINTING. Provide galvanized ma- terial and shop priming only if indi- cated on drawings as galvanized. D. Pipe Bollards: Bollards of6" I.D., schedule 40, black pipe, exposed pipe sections, 4'-0" long, or as detailed, at grade line. Pipe length and setting method as indicated on drawings and herein specified. 1. Pier Set Bollards: Fabricate 7'-6" long, 6" I.D. black pipe, set in a cast concrete pier footing, providing not less than 6" uni- form concrete coverage. Fill pipe core with concrete, and form a round cap. a. Reference Section 03300 - CAST-IN- PLACE CONCRElE for setting of pipe and filling of pipe with concrete. b. Finish: Shop prime paint, for field finish painting under Section 09900 - PAINTING. Provide galvanized ma- terial and shop priming only if indi- cated on drawings as galvanized. E. Trash Enclosure Gate 1. Gate Assembly #1: Pipe bollard post with an angle iron gate frame as indicated on drawings and herein specified. Wood slats by Section 06105. a. Bollards of6" I.D. black pipe, ex- posed pipe section, 8'-0" long, or as detailed, at grade line. 4 feet of pipe will be set in a concrete pier footing as indicated on drawings. Fill pipe core with concrete, and form a round cap. b. Reference Section 03300 - CAST -IN- PLACE CONCRElE for setting of pipe and filling of pipe with concrete. c. Gate frame of2-l/2" x 2-112" x 3/16" thick angle iron with 2" x 2" x 3/16" thick angle iron cross bracing. Welded and ground smooth connec- tions. d. Secure gate frame to bollard by means of both fixed and rotating col- lars. e. Provide gate hardware: 02047 - Norex, Inc. Metal Fabrications 05500 - 4 . 1) Cane Bolt: 3/4" diameter steel rod, 24" long with a 4" bent han- dle. Provide mounting plate, a 1/4" thick steel plate 4" x 24". Guide sleeves and concrete strike. Option: Stanley CDl009-18" cane bolt. Provide mounting plate and concrete strike. 2) Latchset: Stanley CD1261 gate latch. f Wood slats per Section 06105 - MISCELLEANOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY g. Finish: Shop prime paint, for field finish painting under Section 09900 - PAINTING. Provide galvanized ma- terial and shop priming only if indi- cated on drawings as galvanized. . END OF SECTION 05500 . 02 47 - Norex, Inc. Metal Fabrications 05500 - 5 S CTION 06105 M SCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY P RT 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Wood blocking and nailers. 3 . Wood furring 4. Sheathing. 5. Plywood backing panels. 6. Trash enclosure gate wood fence slats. 7. Soffit vents. 8. Attic Draft doors and hardware. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 05400 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING for load-bearing steel stud wall construction. 2. Section 05500 - METAL F ABRICA TIONS for trash enclosure gate fraruing 3. Section 06176 - WOOD TRUSSES for prefabricated wood roof trusses. 4. Section 09253 - GYPSUM SHEA TIllNG for glass-mat gypsum exte- rior wall and soffit board. 5. Section 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES for non-load-bearing steel stud wall construction. 1. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. Sample: Submit one (1) sample of extruded aluminum soffit vent; l2-inches long. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. o 047 - Norex, Inc. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD-PRESERVATiVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatruent by Pressure Process: A WP A C2 (lumber) and A WP A C9 (plywood), except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to A WP A C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). 1. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or oth- erwise adversely affect finishes. B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curns, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roof- ing, flashing, vapor barriers, and water- proofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood fraruing members less than 18 inches above grade. 4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. Miscellaneous Carpentry 06105 - 1 2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT - TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant -treated materials are indicated, provide materials that comply with performance requirements in A WP A C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). IdentifY fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking ofUL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Use treatment that does not promote cor- rosion of metal fasteners. 2. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Use Interior Type A High Temperature (HT), unless otherwise indicated. B. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Cants. 3. Nailers. 4. Furring. 5. Grounds. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud, or NO.2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and the following species: 1. Spruce, Pine, Fir. (SPR), unless otherwise indicated. e. For exposed and/or concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and the following species and grades: 1. Spruce, Pine, Fir. (SPR), unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Sheathing: 1. Gypsum Board Wall Sheathing: Refer- ence Section 09253 - GYPSUM SHEATHING. 2. Roof Sheathing: Contractor's option to furnish one of the following: a. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing. 1) Span Rating: Not less than 24/0. 2) Thickness: Not less than \I,-inch. b. Oriented-Strand-Board Roof Sheath- ing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheath- ing. 1) Span Rating: Not less than 24/0. 2) Thickness: Not less than y,-inch. 3. Plywood Backing Panels: Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, CoD Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indi- cated or, if not indicated, not less than \1,- inch thick. 4. Miscellaneous Concealed Panels: Same as required for plywood sheathing, except fire-retardant treated, where indicated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than y,-inch thick. 5. Miscellaneous Exposed Plywood: DOC PS 1, A-D Interior, thickness as in- dicated but not less than 1/2 inch. 2.5 FENCING A. Exposed Cedar Baords: Western red cedar. A grade per NLGA or WWOA rules. B. All galvanzied fasteners. 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153 . B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. e. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME BI8.6.1. E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Miscellaneous Carpentry 06105-2 G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with AS1M A 307, Grade A; with AS1M A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per AS1M E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with AS1M B 633, Class FelZn 5. 2. METAL FRAMING ANCHORS General: Provide galvanized steel framing anchors of structural capacity, type, and size indicated and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with AS1M A 653, G60 coating designation. 2. GYPSUM SHEATHING Reference section 09253 - GYPSUM SHEATHING for glass-mat gypsum wall sheathing board. EXTRUDED ALUMINUM SOFFIT VENTS A linear, preformed, extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5, 0.050-inch thick. 1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint fin- ish. Color to match soffit color, reference Section 07241 - EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEM. Acceptable Manufacturer and Product: 1. Gordon Inc.: "Final Forms 11- R-Reveal Trim. Drywall model RD-5840. 4-inch wide with factory slotting to provide 9.9 square inches of open venting per lineral foot, that will accept 5/8-inch thick soffit board. 2. 0 ATTIC DRAFT DOORS & HARDWARE A. Framing: Rough frame door opening to size indicated and to fit within the the truss webbing, standard 2 by lumber. Use lumber to provide stops for door. o 047 - Norex, Inc. B. Door: Cut to door opening from Miscellaneous exposed plywood, DOC PS 1, A-D interior, !h- inch thick. Plane, ease and sand all edges. C. Hardware: Provide each draft door with the following: 1. Spring Hinges: Stanley #158. Minimum 2 for a maximum 6'-0" or less, high door. 3 hinges for 6-1" to TO" door. 2. Pull: Stanley #1257. 3. Door Spring: Stanley #c.o 170 1. 4. Gasket: Pemko S88W smoke gasket. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of carpentry and that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and oope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring,]nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. C. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative- treated lumber and plywood. D. Securely attach carpentry work as indicated and according to applicable codes and recognized standards. E. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler. F. Use fasteners ofappropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary to avoid splitting wood. 3.2 WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Miscellaneous Carpentry 06105-3 3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTAllATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. B. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1- by-2-inch nominal- size furring vertically at 16 inches o.c. 3.4 PANEL PRODUCT INSTALLATION A. Wood Structural Panels: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in AP A Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. 3.5 SOFFIT VENTS INSTALLATION A. Coordinate with soffit board installer to provide continuous uninterrupted soffit vent strips. All butt joints are to be neat with tight joint and all conmers are to be mitered. Secure to framing at l2-inches on center. 3,6 ATTIC DRAFT DOORS A. Fabricate and install draft doors to operate smooth and without binding. Doors shall be self closing. . END OF SECTION 06105 . 02047 - Norex, Inc. Miscellaneous Carpentry 06105 - 4 S CTION 06176 OOD TRUSSES 8/99 1. SUMMARY A. This Section includes wood roof trusses and truss accessories. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY for roof sheathing and sub- flooring and dimension lumber for sup- plementary framing and permanent brac- ing. 1. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate- connected wood trusses capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Design Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2. Maximum Deflection Under Design Loads: As indicated on Structural Draw- ings. 1. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For metal-plate connectors, metal framing anchors, bolts, and fasteners. Shop Drawings: Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss required; species, sizes, and stress grades of lumber; splice details; type, size, material, finish, design values, orientation, and location of metal connector plates; and bearing details. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsi- ble for their preparation. 1. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that involves inspection by SPIB, Timber Products Inspection, TPI, or other independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. o 047 - Norex, Inc. B. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following publications: 1. TP 1 1, "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Con- struction. " 2. TPI DSB, "Recommended Design Speci- fication for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses. " 3. TPI HIE, "Commentary and Recommen- dations for Handling, Installing & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." C. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AFP A's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with TPI recommendations to avoid damage and lateral bending. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard and replace trusses that are damaged or defective. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Trusses shall be prefabricated by an approved wood truss fabricator complete with all items necessary to construct and install wood trusses of the configurations shown and in quantities as required. 2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive natural or stained finish, omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compli- ance issued by grading agency. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, manufac- tured to actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content speci- fied. 4. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. Wood Trusses SECTION 06176 - 1 B. Grade and Species: Provide dimension lumber of any species for truss chord and web members, graded visually or mechanically, and capable of supporting required loads without exceeding allowable design values according to AFP A's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement." 2.3 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES A. General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1 from metal complying with requirements indicated below: B. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/ A 653M, G60 coating designation; Designation SS, Grade 33, and not less than 0.036 inch thick. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Anic1e for material and manufacture. 1. Where trusses are exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153 . B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. e. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME BI8.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASMEBI8.2.1. F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as deterruined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 2.5 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. General: Provide framing anchors made from metal indicated, of structural capacity, type, and size indicated, and as follows: 1. Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which model code re- search/evaluation reports exist that show compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated, with building code in effect for Project. 2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide prod- ucts with allowable design loads, as pub- lished by manufacturer, that meet or ex- ceed those indicated. Manufacturer's pub- lished values shall be deterruined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehen- sive testing performed by a qualified in- dependent testing agency. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation. C. Truss Tie-Downs: Bent strap tie for fastening roof trusses to wall studs below, 1-1/2 inches wide by 0.050 inch thick. See Structural draiwngs. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close-fitting joints. B. Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations, thicknesses, and anchorage details required to withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated. C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated. 1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufac- turing tolerances in TPI 1. D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Wood Trusses SECTION 06176 - 2 Before installing, splice trusses delivered to Project site in more than one piece. e. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out -of-plane bending or other causes. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated. Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction. Space trusses 24 inches o.c.; adjust and align trusses in location before permanently fastening. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal framing anchors. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing anchor according to manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terruinating at walls or beams. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1. Do not cut or remove truss members. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements. 1. Do not alter trusses in field. . END OF SECTION 06176 . 02 47 - Norex, Inc. Wood Trusses SECTION 06176 - 3 S CTION 06402 I TERIOR ARCHITECTURAL OODWORK 1. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Wood cabinets. 3. Plastic-laminate cabinets. 4. Plastic-laminate countertops. 5. Shelving and clothes rods. 6. Interior frames and jambs. 7. Shop finishing interior woodwork. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY for wood furring, block- ing, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork in- stallation. 2. Section 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS. 1. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Cabinets; including hardware and acces- sories 2. Countertops; high-pressure laminate; solid-surfacing; including core material and adhesive. 3. Stop finishing material and process. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fix1ures, faucets, and other items installed in architectural woodwork. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, tex1ures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated. o 047 - Norex, Inc I. Shop-applied transparent finishes. 2. Plastic laminates. 3. Thermoset decorative overlays. D. Samples for Verification: For the following: 1. Lumber for Transparent Finish: Samples of selected lumber without finish (natural) applied. Two (2) samples, not less than 4 by 24-inch, finish milled on one side and edge, to show and highiite typical range of color and grain to be expected in the fin- ish work. If samples(s) do not show any 'marking' that maybe objectionable to Architect, it will be assumed that sample will be a consistent representative veneer to be furnished. 2. Factory Finish: Samples of selected ve- neerllumber with factory fiuish applied. Sample size as indicated above for re- quired unfinished samples. a. Include specification of finish mate- rial and process. 3. Laminate-Clad Panel Products: a. Plastic-Laminate-Clad Panel Prod- ucts: Two (2) samples, not less than 8 by lO-inch, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with sepa- rate samples of unfaced panel product used for core. b. Thermoset Decorative-Qverlay Panel Products: One (I) sample, not less than 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 4. Full size samples: One (I) each of the cabinetry units. Sample will be retained by Architect until substantial completion of project, unless otherwise arranged. a. One (1) base cabinet to show con- struction. Include specified hard- ware. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with A WI's" Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. C. Mockups: Not applicable. Interior Architectural Woodwork 06402 - 1 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.l, Grade M-2 A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HV AC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that suppon woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations offraming, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the A WI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: White maple, plain sliced. e. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Hardboard: AHA Al3 5.4. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD 4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1; Medium Density Overlay, where indicated. 5. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVAHP-1. D. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208. I, Grade M-2, or medium-density fiberboard complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, with surface of thermally fused, melaruine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-I. E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Laminate selections have been made and approved by the Owner based upon prod- ucts shown on drawings' MATERIAL SCHEDULE and FINISH SCHEDULE. a. Laminate drawing designations: PLAM-x. F. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: As recommended by fabricator, for conditions. 2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by referencing BHMA numbers or items referenced to this standard. B. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch, 5-knuckle steel hinges made from O.095-inch- thick metal, and as " follows: 1. Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA AI56.9, B01521. C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, 5 inches long, 2-1/2 inches deep, and 5/16 inches in diameter. D. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03I4l . E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: Fabricator's option, furnish one of the following: 1. BHMA AI56.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B0408 I 2. BHMA A156.9, B04I02; with shelf brackets, B04112. 3. BHMA AI56.9, B040l3: shelf rests. 02047 - Norex, Inc Interior Architectural Woodwork 06402 - 2 F. Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, full-eJ\.tension, 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL zinc-plated steel drawer slides with steel ball bearings, BHMA AI56.9, B05091, and rated A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide Custom for the following loads: grade interior woodwork complying with the 1. Box Drawer Slides: 75 lbf. referenced quality standard. 2. File Drawer Slides: 150 lbf B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with 3. Pencil Drawer Slides: 45 lbf. requirements of referenced quality standard for 4. Keyboard Slide: 75 lbf. wood moisture content in relation to ambient 5. Trash Bin Slides: 100 lbf relative humidity during fabrication and in G. Door Locks: BHMA AI56.11, E07121. installation areas. H. Drawer Locks: BHMA AI56.11, E07041. e. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to 1. Grommets for Cable Passage through remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. Countertops: As indicated, size,black color, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, caps with slot for wire passage. and details indicated. Ease edges. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with re- E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, quirements, provide "0G series'l by Doug finishing, and hardware application, to Mockett and Co., Inc. maximum extent possible, before shipment to J. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed Project site. Disassemble components only as hardware, provide finish that complies with necessary for shipment and installation. Where BHMA A156.l8 for BHMA finish number necessary for fitting at site, provide ample indicated. allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for F. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel possible, to receive hardware, appliances, base. plumbing fiJ\.tures, electrical work, and similar 2. For concealed hardware, provide manu- items. Locate openings accurately and use facturer's standard finish that complies templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce with product class requirements in accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand BHMA AI56.9. edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in COUDtertops 23 INSTALLATION MATERIALS with a coat of varnish. A. Coordinate required furring, and blocking with Section 06105 - MISCELLEANOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY. B. Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. Where indicated or required, provide fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-<lip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. o 047 - Norex, Inc G. Material Surface Exposure for Cabinets: Cabinet surfaces as described in A WI Seciton 400 and herein modified: I. Exposed Surfaces - Surfaces visible when: a. Drawer fronts and edges when closed. b. Door fronts, edges, and inside faces. c. Bottoms of cabinets that are seen 42- inches or more above finished floor. d. Tops of cabinets that are seen 78- inches above finished floor, or visible from upper floors. e. Portions of cabinets visible when fixed appliances are installed. f. Cabinet fronts and exposed sides. g. Exposed shelves not concealed be- hind solid, non-glazed doors. 2. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: a. Drawer backs. b. Drawer body. Interior Architectural Woodwork 06402 - 3 c. Bottoms of cabinets that are seem be- tween 30-inches and up to 42-inches above finish floor. d. Cabinet interior when concealed be- hind solid, non-glazed doors. e. Cabinet shelves concealed behind solid, non-glazed doors. 3. Concealed Surfaces: a. Surfaces not visible after installation. Cabinet backs and sides when not ex- posed to view. b. Bottoms of cabinets less than 30- inches above finish floor. c. Tops of cabinets that are over 78- inches above finished floor and are not visible from an upper level. 2.5 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with A WI Section 300. B. Grade: Custom C. For trim I rail items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width. D. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. E. Wood Species and Cut: White maple, plain sliced. 2.6 WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with A WI Section 400 requirements for wood cabinets. B. Grade: Custom C. A WI Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal overlay on face frame D. Wood Species and Cut for Exposed Surfaces: White maple, plain sliced. 1. Grain Matching: Run and match grain vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels 2. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match. E. Reference Article F ABRICA TION, GENERAL for describtion of material surface exposure requirements. F. Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Match species and cut indicated for ex- posed surfaces. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber, same species indicated for ex- posed surfaces. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood 2.7 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Comply with A WI Section 400 requirements for laminate cabinets. B. Grade: Custom C. A WI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay D. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: HGS (0.048-inch) 2. Postformed Surfaces: HGP (0.039-inch). 3. Vertical Surfaces: Not less than VGS (0.028-inch). 4. Edges: HGS (O.048-inch) E. Reference Article FABRICATION, GENERAL for describtion of material surface exposure requirements. F. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Not less than High-pressure decorative lami- nate, Grade CLS 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber or Thermoset decorative overlay. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood or Thermoset decorative overlay. G. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Reference Article - MATERIAL - High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Types. 2.8 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Comply with A WI Section 400 requirements for high- pressure decorative laminate countertops. B. Grade: Custom e. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: 1. Flat Surfaces and Edges: HGS (0.048- inch) 2. Postformed Surfaces: HGP (0.039-inch). 02047 - Norex, Inc Interior Architectural Woodwork 06402 - 4 Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Reference Article - MATERIAL - High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Types. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal Core Material: Fabricator's option, furnish one of the following: 1. Particleboard or medium-density fiber- board 2. Particleboard 3. Medium-density fiberboard 4. Particleboard made with eJo.1erior glue 5. Medium-density fiberboard made with ex- terior glue 6. Exterior-grade plywood Core Material at Sinks: Fabricator's option, furnish one of the following: 1. Particleboard made with eJo.1erior glue, 2. Medium-density fiberboard made with ex- terior glue 3. Exterior-grade plywood. Solid-Surf acing-Material Thickness: 1/2 inch SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS Closet Rod and Support: 1. Rod: l-I/4-inch diameter hardwood; Sanded; Unfinished. 2. Rod End Cap Flanges: KV (Knape & Vogt) #764 and 766 heavy duty. 3. Rod and Shelf Intermediate Support: KV #1194. Provide at all rod and shelf instal- lations of spans 48-inches or more. 4. Wood Shelf Cleats: ';' by 3-1I2-inch pine boards S4S Finish or 1 Common for opaque finish indicated. 5. Screws: Manufacturer's recommended standard. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Core material, of particle board, ANSI A208. I, Grade M-2, or Medium-density fiberboard ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, with surface thermally fused, melaruine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-I. Solid-wood front edge (and exposed return edges). e. Finish: Stained. 2. 0 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with A WI Section 900. o 047 - Norex, Inc B. Grade: Custom C. For frames or jambs wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width. D. Wood Species and Cut: White maple, plain sliced. 2.11 SHOP FINISHING A. Quality Standard: Comply with A WI Section 1500, unless otherwise indicated. B. General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. C. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end- grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laruinate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with plastic laruinate, backing paper, or ther- moset decorative overlay. D. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, and sheen, with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523: E. Grade: Custom 1. A WI Finish System TR-6: Catalyzed polyurethane. 2. Staining: Match Architect's sample. 3. Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Af- ter staining (if any), apply paste wood filler to open-grain woods and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood. 4. Sheen: match Architect's sample. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. Interior Architectural Woodwork 06402 - 5 B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with A WI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine fiuishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, usingfuil- length pieces (from maximum length oflumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base, if finished. 2. Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall fram- ing. 3. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches. F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other varia- tion from a straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. with appropriate device for conditions. G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through comer blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Align adjacent solid-surf acing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommenda- tions using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other varia- tion from a straight line. 3. Secure backsplashes to tops with con- cealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls with adhesive. 4. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Section 07920 - JOINT SEALANT. H. Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before insta1lation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats were applied in shop. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. e. Clean woodwork on eX'Jlosed and semi exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. . END OF SECTION 06402. 02047 - Norex, lnc Interior Architectural Woodwork 06402 - 6 ECTION 07210 UllDING INSULATION ART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Thermal batt insulation 2. Sound batt insulation 3. Foundation wall, below grade, rigid insu- lation (supporting backfill) 4. Insulation under slabs-on-grade. 5. Loose-fill building insulation, including eave ventilation troughs and insulation dams. 6. Loose vapor retarders. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES for requirements of insula- tion installed in cavity walls and masonry cells. 2. Section 07241 - EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEM for insulation specified and installed as part of the insulation & finish system. 3. Section 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES for requirements of insula- tion installed in metal-framed assemblies of insulation specified by reference to this Section. 4. Division 15 - MECHANICAL for duct insulation, equipment insulation and pipe insulation. 12 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire- test-response characteristics indicated, as deterruined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. IdentIfy materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. o 047 - Norex, Inc. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and ina dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to ex- tent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BLANKET/BATT INSULATION A. INSUL-lO (Un-Faced): ASTM C 665, Type I, and ASTM E 136. 1. Thickness: Full stud cavity; as indicated on drawings. 2. Location: All stud cavity locations requir- ing thermal-insulation; Miscellaneous pe- rimeter wall locations; As indicated on drawings. 3. Acceptable Manufacturer/Product. a. CertainTeed Corporation b. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corpora- tion. c. Johns Mansville (Schuller) B. INSUL-ll: Not used. C. INSUL-12a Foil-Faced: ASTM C 665, Type III, Class A (Flame spread of 25 or less) 1. Thickness: As indicated on drawings. 2. Location: Stud cavity locations requiring thermal-insulation; Soffit spaces; As in- dicated on drawings. 3. Acceptable Manufacturer/Product. a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corpora- tion. "Flame Spread 25 Insulation with FRK-Facing" b. Johns Mansville (Schuller) "Thermal- Shield FSK-25" D. INSUL-13 through INSUL-18: Not Used. E. INSUL-19 Sound Attenuation: ASTM C 665, Type I, and ASTM E136, unfaced. . 1. Thickness: As indicated on drawmgs. Building Insulation 07210 - 1 2. Location: Interior stud cavity locations requiring acoustical treatment; Ceilings cavities; As indicated on drawings. 3. Acceptable Manufacturer/Product. a. CertainTeed Corporation "Cer- taSound" and "CertaSound Ceiling Batts" b. Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corpora- tion. "Sonobans" c. Johns Mansville (Schuller) "Sound- Shield" and "Grid-Shield" 3.1 RIGID EXTRUDED FOAM BOARD INSULATION A. INSUL-20a: Rigid EJ..truded Foam Insulation: ASTM C578, Type IV, with minimum density of 1.60 lb/cu. Ft; comporessive strength 25 psi, per ASTM 1621; Maximum moisture adsorption rate of 0.3% by volume per ASTM C272-91. Aged R-Value of 5.4 and 5.0 minimum at 40 degrees and 75 degrees F. respectively per ASTM C 518-91. 1. Thickness: As indicated on drawings. 2. Location: Beneath interior slab-on-grade. 3. Acceptable Manufacturer/Product: a. Dow "Styrofoam" b. DiversiFoam Products "CertiFoam 25SE" B. INSUL-21a, Rigid Extruded Foam Insulation: ASTM C578, Type IV, with minimum density of 1.60 lb/cu. ft; Compressive strength 25 psi per ASTM 1621-73; maximum moisture adsorption rate of 0.3% by volume per ASTM C272-91. AgedR-Valueof5.4and5.0 minimum at 40 degrees and 75 degrees F respectively per ASTM C518-91. 1. Thickness: 2" unless otherwise indicated. 2. Location: Foundation wall applications. 3. Acceptable Manufacturer/Product: a. Dow II Styrofoam n b. DiversiFoam Products "CertiFoam 25SE" C. INSUL-22, through INSUL-39: Not used. 3.2 LOOSE FILL INSULATION A. INSUL-40, through INSUL-42: Not used. B. INSUL-43: Attic-Space Blown Insulation - Glass-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 764 for (method of application) Type 1 (pneumatic - blown), or Type 2 (Poured). Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 5, 1. Thickness: Unless otherwise shown on drawings, provide not less than an R- Value ofJO. 2. Location: Attic Space. 3. Acceptable Products: a. Owens Coming. b. Approved substitute 2.2 LOOSE VAPOR RETARDERS A. VB-I - Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum penneance rating of 0.13 perm. B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 2,3 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. B. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves. C. Loose Fill Insulation Truss Space Darns: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between rooffraruing members and to provide an end dam at the truss bearing and exterior wall to prevent blown-in insulation from spilling into the overhang space. D. Insulation Fasteners: Products recommended by manufactuer for conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances hannfuI to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Building Insulation 07210.2 Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice and snow. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3. INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND NDER-SLAB INSULATION On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. 1. If not indicated, ex 'lend insulation a mini- mum of 24 inches below exterior grade line. Protect top surface of horizontal insulation from damage during concrete work by applying protection board. 3. INSTALLATION OF GENERAL UILDING INSULATION Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping. 02 47 - Norex, Inc. 1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insula- tion to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. D. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place blankets in cavities formed by fram- ing members to produce a friction fit be- tween edges of insulation and adjoining fraruing members. 3. For metal-framed wall cavities where cav- ity heights exceed 96 inches, support un- faced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs. E. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation anchors as follows: 1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete sub- strates with insulation anchor adhesive according to anchor manufacturer's writ- ten instructions. Space anchors according to insulation manufacturer's written in- structions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated. 2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between concrete substrate and insulation. 3. After adhesive has dried, install board in- sulation by pressing insulation into posi- tion over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation be- low indicated thickness. 4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to tips of spindles. F. Place loose-fill insulation into spaces and onto surfaces as shown, either by pouring or by machine blowing to comply with ASTM C 1015. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to uniform density, but do not compact excessively. 1. Verify installation of loose vapor retarder to the under side of roof trusses before application of ceiling gypsum board or loose-fill insulation. Building Insulation 07210 - 3 2. Install Eave Ventilation Troughs, and In- sulation Darn at every truss space, unless otherwise indicated, to provide cross ven- tilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves; and to prevent blown-in in- sualtion from spilling into overhand space. G. Stuff glass-fiber, loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 Ib/cu. fl.. 3,5 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c. e. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations with vapor- retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. D. Finnly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer. E. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. F. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. . END OF SECTION 07210 . 02047 - Norex, Inc. Building Insulation 07210 - 4 S CTION 07241 E TERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH S STEMS - CLASS PB P RT 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) applied over the following sub- strates: a. Gypsum sheathing. 2. Exterior finish system (EFS) over gypsum soffit board. . 3. Joint sealant systems. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS for sealing joints in EIFS with elastomeric joint sealants 2. Section 09253 - GYPSUM SHEATHING for gypsum sheathing over metal framing. 1. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type and component of EIFS indicated. Shop Drawings: For EIFS. Include plans, elevations, sections, details of components, details of penetration and terruination, flashing details, joint locations and configurations, fastening and anchorage details including mechanical fasteners, and connections and attachments to other work. Samples for Verification: 24-inch- square panels for each type of finish-coat color and texture indicated, prepared using same tools and techniques intended for actual work including any aesthetic reveal, and a typical control joint filled with sealant of color selected. 1. Include sealants. Samples to verifY color selected. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: For joint sealants from sealant manufacturer indicating the following: 1. Materials forruing joint substrates and joint -sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation oftest results and written recommendations for primers and sub- strate preparation needed for adhesion. o 047 - Norex, Inc. E. Maintenance Data: For EIFS to include in maintenance manuals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An installer who is certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's system using trained workers. B. Fire- Test-Response Characteristics: Provide EIFS and system components with the following fire-test-response characteristics as deterruined by testing identical EIFS and system components per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Radiant Heat Exposure: No ignition of EIFS when tested according to NFPA 268. C. Mockups: Not applicable. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages with manufacturers' labels intact and clearly identifying products. B. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, construction traffic, and other causes. 1. Stack insulation board flat and off the ground. 2. Protect plastic insulation against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insuiat- ing materials to Project site before instal- lation time. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for a minimum of 24 hours before, during, and after adhesives or coatings are applied. Do not apply EIFS adhesives or coatings during rainfall. Proceed with installation ouiy when existing and forecasted weather conditions and ambient outdoor air and substrate temperatures perruit EIFS to be applied, dried, and cured according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems - Class PB 07241 - 1 1.6 COORDINATION E. Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Coordinate installation of EIFS with related Insulation: Comply with EIFS manufacturer's A. requirements, ASTM C 578 for Type I, and Work specified in other Sections to ensure that EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for wall assemblies, including sheathingflashing, Expanded Polystyrene (BPS) Insulation Board" trim, joint sealants, windows, and doors, are for more stringent requirements for material protected against damage from the effects of performance and qualities of insulation, weather, age, corrosion, moisture, and other including dimensions and permissible causes. Do not allow water to penetrate behind variations, and the following: flashing PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. Aging: Before cutting and shipping, age insulation in block form by air drying for 2.1 MANUFACTURERS not less than six weeks or by another A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to method approved by EIMA that produces equivalent results. compliance with requirements, manufacturers 2. Flame-Spread and Smoke-Developed In- offering products that may be incorporated into dexes: 25 and 450 or less, respectively, the Work include, but are not limited to, the per ASTM E 84. following: 1. Class PB EIFS: F. Reiuforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, a. Dryvit Systems, Inc. open-weave glass-fiber mesh treated for b. Parex, Inc. compatibility with other EIFS materials, made c. Senergy Inc.; SKW-MBT Construc- from continuous multiend strands with retained tion Chemicals. mesh tensile strength of not less than 120 lbflin. d. Sto Corp. per EIMA 105.01, complying with e. TEC Inc.; An H. B. Fuller Company. ASTM D 578 and the following requirements f. Approved substitution for minimum weight: 1. Standard-Impact Reiuforcing Mesh: Not 2.2 MATERIALS less than 4.0 Oz./sq. yd. 2. Intermediate-Impact Reiuforcing Mesh: A. Compatibility: Provide substrates, water- Not less than 12.0 oz.lsq. yd.. weather-resistive barriers, adhesive, fasteners, 3. High-Impact Reiuforcing Mesh: Not less board insulation, reiuforcing meshes, base- and than 15 Oz./sq. yd. finish-coat systems, sealants, and accessories 4. Heavy-Duty Reiuforcing Mesh: Not less that are compatible with one another and than 20 Oz./sq. yd. approved for use by EIFS manufacturer for 5. Strip Reiuforcing Mesh: Not less than Project. 3.75 oz.lsq. yd.. B. Colors, Textures, and Patterns of Finish Coat: 6. Detail Reiuforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 Oz./sq. yd. 1. EIFS.l: To be selected. 7. Corner Reiuforcing Mesh: Not less than 2. EFS-l: To be selected. 7.2 oz.lsq. yd. e. Exterior Sheathing Board: Furnished and G. Base-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's installed under Section 09253 - GYPSUM standard mixture. SHEATHING Primer/Sealer: EIFS manufacturer's standard H. Primer: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory- D. mixed elastomeric-polymer primer for substrate conditioner designed to seal substrates preparing base-coat surface for application of from moisture penetration and to improve the finish coat. bond between substrate of type indicated and adhesive used for application of insulation. I. Finish-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard acrylic-based coating complying with the following requirements for material composition and method of combining materials: 1. Factory-mixed formulation of polymer- emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pig- ments, sound stone particles, and fillers. 1. Water: Potable. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems - Class PB 07241 - 2 2. ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Products: Provide EIFS manufacturer's listed and recommended chemically curing, elastomeric sealant that is compatible with joint fillers, joint substrates, and other related materials, and complies with requirements for products and testing indicated in EIMA's "EIMA Guide for Use of Sealants with Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems, Class PB" and with requirements indicated below: 1. Sealant type SLNT-15, Per Section 07920 - JOINT SEALANT. A Low-modulus, nonacid-curing silicone sealant. 2. Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Joint Sealant Backing: Comply with the requirements of Section 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS 2. MIXING General: Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as recommended by EIFS manufacturer. Mix materials in clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by EIFS manufacturer or discard. 3. . P RT 3 - EXECUTION 3. EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance ofEIFS. 3, PREPARATION Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling caused by application ofEIFS. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish coats on other work. Prepare and clean substrates to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written requirements to obtain optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation. o 047 - Norex, Inc. C. Primer/Sealer: Apply over gypsum sheathing substrates to protect substrates from degradation and where required by EIFS manufacturer for improving adhesion of insulation to substrate. D. Waterproof AdhesiveIBase Coat: Apply over substrates to protect substrates from degradation. 3.3 EIFS INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation ofEIFS as applicable to each type of substrate indicated. B. Board Insu1ation: Adhesively attach insulation to substrate in compliance with ASTM C 1397, EIFS manufacturer's written requirements, and the following: 1. Apply adhesive to insulation by notched- trowel method in a manner that results in coating the entire surface of gypsum sheathing, or other substrate material, with adhesive once insulation is adhered to sheathing unless EIFS manufacturer's written instructions specify using primer/sealer with ribbon-and-dab method. Apply adhesive to a thickness of not less than 1/4 inch for factory mixed and not less than 3/8 inch for field mixed, measured from surface of insulation be- fore placement. 2. Press and slide insulation into place. Ap- ply pressure over the entire surface of in- sulation to accomplish uniform contact, high initial grab, and overall level surface. 3. Allow adhered insulation to remain undis- turbed for period recommended by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 24 hours, beforebeginning rasping and sanding insu- lation, or applying base coat and reinforc- ing mesh. 4. Apply insulation overdry substrates in courses with long edges of boards ori- ented horizontally. 5. Begin first course of insulation from a level base line and work upward. 6. Begin first course of insulation from screed/track and work upward. Work from perimeter casing beads toward inte- rior of panels if possible. Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems - Class PB 07241 - 3 7. Stagger vertical joints of insulation boards in successive courses to produce running bond pattern. Locate joints so no piece of insulation is less than 12 inches wide or 6 inches high. Offset joints not less than 6 inches from comers of window and door openings and not less than 4 inches from aesthetic reveals. a. Adhesive Attachment: Offset joints of insulation not less than 6 inches from horizontal and 4 inches from vertical joints in sheathing. 8. Interlock ends at internal and external comers. 9. Abut insulation tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush, continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between boards. If gaps greater than 1/16 inch occur, fill with in- sulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert insu- lation without using adhesive or other ma- terial. 10. Cut insulation to fit openings, comers, and projections precisely and to produce edges and shapes complying with details indi- cated. n. Rasp or sand flush entire surface ofinsu- lation to remove irregularities projecting more than 1/32 inch from surface of insu- lation and to remove yellowed areas due to sun exposure: do not create depressions deeper than 1/ 16 inch. 12. Cut aesthetic reveals in outside face of in- sulation with high-speed router and bit configured to produce grooves, rabbets, and other features that comply with pro- files and locations indicated. Do not re- duce insulation thickness at aesthetic re- veals to less than 3/4 inch. 13. Install foam shapes attached to supporting substrate where indicated. 14. Interrupt insulation for expansion joints where indicated. 15. Forrnjoints for sealant application by leaving gaps between adjoining insulation edges and between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps wide enough to produce joint widths indi- cated after encapsulating joint substrates with base coat and reinforcing mesh. 16. Treat exposed edges of insulation as fol- lows: a. Except for edges forming substrates of sealant joints, encapsulate with base coat, reinforcing mesh, and fin- ish coat. b. Encapsulate edges forruing substrates of sealant joints within ElFS or be- tween ElFS and other work with base coat and reinforcing mesh. e. Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by ElFS manufacturer, and as follows: 1. Where expansion joints are indicated in substrates behind ElFS. 2. Where ElFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction. 3. At floor lines in multilevel wood-framed construction. 4. Where wall height changes. D. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation in minimum thickness recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 1/16-inch dry-coat thickness. E. Reinforcing Mesh: Embed type indicated below in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free installation with mesh continuous at comers and overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches or otherwise treated at joints to comply with AS1M C 13 97 and ElFS manufacturer's written requirements. Do not lap reinforcing mesh within 8 inches of comers. Completely embed mesh, applying additional base-coat material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are not visible. 1. Standard-impact reinforcing mesh, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Intermediate-impact reinforcing mesh where double-layer reinforcing mesh is required. 3. High-impact reinforcing mesh in all con- ditions where EFIS application is within 8 foot of people traffic. F. Double-Layer Reinforcing Mesh Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat and second layer of intermediate-impact reinforcing mesh, overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches or otherwise treated at joints to comply with AS1M C 1397 andElFS manufacturer's written requirements in same manner as first application. Do not apply until first base coat has cured. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems - Class PB 07241 - 4 Additional Reinforcing Mesh: Apply strip reinforcing mesh around openings extending 4 inches beyond perimeter. Apply additional 9- by-12-inch strip reinforcing mesh diagonally at corners of openings (re-entrant corners). Apply 8-inch-wide strip reinforcing mesh at both inside and outside corners unless base layer of mesh is lapped not less than 4 inches on each side of corners. 1. At aesthetic reveals, apply strip reinforc- ing mesh not less than 8 inches wide. 2. Embed strip reinforcing mesh in base coat before applying first layer of reinforcing mesh. Shapes: Fully embed reinforcing mesh in base coat. Double Base-Coat Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat in same manner and thickness as first application except without reinforcing mesh. Do not apply until first base coat has cured. Primer: Apply over dry base coat according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Finish Coat: Apply over dry primer, if required by manufacturer, or base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture variations. Sealer Coat: Apply over dry finish coat, in number of coats and thickness required by EIFS manufacturer. 3. APPLICATION OF "EFS" SOFFIT YSTEM OVER GYPSUM SHEATHING OARD Embed reinforcing fabric of type indicated blow in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free installation with fabric continuous or lapped at corners and lapped or otherwise treated at joints to comply with system manufactuerer's requirements. Completely embed fabric, applying additional base coat material, if necessary, so that reinforcing fabric pattern is not biible. 1. Standard-impact reinforcing mesh. 2. High-impact reinforcing mesh in all con- ditions where EFIS application is within 8 foot of people traffic 3. Additional reinforcing mesh around open- ings, corners of openings and inside and outside corners. 02 47 - Norex, Inc. B. Apply finish coat over dry base coat in thickness required by system manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of texture and color matching approved sample. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, to comply with applicable requirements in 7 Section 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS and in EIMA's "EIMA Guide for Use of Sealants with Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems, Class PB." 1. Clean surfaces to receive sealants to com- ply with indicated requirements and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Apply primer recommended in writing by sealant manufacturer for surfaces to be sealed. 3. Install sealant backing to control depth and configuration of sealant joint and to prevent sealant from adhering to back of joint. 4. Apply masking tape to protect areas adja- cent to sealant joints. Remove tape im- mediately after tooling joints, without dis- turbing joint seal. 5. Apply joint sealants after base coat has cured but before applying finish coat. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials from window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive EIFS coatings. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer and EIFS manufacturer, that ensure that EIFS are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. . END OF SECTION 07242. Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems - Class PB 07241-5 1,3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ECTION 07311 SPHAL T SHINGLES 11/00 A. Source Limitations: Obtain ridge and hip cap shingles, ridge vents, felt underlayment and self-adhering sheet underlayment through one source from a single asphalt shingle manufacturer. ART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 SUMMARY B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide asphalt shingle and related roofing materials A. This Section includes the following: with the fire-test-response characteristics 1. Asphalt shingles. indicated, as determined by testing identical 2. Felt underlayment. products per test method below by UL or 3. Self-adhering sheet underlayment. another testing and inspecting agency 4. Vents: acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. Ridge vents. Identify materials with appropriate markings of b. Sloped-surface roof vents. applicable testing and inspecting agency. 5. Sheet metal flashing and trim, including: 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A ; a. Open valley flashing. ASTM E 108 or UL 790, for application b. Step and straight flashing. and roof slopes indicated. c. Drip edge. d. Vent pipe flashing. e. Mockups: Not required. B. Related Sections include the following: 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1. Section 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY for roof deck wood struc- A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation tura1 panels. only when existing and forecasted weather 2. Section 07610 - SHEET METAL conditions permit asphalt shingle roofing to be FLASHING & TRIM for prefinished performed according to manufacturer's written formed fascia covers. . instructions and warranty requirements. 1. Install self-adhering sheet underlayment 12 SUBMITTALS within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by manufac- A. Product Data: For each type of product turer. indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of 1.5 WARRANTY asphalt shingle, indicated. A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard e. Samples for Verification: For the following form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or products, of sizes indicated, to verify color replace asphalt shingles that fail in materials or selected. workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Asphalt Shingle: Full-size asphalt shingle Materials failures include manufacturing strip. defects and failure of asphalt shingles to self- 2. Ridge Vent: One section 12-inch- long. seal after a reasonable time. 3. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: 1. Material Warranty Period: 40 years from a. Open Valley Flashing: One section date of Substantial Completion. 12 inches long, full width. b. Step Flashing: Two sections. c. Straight Flashing: One section 12- 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS inches long. d. Drip Edge: One section l2-inches A. Not required. long. 4. Self-Adhering Underlayment: 12 inches square. D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. o 047 - Norex, Inc. Asphalt Shingles 07311-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS / PRODUCTS A. Specified Product: Laminated glass-fiber- reinforced self-sealing asphalt shingles: I. Base Bid: "Grand Sequoia" by GAF Building Materials Corporation 2. Alternate Deduct to Base Bid: "Timerline Ultra" by GAF Building Materials Corpo- ration. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering similar asphalt shingles that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Celotex Corporation. 2. CertainTeed Corporation. 3. GAF Materials Corporation; "Specified Product" . 4. Owens Corning. 5. Approved substitute. 2.2 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES (LAMINATED) A. "Timerline Ultra" by GAF Building Materials Corporation. 1. Conform with ASTM D 3462 for a lami- nated, multi-ply overlay construction, glass-fiber reinforced, mineral-granule- surfaced, and self-sealing shingle. 2. Class A rating from UL 3. Passes UL 997 Wind test and provides a SO mph wind warranty. 4. Color and Blends: As selected by Archi- tect from manufacturer's full range. 5. Warranty: 40 year. 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Felts: ASlM D 226, Type I, asphalt-saturated organic felts, nonperforated. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Faced: ASlM D 1970, miuimum of 40-mil-thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene- film-reinforced top surface laminated to SBS- modified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied 1. Products: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Div. of Carlisle Companies Inc.; "Dri-Start A". b. Grace, W. R & Co.; "Grace Ice and Water Shield". c. Henry Company; Perrna-Seal PE. d. Johns Manville International, Inc.; "Roof Defender". e. NEl Advanced Composite Technol- ogy; "AC Poly Ice and StormSeal". f. Owens Coming; "WeatherLock M". g. Polyguard Products, Inc.; "Polygnard Deck Guard". h. Approved substitute. 2.4 ROOF VENTS A. Rigid Ridge Vent: Manufacturer's standard rigid section high-density polypropylene or other UV -stabilized plastic ridge vent with nonwoven geotextile filter strips and with external deflector baffles; for use under ridge shingles. 1. Products: a. Air Vent Inc., a CertainTeed Com- pany; "ShingleVent II". b. Cor-A-Vent, Inc.; "V-Series". c. GAF Materials Corporation; "Cobra Rigid Vent II", Specified Item. d. Globe Building Materials, Inc.; "SmartAir Ridge Vent". e. Lomanco, Inc.; "OR-4". f. Mid-America Building Products; "RidgeMaster Plus". g. Obdyke, Benjamin Incorporated; "Xtractor Vent XIS". h. Owens Coming; "VentSure Ridge Vent". i. Ridglass Manufacturing Company, Inc.; "Coolvent". j. Solar Group, Inc. (The), a Gibraltar Company; "PRV4". k. Trimline Building Products; "Trim- line Ridge Vent". 1. Approved substitute. 2. Minimum Net Free Area: 16.9 square inches. B. Sloped-surfaceRoof Vents: ABS plastic, U. V. protected, and with bird and insect screen. Color to coordinate with shingles. 1. Product: a. Lomanco Inc. "Model S65". b. Approved substitute. 2. Minimum Net Free Area: 61 square inches. 3. Size (overall): 16-I/2-inch x 19-3/S-inch x 1O-II4-inch. (attic opening: S-II2- inches x 10-I/4-inches) 02047 - Norex, Inc. Asphalt Shingles 07311 -2 . 2. ACCESSORIES Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free. Roofing Nails: AS1M F 1667; aluminum, stainless-steel, copper, or hot-dip galvanized steel wire shingle nails, minimum 0.120-inch- diameter, barbed or smooth shank, sharp- pointed, with a minimum 3/8-inch-diameterflat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch into solid wood decking or extend at least 1/8 inch through OSB or plywood sheathing. 1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as flashing. Felt Underlayment Nails: Aluminum, stainless- steel, or hot-dip galvanized steel wire with low profile capped heads or disc caps, I-inch minimum diameter. 2. METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Prefinished Sheet Metal: 1. Typical: Galvanized carbon steel sheets, 24, gauge, factory primed and finished: a. Copper Sales, Inc.; "Una-Clad". b. Peterson Aluminum Corp.; "Pac- Clad". c. Vincent Metals, Inc.; "ColorKlad". 2. Finish: Factory applied "Kyner 500" resin-based fluoropolymer paint system. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 4. Provide color matched fastners where fas- teners are exposed to view. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item. 1. Apron or "Straight-Line" Flashings: Fab- ricate with lower flange a minimum of 5 inches over and 4 inches beyond each side of down slope asphalt shingles and 6 inches up the vertical surface. 2. Step or "shingle" Flashings: Fabricate with a headlap of 2 inches and a minimum extension of 5 inches over the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface. 3. Open Valley Flashings: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet with l-inch- high inverted- V profile at center of valley and equal flange widths of a minimum 10 inches . o 047 - Norex, Inc. 4. Drip Edges: Fabricate in lengths of8 or 10 feet with 2-inch roof deck flange and l-l/2-inch fascia flange with 3/8-inch drip at lower edge. e. Vent Pipe Flashings: AS1M B 749, Type L51121, at least 1/16 inch thick. Provide lead sleeve sized to slip over and turn down into pipe, soldered to skirt at slope of roof and extending at least 4 inches from pipe onto roof. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Single-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install single layer offelt underlayment on roof deck perpendicular to roof slope in parallel courses. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches. Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Fasten with felt underlayment roofing nails. 1. Install felt underlayment on roof deck not covered by self-adhering sheet underlay- ment. Lap sides offelt over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches in direction to shed water. Lap ends of felt not less than 6 inches over self- adhering sheet underlayment. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install at locations indicated on Drawings and listed below, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches. Lap ends not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underiayment within seven days. 1. Eaves: Extend from edges of eaves, a minimum of 24 inches, beyond interior face of exterior wall. 2. Rakes: Extend from edges of rake, a minimum of 24 inches, beyond interior face of elo.1erior wall. 3. Valleys: Extend from lowest to highest point, a minimum of 18 inches, on each side. 4. Hips: Extend 18 inches on each side. 5. Ridges: Extend 36 inches on each side without obstructing continuous ridge vent slot. 6. Sidewalls: Extend beyond sidewall 18 inches and return vertically against side- wall not less than 4 inches. Asphalt Shingles 07311 - 3 7. Dormers, Chimneys, Skylights, and other G. Pipe Flashings: Form flashing around pipe Roof-Penetrating Elements: Extend be- penetrations and asphalt shingles. Fasten and yond penetrating element 18 inches and seal to asphalt shingles as recommended by return vertically against penetrating ele- manufacturer. ment not less than 4 inches. 8. Roof Slope Transitions: Extend 18 inches 3.3 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION on each roof slope. Install asphalt shingles according to A. e. Metal-Flashed Open Valley Underlaymenl: manufacturer's written instructions, Install two layers of 36-inch- wide felt recommendations in ARMA's "Residential underlayment centered in valley. Stagger end Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt shingle laps between layers at least 72 inches. Lap ends recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA of each layer at least 12 inches in direction to Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." shed water, and seal with asphalt roofing cement. Fasten each layer to roof deck with felt B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, underlayment roofing nails. consisting of an asphalt shingle strip with tabs 1. Lap roof deck felt underlayment over first removed with self-sealing strip face up at roof layer of valley felt underlayment at least 6 edge. inches. 1. Extend asphalt shingles 1/2 inch over fas- cia at eaves and rakes. 3.2 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION 2. Install starter strip along rake edge. A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt metal to comply with requirements in Section shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof 07610 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND deck with [ manufacturer's recommended offset TRIM. pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining 1. Install metal flashings according to rec- uniform exposure. ommendations in ARM.A's "Residential D. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt Asphalt Roofing Manual" and asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof shingle recommendations in NRCA's deck with manufacturer's recommended offset "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining Manual. " uniform exposure. B. Apron "Straight-Line" Flashings: Extend lower E. Install asphalt shingles by single-strip column flange over and beyond each side of downslope or racking method, maintaining uniform asphalt shingles and up the vertical surface. exposure. Install full length first course e. Step Flashings: Install with a headlap of 2 followed by cut second course, repeating inches and extend over the underlying asphalt alternating pattern in succeeding courses. shingle and up the vertical surface. Fasten to F. Fasten asphalt shingle strips with a minimum of roof deck only. roofing nails located according to D. Open Valley Flashings: Install centrally in manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Where roof slope exceeds 20: 12, seal as- valleys, lapping ends at least 8 inches in phalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement direction to shed water. Fasten upper end of spots after fastening with additional roof- each length to roof deck beneath overlap. 1. Adhere 9-inch-wide strip of self-adhering ing nails. sheet to metal flanges and to self-adhering 2. Where roof slope is less than 4: 12, seal sheet underlayment. asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing ce- ment spots. E. Rake Drip Edges: Install rake drip edge G. Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents flashings over underlayment and fasten to roof over asphalt shingles according to deck. manufacturer's written instructions. Fasten with F. Eave Drip Edges: Install eave drip edge roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate flashings below underlayment and fasten to roof sheathing. sheathing. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Asphalt Shingles 07311 - 4 Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. 1. Fasten ridge cap asphalt shingles to cover ridge vent without obstructing airflow. . END OF SECTION 07311. o 047 - Norex, Inc. Asphalt Shingles 07311 - 5 CTION 07620 EET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM RT 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following sheet metal flashing and trim: 1. Formed wall flashing and trim. 2. Formed fascia covers. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES for fabric wall flashing. 2. Section 07920 - JOINT SEALANT for field-applied sheet metal flashing and trim sealants. 1, PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to building interior. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. 1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Mockups: Not applicable. o 047 - Norex, Inc 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoiuing construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS I SHEET METAL MATERIAL A. Mannfacturers of Prefinished commercial quality galvanized steel: 1. Copper Sales, Inc.; "Una-clad". 2. Petersen Aluminum Corporation; "Pac- Clad". 3. Vincent Metals; "Color Klad". 4. Approved substitute. B. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation; structural quality.; Pre-painted. 1. Gauge: Not less than 0.028-inch (24 gauge) thick, unless otherwise indicated for individual fabricated items. 2. Finish: High-performance Organic Fin- ish; A Fluoropolymer 2-Coat System. Mannfacturer's standard 2-coat, ther- mocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoro- polymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2605.2 . a. Color: To be selected from manufac- turer's standard colors. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. 2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex washer head. Sheetmetal Flashing and Trim 07620 - 1 3. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets. 4. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width. C. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape. D. Sealants: Reference Section 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS: 1. Exposed Sealant; SLNT -15: Low- Modulus Nonacid-Curing Silicone Sealant Type S; Grade NS )nOn-sag); Class 25. a. Products: 1) Dow Coming; "790". 2) GE Silicones; "Silpruf'. 3) GE Silicones; "U1traPruf SCS2300". 4) Percora Corporation; "864". 5) Percora Corporation; "890". 6) Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc; "Omniseal" 7) Tremco; "Spectrem 1". 8) Approved Substitute. 2. Concealed Sealant; SLNT -29: Interrnme- diate, single component, solvent-release, butyl rubber sealant for general use. ASTM C 1311. MeetsFS TT-S-OOI657, Type!. a. Products: 1) Bostik Inc.; "Bostik 300". 2) Pecora Corporation; "BC-158". 3) Sonneborn Building Proudcts Div., ChemRex, Inc.; "Sonne- born Multi-Purpose Sealant". 4) Tremco; "Tremco Butyl Seal- ant", 5) Approved Substitute. 3. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied as- phalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive com- pound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur com- ponents, and other deleterious impurities. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool IDa1ks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmov- ing seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. 2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabri- cate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat -lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations. E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. F. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated. G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. H. Thickness: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 02047 - Norex, Inc Sheetmetal Flashing and Trim 07620 - 2 --------- , .4 WAll SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 12 foot long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall openings. Form with 2-inch- high end darns. Fabricate from the following material: 1. Fabricate from Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (24 gauge) thick. ART 3 - EXECUTION .1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verifY actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. VerifY that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsat- isfactory conditions have been corrected. .2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimi1ar metals. C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams and elastomeric sealant, for exposed joints. E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. VerifY shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 2047 - Norex, Inc F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of comer or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with [ butyl sealant concealed within joints. G. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-114 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. 1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, em- bed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Formjoints to completely conceal sealant. When am- bient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), set joint members for 50 per- cent movement either way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install seal- ant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C). 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to com- ply with requirements in Section 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS. 3.3 WAll FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall -opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation offabric through-wall flashing is specified in Section 04810 -UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES. 3.4 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with sealant to equipment support member. Sheetmetal Flashing and Trim 07620 - 3 3,5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. B. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. . END OF SECTION 07620 . 02047 - Norex, Inc Sheetmetal Flashing and Trim 07620 - 4 ECTION 07840 IRESTOPPING SYSTEM RT 1 - GENERAL 1 1 SUMMARY A. Only tested firestop systems shall be used in specific locations as follows: 1. Penetrations for the passage of duct, ca- ble, cable tray, conduit, piping, electrical busways and raceways through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions), horizontal barriers (floor/ceiling assem- blies), and vertical service shaft walls and partitions. 2. Openings between structurally separate sections of wall or floors. 3. Gaps between the top of walls and ceil- ings or roof assemblies. 4. Expansion joints in walls and floors. 5. Openings and penetrations in fire-rated partitions or walls containing fire doors. 6. Openings around structural members which penetrate floors or walls. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 07901 - JOINT SEALANT for non-fire-resistive caulk systems. 2. Division 15 - MECHANICAL SPECIFYING for duct and piping pene- trations. 3. Division 16 - ELECTRICAL for specifying cable and conduit penetrations 1 2 DEFINITIONS A. Firestopping: Material or combination of materials used to retain integrity of fire-rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, water and hot gases through penetrations in fire rated wall and floor assemblies. 13 REFERENCES A. Test Requirements: ASTM E-814, "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops" (July 1983). B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of North brook, II. runs ASTM E-814 under their designation of UL 1479 and publishes the results in their "FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY" that is updated annually with a midyear supplement. o 047 - Norex, Inc. 1. UL Fire Resistance Directory: a. Through-Penetration Firestop De- vices (XHCR) b. Fire Resistance Ratings (BXUV) c. Through-Penetration Firestop Sys- tems (XHEZ) d. Fill, Voids, or Cavity Material (XHHW) e. Forming Materials (XHKU) C. Test Requirements: UL 2079, "Tests for Resistance of Building Joint Systems" (November 1994). D. International Firestop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering Judgments E. ASTM E-84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. F. All major building codes: ICBO, SBCCI, BOCA, and IBC. G. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code H. NFP A 70 - National Electric Code 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. A manufacturer's direct representative (not distributor or agent) to be on-site during initial installation of firestop systems to train appropriate contractor personnel in proper selection and installation procedures. This will be done per manufacturer's written recommendations published in their literature and drawing details. B. Firestop System installation must meet requirements of ASTM E-814, UL 1479 or UL 2079 tested assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of construction being penetrated. C. Proposed firestop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes having local jurisdiction. D. Firestop Systems do not reestablish the structural integrity of load bearing partitions/assemblies, or support live loads and traffic. Installer shall consult the structural engineer prior to penetrating any load bearing assembly. firestoppin9 Systems 07840 - 1 E. For those firestop applications that exist for which no UL tested system is available through a manufacturer, a manufacturer's engineering judgment derived from similar UL system designs or other tests will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation. Engineer judgment drawings must follow requirements set forth by the International Firestop Council (September 7, 1994). 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data for each material including the composition and limitations, documentation of UL firestop systems to be used and manufacturer's installation instructions . B. Manufacturer's engineering judgment identification number and drawing details when no UL system is available for an application. Engineer judgment must include both project name and contractor's name who will install firestop system as described in drawing. e. Submit material safety data sheets provided with product delivered to job-site. 1.6 INSTALLERS QUALIFICATIONS A. Engage an experienced Installer who is certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacture's products per specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its firestopping products to the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor does DOt in itself confer qualification on the buyer. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer's clearly labeled, unopened containers, identified with brand, type, and UL label where applicable. B. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow minimum storage time at job-site. C. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with manufacturer's requirements. D. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in material safety data sheets as applicable. E. Do not use damaged or expired materials. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents. B. Schedule installation offirestopping after completion of penetrating item installation but prior to covering or concealing of openings. e. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. D. Weather conditions: Do not proceed with installation of firestop materials when temperatures exceed the manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation printed on product label and product data sheet. 1. During installation, provide masking and drop cloths to prevent firestopping mate- rials from contaminating any adjacent sur- faces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forruing openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill material. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for the designated fire- resistance-rated systems. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with through penetration firestop systems (XHEZ) and joint systems (XHBN) listed in Volume II of the UL Fire Resistance Directory, provide products of the following manufacturers as identified below: 1. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, Oklahoma; 800-879- 8000 2. Tremco Sealants & Coatings, Beechwood, Ohio; (216) 292-5000 02047 - Norex, Inc. firestopping Systems 07840 - 2 3. 3M Fire Protection Products, St. Paul, 1. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Seal- Minnesota; (612) 736-0203 ant 4. Other manufacturers listed in the U.L. 2. 3M Fire Barrier CP25 WB Fire Resistance Directory - Volume 2 3. Tremco Tremstop WBM Intumescent 23 MATERIALS Firestop Sealant 4. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire A. Use only firestop products that have been UL Resistance Directory - Volume 2 1479, ASTM E-814, or UL 2079 tested for F. Intumescent sealants, caulking or putty specific fire-rated construction conditions materials for use with flexible cable or cable conforruing to construction assembly type, bundles, the following products are acceptable: penetrating item type, annular space 1. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Seal- requirements, and fire-rating involved for each ant separate instance. 2. Hilti CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick B. Sealants or caulking materials for use with non- 3. 3M Fire Barrier CP25 WB 4. Tremco Tremstop WBM Intumescent combustible items including steel pipe, copper Firestop Sealant pipe, rigid steel conduit and electrical metallic 5. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire tubing (EMT), the following products are Resistance Directory - Volume 2 acceptable: 1. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Seal- G. Non curing, re-penetrable intumescent sealants, ant caulking or putty materials for use with flexible 2. 3M Fire Stop Sealant 2000 cable or cable bundles, the following products 3. 3M Fire Barrier CP25 WB are acceptable: 4. Tremco Tremstop Fyre-Sil Sealant 1. Hilti CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick 5. Equivalent products listed in the D.L. Fire 2. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory - Volume 2 Resistance Directory - Volume 2 C. Sealants or caulking materials for use with sheet H. Wall opening protective materials for use with metal ducts, the following products are U.L. listed metallic and specified nonmetallic acceptable: outlet boxes, the following products are 1. Hilti CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Seal- acceptable: ant 1. Hilti CP 617 Firestop Putty Pad 2. Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant 2. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire 3. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Seal- Resistance Directory - Volume 1 ant I. Firestop collar or wrap devices attached to 4. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire assembly around combustible plastic pipe Resistance Directory - Volume 2 (closed and open piping systems), the fOllowing D. Sealants, caulking or spray materials for use products are acceptable: with fire-rated construction joints and other 1. Hilti CP 642 Firestop Collar gaps, the following products are acceptable: 2. Hilti CP 643 Firestop Collar 1. Hilti CP 672 Firestop Spray 3. 3M Fire Barrier PPD Plastic Pipe Device 2. Hilti CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Seal- 4. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire ant Resistance Directory - Volume 2 3. Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant J. Cast-in place firestop devices for use with non- 4. 3M Firestop Sealant 2000 combustible and combustible plastic pipe 5. Tremco Tremstop Fyre-Sil Sealant (closed and open piping systems) penetrating 6. Equivalent products listed in the D.L. Fire concrete floors, the following products are Resistance Directory - Volume 2 acceptable: E. Intumescent sealants or caulking materials for 1. Hilti CP 680 Cast-In Place Firestop De- use with combustible items (penetrants vice consumed by high heat and flame) including 2. Equivalent products listed in the D.L. Fire insulated metal pipe, PVC jacketed, flexible Resistance Directory - Volume 2 cable or cable bundles and plastic pipe, the following products are acceptable: o 047 - Norex, Inc. firestoppinQ Systems 07840 - 3 K. Materials used for large size/complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS 635 Trowelable Firestop Com- pound 2. Hilti FS 657 FIRE BLOCK 3. 3M Firestop Foam 2001 4. 3M Fire Barrier CS-195 Composite Sheet 5. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory - Volume 2 L. Non curing, re-penetrable materials used for large size/complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS 657 FIRE BLOCK 2. Equivalent products listed in the D.L. Fire Resistance Directory - Volume 2 M. Sealants or caulking materials used for openings between structurally separate sections of wall and floors, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 672 Firestop Spray 2. Hilti CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Seal- ant 3. Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant 4. 3M Fire Barrier CP 25 WB 5. Equivalent products listed in the D.L. Fire Resistance Directory - Volume 2 N. Provide a firestop system with a "F" Rating as deterruined by UL 1479 or AS1ME8l4 which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated. O. Provide a firestop system with an Assembly Rating as determined by UL 2079 which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. 1. Verify penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for application of materials. 2. Surfaces to which firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, rust, laitance, release agents, water repel- lents, and any other substances that may effect proper adhesion. 3. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent surfaces by firestopping materials. 4. Comply with manufacturer's recommen- dations for temperature and humidity conditions before, during and after instal- lation of firestopping. 5. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory condi- tions have been corrected. 3.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate location and proper selection of cast-in-place Firestop Devices with trade responsible for the work. Ensure device is installed before placement of concrete. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Regulatory Requirements: Install firestop materials in accordance with UL Fire Resistance Directory. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of through-penetration and construction joint materials. 1. Seal all holes or voids made by penetra- tions to ensure an air and water resistant seal. 2. Consult with mechanical engineer, project manager, and damper manufacturer prior to installation of UL firestop systems that might hamper the performance of fire dampers as it pertains to duct work. 3. Protect materials from damage on sur- faces subjected to traffic. C. Cast-In Place Option: For new construction requiring poured concrete, a cast-in place firestop device may be used. The cast.in place firestop device shall consist of an injected plastic body containing an insert of intumescent material. An elastic sealing membrane shall allow for flexiblity in passing different pipe materials and diameters through the device and shall provide a water and smoke seal. The device shall be ready-to-use with no additional caulk required. 02047 - Norex, Inc. firestopping Systems 07840 - 4 3. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Exaruine sealed penetration areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing areas. B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities. e. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or penetrating of existing firestop systems already inStalled by other trades. 3 5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition. 1. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed holes and joints to be free of excess firestop ma- terials and soiling as work progresses. . END OF SECTION 07840. 2047 - Norex, Inc. firestoppin9 Systems 07840 - 5 ECTION 07920 J INT SEALANTS 1 1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section: 1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal sur- faces: a. Joints between architectural precast concrete units. b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. c. Joints in exterior stucco and finish systems. d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows. e. Other joints as indicated. 2. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic sur- faces: a. Control and expansion joints on ex- posed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, . d. Joints between plumbing fi"tures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. e. Other joints as indicated. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 02751 - CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING for sealing joints in pavements, walkways, and curbing. 2. Section 03451 - PLANT-PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE ELEMENTS for sealant at exposed joints of precast. 3. Section 04200 - UNIT MASONRY for masonry control and e"-pansion joint fillers and gaskets. 4. Section07620- SHEETMETAL FLASHING AND TRIM for requirements at flashing members. 2047 -Norex, Inc. 5. Section 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS for requirements of structural and decorative secondary sealant 6. Section 08740 - FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM for fire-resistant building joint- sealant systems. 7. Section 08800 - GLAZING for re- quirements of glazing sealants. 8. Section 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO) for sealant at stucco system. 9. Section 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to re- duce sound transmission. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deterioratingjoint substrates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. D. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and sub- strate preparation needed for adhesion. E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. Joint Sealants 07920 . 1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, installer who has specialized in installing joint and other related materials that are compatible sealants similar in material, design, and extent with one another and with joint substrates under to those indicated for this Project and whose conditions of service and application, as work has resulted in joint-sealant installations demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on with a record of successful in-service testing and field experience. performance. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected B. Mocirups: Reference related Sections for by Architect from manufacturer's full range for requirements of mock-ups. this characteristic. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with with installation of joint sealants under the ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated following conditions: for each liquid-applied chemically curing 1. When ambient and substrate temperature sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant conditions are outside limits permitted by Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those joint sealant manufacturer. referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for 2. When joint substrates are wet. type, grade, class, and uses. B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where installation of joint sealants where joint widths elastomeric sealants are specified in the are less than those allowed by joint sealant Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule to be manufacturer for applications indicated. nonstaining to porous substrates, provide e. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous with installation of joint sealants until joint substrates indicated for Project. contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates. C. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that 1.6 WARRANTY will come in repeated contact with food, General Warranty: Special warranties specified provide products that comply with A. 21 CFR 177.2600. in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions 2.4 SOLVENT-RELEASE JOINT SEALANTS of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other A. Acrylic-Based Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant warranties made by Contractor under Standard: Comply with ASTM C 1311 for each requirements of the Contract Documents. product of this description indicated in the B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Reference Solvent -Release Joint -Sealant Schedule at the specific specification sections for required end of Part 3. 'systems' warranty. B. Butyl-Rubber-Based Solvent-Release Joint- 1. Section 08410 - ALUMINUM Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 1085 ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS for each product of this description indicated in the Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant Schedule at PART 2 - PRODUCTS the end of Part 3. 2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with ASTM C 834 for each product of this requirements, products that may be description indicated in the Latex Joint-Sealant incorporated into the Work include, but are not Schedule at the end of Part 3. limited to, the products specified in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3. 02047 -Norex, Inc. Joint Sealants 07920 - 2 2. ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS Acoustical Sealant for E"posed and Concealed Joints: For each product of this description indicated in the Acoustical Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, provide manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASlM C 834 and the following: 1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construc- tion as demonstrated by testing represen- tative assemblies according to ASlME 90. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: For each product of this description indicated in the Acoustical Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, provide manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission. 2. JOINT -SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manUfacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASlM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1. Type C: Closed-cell material with a sur- face skin. 2. Type 0: Open-cell material. (Except at horizontal surfaces) 3. Type: Any material indicated above. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. o 047 -Norex, Inc. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-seaIant- substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint -sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhe- sion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufac- turer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, wa- terproofing, water repellents, water, sur- face dirt, and frost. Joint Sealants 07920 - 3 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, me- chanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Po- rous joint surfaces include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint seal- ants. a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint- sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint -sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of AS1M C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant applica- tion and replace them with dry materials. E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints. F. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that al- low optimum sealant movement capabil- ity. G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces ad- jacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent sur- faces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in AS1M C 1193, unless oth- erwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint configuration, per Fig- ure 5B in AS1M C 1193, where indicated. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration, per Figure 5C in AS1M C 1193, of recess depth and at locations indicated. 02047 -Norex, Inc. Joint Sealants 07920 - 4 a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints. 3. CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by D. methods and with cleaning materials approved E. in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. 36 SEALANT SCHEDULE F. A. SLNT-I0: Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Type M (multicomponent); Grade NS (non-sag): Class 1. Products: a. Bostik Inc; "Chern. -Calk 500" b. Sonneborn Building Products Div., "Sonolastic NP-2" c. Tremco~ "Dymeric" d. Approved Substitute 2. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic) 3. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as indicated O. 4. Applications: E"'lerior and interior (unless specifically indicated) surfaces of: a. Masonry; b. Aluminum; Steel; c. Other locations indicated or required B. SLNT-U, through SLNT-16: Not used. C. SLNT-17: Medium-Modulus Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant. Type S (single component) and NS (non-sage); Class 25. G. 1. Products: a. 791; Dow Coming H. b. 795; Dow Coming c. Spectrem 2, Tremco d. Tremsil 600; Tremco. 2. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraflic) 3. Use Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and 0 o 047 -Norex, Inc. 4. Applications: Exterior and interior. a. Secondary (decorative) glazing seal b. Aluminum; Steel c. Composite panel d. Other locations indicated or required. SLNT-18, through SLNT-22: Not used. SLNT-23: One Component, Nonsag, Acrylic Latex Sealant: ASTM C-834 1. Product: a. Bostik Inc.; "Chern-Calk 600" b. AC-20; Pecora Corporation.; "AC- 20" c. Sika Corporation; "Sikaflex - 420" d. Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc.; "Sonolac". e. Tremco; "Acrylic Latex Tremflex 834" 2. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraflic) 3. Use Related to joint Substrates: 0 4. Applications: Interior, low movement, dry joints in surfaces requiring painting. a. Gypsum board; Woodwork (paint grade); metal frames. b. Other locations indicated or required. SLNT-24: One Component, Nonsag, Mildew- Resistant Silicone Sealant: Type S (single component); Grade NS (non-sag); Class 25. 1. Products: a. Dow Coming; "786 Mildew Resis- tant" b. GE Silicone; "Sanitary 1700" c. Pecora Corporation; "898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant" d. Tremco; "Tremsil600 White". 2. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraf- fie). 3. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as indicated, O. 4. Applications: Products formulated with fungicide that are intended for sealing in- terior joints of non-porous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes. a. Glass; Ceramics; Shower; Counter- tops; Sinks and Plumbing fixtures. b. Other locations indicated or required. SLNT-25 through SLNT-28: Not used. SLNT -29: Intermmediate Butyl Rubber Sealant for general use. Meets FS IT -S-OO 1657, Type 1. 1. Products: a. Bostik Inc.; "Bostik 300" b. Pecora Corporation; "BC-158". Joint Sealants 07920 - 5 c. Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc.; "Sonneborn Multi- Purpose Sealant". d. Tremco; "Tremco Butyl Sealant". 2. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraflic) 3. Use Related to Joint Substrates: a. Applications: Exterior, non-exposed (concealed), low movement, joints. b. Door threshold setting bed. c. Metal flashing to metal flashing. d. Secondary seals in glazing where a seal is required against neoprene or EPDM gaskets. I. SLNT-30: Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: 1. Product a. Pecora Corporation; "AC-20 FTR" b. USG Corp.; United States Gypsum Co.; "SHEETROCK Acoustical Seal- ant", 2. Use Related to E"'posure: NT (nontraflic) 3. Use Related to Joint Substrates: 4. Applications: Interior surfaces of gypsum board. 1. SLNT -31: Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: 1. Products: a. Pecora Corporation; "BA-98". b. Tremco; "Tremco Acoustical Seal- ant", 2. Use Related to E"'Posure: NT (nontraflic) 3. Uses Related to joint Substrates: 4. Applications: Interior surfaces of gypsum board. . END OF SECTION 07901 . 02047 -Norex, Inc. Joint Sealants 07920 - 6 ECTION 08110 TEEL DOORS AND FRAMES ART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel doors: Flush, hollow or composite construction, for interior and exterior lo- cations. Non-fire-rated and fire-rated as- semblies. 2. Steel frames: Pressed steel frames for doors, sidelights, mullions, interior glazed panels at interior and exterior openings. Non-fire-rated and fire-rated assemblies, of the following type: a. Welded unit types 3. Finish: Factory primed doors and frames for field painting B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES for installing anchors and grouting frames in masonry construction. 2. Section 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS for wood doors installed in steel frames. 3. Section 08710 -DOOR HARDWARE for door hardware and weather stripping. 4. Section 08800 - GLAZING for glass in glazed openings in doors and frames. 5. Section 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES for spot -grouting frames installed in steel-framed gypsum board partitions. 6. Section 09900 - PAINTING for field painting factory-primed doors and frames. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation, type, level and model, material description, core description, construction details, label compliance, sound and fire-resistance ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Elevations of each door desigu. 2. Details of doors including vertical and horizontal edge details. 3. Frame details for each frame type includ- ing dimensioned profiles. 4. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 2047 - Norex, Inc. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, accessories, joints, and connections. 7. Coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. C. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing schedule for doors and frames. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFP A 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFP A 252. 1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pres- sure. 2. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assem- blies, provide certification by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that doors comply with stan- dard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies ex- cept for size. 3. Temperature-Rise Rating: Where indi- cated, provide doors that have a tempera- ture-rise rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C) maximum in 30 minutes offire exposure. C. Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFP A 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames. Steel Doors and Frames 08110-1 B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage is found. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 114-inch spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Doors and Frames: a. Amweld Building Products, Inc. b. Ceco Door Products; a United Do- minion Company. c. Curries Company. C. d. Pioneer Industries Inc. e. Republic Builders Products. f. Stee1craft; a division of Ingersoll- Rand. g. Approved Substitute. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: (Concealed Surfaces) ASTM A 569, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: (E"'Psoed Surfaces) ASTM A 366, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an A40 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. 2.3 DOORS A. General: Provide doors of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated. 02047 - Norex, Inc. B. Interior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level: 1. Material: Cold-rolled sheet steel face construction; hot-rolled sheet steel accept- able for interior - concealed surfaces. 2. SDI Level, Model Desiguation and Manu- facturers Standard, Uncoated Gauge. a. Level 2, 18 gauge, uncoated - 0.042" thick metal facing, and Physical Per- formance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush) . 3. Core Construction Material: a. Core Type C-l: Sound deadening core material of honeycomb resin- impregnated kraft paper with maxi- mum I" cells and minimum 42 psi crushing strength, or approved substi- tute. b. Core Type C-2: Fire Rated Core as required to provide fire protection and temperature rise rating indicated. Door to bear Underwriter's Label (UL), or approved agency, for re- quired fire rating. 4. Finish: a. Factory-Primed for Field Painted Fin- ish: Mannfacturer's or fabricator's standard, as specified below. Exterior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level: 1. Material: Cold rolled, sheet steel face and concealed construction, with metallic coating for exterior or humid conditions. 2. SDI Level, Model Designation and Manu- facturers Standard, Uncoated Gauge. a. Level 3, 16 gauge, uncoated - 0.053" thick metal facing, and Physical Per- formance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless). 3. Core Construction Material: a. Core Type C- 3: Insulated core of polystyrene, 0.9/cu ft density, or greater, with not less than 18 psi shear strength, rigid, foam board, complying with ASTM C 578, Type I. 4. Finish: a. Factory-Primed for Field Painted Fin- ish: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, as specified below. Steel Doors and Frames 08110-2 D. Vision Lite Systems: Mannfacturer's standard 2.5 FABRICATION kits consisting of glass lite moldings to accommodate glass thickness and size of vision A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to lite indicated. comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects including 24 FRAMES warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in mannfacturer's plant. Clearly A. General: Provide steel frames for doors, identify work that cannot be permanently transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other factory assembled before shipment, to assure openings that comply with ANSI A250.8 and proper assembly at Project site. with details indicated for type and profile. B. Exterior Door Construction: For exterior Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated locations and elsewhere as indicated, fabricate B. Welded Interior Frames: doors, panels, and frames from metallic-coated 1. Material: Cold rolled, sheet steel con- steel sheet. Close top and bottom edges of struction. doors flush as an integral part of door 2. Gauge: construction or by addition ofO.053-inch-thick, a. 18 gauge - 0.042" uncoated thick- metallic-coated steel channels with channel ness. webs placed even with top and bottom edges. 3. Finish: 1. Core Construction: As indicated. a Factory-Priming for Field Painted C. Interior Door and Panel Faces: Fabricate Finish: Manufacturer's or fabrica- tor's standard, as specified below. exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from the C. Welded Exterior Frames: following material: 1. Material: Cold rolled, sheet steel con- 1. Cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise struction, with metallic coating for exte- indicated. rior or humid conditions. 2. Metallic-coated steel sheet, for humid ar- 2. Gauge: eas as indicated. a. 16 gauge - 0.053" uncoated thick- 3. Core Construction: As indicated. ness. D. Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not 3. Finish: a. Factory-Priming for Field Painted more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, except Finish: Manufacturer's or fabrica- not more than 1/4 inch between pairs of doors. tor's standard, as specified below. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom. D. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped E. Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: As required frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers byNFPA80. on strike jambs of single-door frames and two F. Single-Acting, and Double-Acting Door-Edge silencers on heads of double-door frames. Profile Beveled edge, unless square edge is E. Plaster Guards: Provide 0.0 16-inch-thick, steel indicated. sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close off G. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, interior of openings; place at back of hardware "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel cutouts where mortar or other materials might Doors and Frames." obstruct hardware operation. H. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, F. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not edge channels, louvers, and moldings from less than 0.042-inch-thick, electrolytic zinc- either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. coated or metallic-coated steel sheet. I. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, 1. Wall Anchors in Masonry Construction: O.I77-inch-diameter, steel wire complying provide countersunk flat or oval heads for with ASTM A 510 may be used in place exposed screws and bolts. of steel sheet. J. Therntal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At G. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's e"'lerior locations and elsewhere as shown or standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to scheduled, provide doors fabricated as thermal- be built into exterior walls, comply with insulating door and frame assemblies and tested ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable. according to ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies. 2047 - Norex, Inc. Steel Doors and Frames 08110-3 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide ther- mal-rated assemblies with U-value of 0.292 (R-3.80) or better. K. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI AII5 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. 1. For concealed overhead door closers, pro- vide space, cutouts, reinforcement, and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head offrames, as applicable. L. Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown. 1. Welded Frames: Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and seamless face joints 2. Provide welded frames with temporary spreader bars. M. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface- applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site. N. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8. O. Glazing Stops: Manufacturer's standard, formed from 0.032-inch-thick steel sheet. 1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of inte- rior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 2. Provide screw-applied, removable, glaz- ing stops on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. P. Astragals: As required by NFP A 80 to provide fire ratings indicated. 2.6 FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory- applied coat of rust-inhibiting primer complying with ANSI A250.1O for acceptance criteria. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, mannfacturer's data, and as specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. Except for frames located in existing walls or partitions, place frames before construction of enclosing walls and ceil- ings. 2. In masonry construction, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adja- cent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T -shaped anchors. 3. In metal-stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adja- cent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Attach wall anchors to studs with screws. 4. For in-place gypsum board partitions, in- stall knock-down, drywall slip-on frames. 5. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI A115.lG. 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install within clear- ances specified in NFP A 80. 2. Smoke-Control Doors: Install to comply with NFPA 105. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. . END OF SECTION 08110. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Steel Doors and Frames 08110 - 4 S CTION 08211 F USH WOOD DOORS P RT 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Solid-core, flush wood doors with wood- veneer faces. 2. Solid-core, flush wood doors and plastic- laminate faces. 3. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 4. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 06402 - ARCIDTECTURAL WOODWORK for wood door frames. 2. Section 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES for metal door frames. 3. Section 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE 4. Section 08800 - GLAZING for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 1. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. 1. Include factory-finishing specifications B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be ex- pected in the finished work. 2. Corner sections of doors, wood veneered and plastic laminate finished, approxi- mately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edgings representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. Corner section does-not require the specified factory fin- ish. o 047 - Norex, Inc. 3. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish re- quired. 4. Plastic laminate, 6-inches square, for each color, texture, and pattern selected. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Lintitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single mannfacturer. B. Quality Standard: Comply with A Wi's " Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated. " 1. Provide A WI Quality Certification Labels or an A WI lener of licensing for Project indicating that doors comply with re- quirements of grades specified. C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFP A 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UBC Standard 7-2. 1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pres- sure 2. Oversize, Fire-Rated Wood Doors: For door assemblies exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide oversize fire door la- bel or certificate of inspection, from a testing and inspecting agency acoeptable to authorities having jurisdiction, stating that doors comply with requirements of design, materials, and construction. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in wrap or protective cardboard cartons C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HV AC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. Flush Wood Doors 08211 - 1 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, sigued by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84- inch section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective dobrs. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the fol- lowing period of time from date of Sub- stantial Completion: a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Flush Wood Doors: ### 5-ply only ###Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. b. VT Industries Inc. ###5-ply; and solid core only ### c. Weyerhaeuser Company. d. Approved substitute a. Air Louvers, Inc. b. Anemostat Door Products. c. GuIfport Industries, Inc. d. Hiawatha, Inc. e. ### Leslie-Locke, Inc. 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. Doors for Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Custom (Grade A faces) . 2. Species and Cut: White maple, plain sliced . 3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match. 5. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions. 6. Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building. Corridor door faces do not need to match where they are separated by 10 feet or more. 7. Transom Match: Continuous match. 8. Stiles: Same species as faces B. Plastic-Laminate-Faced Doors: 1. Grade: Custom 2. Laminate Faces: High-pressure decora- tive laminates complying with NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS (0.048-inch) 3. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Lantinate selections have been made and approved by the Owner based upon products shown on drawings' MA TERrAL SCHEDULE and FINISH SCHEDULE. a. Laminate drawing desiguations: PLAM-x. 4. Stiles: Plastic-laminate matching faces, applied before faces. 2.3 SOLlD-CORE DOORS A. Particleboard Cores: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2. 2. Provide doors with either glued-block or structural composite lumber cores instead of particleboard cores at locations where exit devices are indicated. B. Interior Veneer-Faced Doors: I. Core: Particleboard 2. Construction: Five or seven plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. C. Interior Plastic-Lantinate-Faced Doors: 1. Core: Particleboard. 2. Construction: Five plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abra- sive planed before faces and crossbands are applied. D. Fire-Rated Doors: 1. Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or mannfacturer's standard mineral-coreoconstruction as needed to provide fire rat- ing indicated. 2. Blocking: For mineral-core doors, pro- vide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability. a. 5-inch top-rail, bottom-rail, and mid- rail, blocking. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Flush Wood Doors 08211 - 2 3. Edge Construction: Provide edge con- struction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile matching face veneer, and laminated backing at hinge stiles for im- proved screw-holding capability and split resistance. 4. Pairs: Furnish formed-steel edges and as- tragals with intumescent seals for pairs of fire-rated doors, unless otherwise indi- cated. a. Finish steel edges and astragals with baked enamel same color as doors. 2. LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: I. Wood Species: Same species as door faces. 2. Profile: Manufacturer's standard shape. 3. At 20-minute, fire-rated, wood-core doors, provide wood beads and metal glazing clips approved for such use. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.0478-inch-thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; factory primed and approved for use in doors of fire rating indicated. 2. FABRICATION Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements in NFP A 80 for fire-rated doors. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, Dm A1l5-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimen- sions and alignment before factory ma- chining. 2. Metal Astragals: Premachine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors. 02 47 - Norex, Inc. C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles. D. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required. I. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indi- cated. 2.6 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with A Wi's" Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated" for factory finishing. B. Finish doors at factory. C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish with performance comparable to A WI System TR-6 catalyzed . 3. Staining: Match Architect's sample. 4. Sheen: Match Architect's sample. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been in- stalled with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08710- FINISH HARDWARE. B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFP A 80. C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. Flush Wood Doors 08211 - 3 D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. . END OF SECTION 08211 . 02047 - Norex, Inc. Flush Wood Doors 08211 - 4 S CTION 08311 A CESS DOORS AND FRAMES P RT 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Ceiling access doors and frames. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 09260 . GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES. 1. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated. Include construction details relative to materials, individual components and profiles, finishes, and fire ratings (if required) for access doors and frames. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of customized doors and frames. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. Schedule: Provide complete door and frame schedule, including types, general locations, sizes, construction details, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. P RT 2 - PRODUCTS 2. MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Access Doors: a. J. L. Industries, Inc. b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. c. Milcor Limited Partnership. d. Nystrom Building Products Co. e. Approved substitute. 02 47 - Norex, lnc, 2.2 MATERIALS A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with A60 zinc- iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating or 060 mill- phosphatized zinc coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness; with minimum thickness indicated representing specified thickness according to ASTM A 924. 2.3 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES A. Framed, Non-Rated Drywall Ceiling: 1. Specified Manufacturer: Larsen's Manu- facturing Co. 2. Model/Series: Larsen's L-LCP. 3. Fire-Rating: Not applicable. 4. Frame: 0.045-inch 6063 T5 extruded aluminum. 5. Door Panel: 26 gauge, uncoated, galva- nized steel 6. Hinges: Concealed zinc plated piano type. 7. Latch: Flush screwdriver cam. 8. Finish: White embossed steel 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door assemblies mannfactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Steel Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door and floor door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access panels. B. Install access doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. Access Doors and Frames 08311 -1 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. . END OF SECTION 08311. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Access Doors and Frames 08311 - 2 S CTION 08411 A UMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES A D STOREFRONTS P RT 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: I. Exterior, therntal-broke, storefront frames, fixed window openings. 2. Interior vestibule, non-thermal-broke, storefront frames. 3. Entrance manual-swing doors and frames 4. Field glazing of framing system. 5. Caulking of frame system. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 07210 - BUILDING INSULA nON for insulation materials field installed with aluminum-framed sys- tems. 2. Section 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS for application of joint sealants installed with aluminum-framed systems. 3. Section 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE for hardware to the extent not specified in this Section. 4. Section 08800 - GLAZING for glaz- ing requirements to the e"'lent not speci- fied in this Section. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: Provide aluminum-framed systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding, without failure, the effects indiacted. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by aluminum-framed systems without failing adhesively or cohesively. Provide sealant that fails cohesively before sealant releases from substrate when tested for adhesive compatibility with each substrate and joint condition required. 1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no sealant material behind. 2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate from each substrate because seal- ant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal strength. Structural-Sealant Joints: Desigued to produce tensile or shear stress in structural-sealant joints of less than 20 psi . 7 - Norex, Inc. D. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: Provide entrance and store- front systems, including anchorage, capa- ble of withstanding wind-load desigu re- quirements of authorities have jurisdiction or the American Society of Civil Engi- neers' ASCE 7. "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.: 6.4.2, "Analytical Procedure." Whichever is more stringent. 2. Seismic Loads: Not applicable. . E. Deflection of Framing Members: I. Deflection Nomtal to Wall Plane: Lim- ited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller. F. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load desigu pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding speci- fied limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evi- dence material failures, structura1 distress, and permanent deformation of main fram- ing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity but not less than 10 sec- onds. G. Therntal Movements: Provide aluminum- framed systems that allow for therntal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, anchors, and fasteners; or reduc- tion of performance when tested accord- ing to AAMA 501.5. Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08411 -1 H. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this systems with maximum air leakage through Section. fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfmlsq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbflsq. ft. . A. Installer Qualifications: Capable of assuming 1. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: engineering responsibility and performing work of this Section and who is acceptable to Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not manufacturer. evidence water penetration through fixed 1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation glazing and framing areas when tested of data for aluminum-framed systems in- according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static- cluding Shop Drawings based on testing air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive and engineering analysis of mannfac- wind-load design pressure, but not less than turer's standard units in assemblies similar 6.24 Ibflsq. ft.. to those indicated for this Project and 1. Maximum Water Leakage: Water con- submission of reports of tests performed trolled by flashing and gutters that is Ae- on manufacturer's standard assemblies. cordingtoAAMA501.1. Nouncon- Product Options: Information on Drawings and trolled water penetrating systems or ap- E. pearing on systems' normally exposed in- in Specifications establishes requirements for terior surfaces from sources other than systems' aesthetic effects and performance condensation. drained to exterior and can- characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated not damage adjacent materials or finishes by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and is not considered water leakage. profiles of components and assemblies as they J. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum- relate to sightIines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Other manufacturers' framed systems with fixed glazing and framing systems with equal performance characteristics areas having condensation-resistance factor may be considered. (CRF) of not less than 60 when tested according 1. Do not modifY intended aesthetic effects, to AAMA 1503. as judged solely by Architect, except with K. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide Architect's approval. If modifications are aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing proposed, submit comprehensive explana- and franting areas having average U-factor of tory data to Architect for review. not more than 0.69 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F when C. Accessible Entrances: Comply with the U.S. tested according to AAMA 1503. Architectural & Transportation Barriers 1.3 SUBMITTALS Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility A. Product Data: Include construction details, Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities material descriptions, dimensions of individual (ADAAG) components and profiles, and finishes for each D. Structural-Sealant Joints: Design reviewed and type of product indicated. approved by structural-sealant manufacturer. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed E. Mock-Up: Not required for this project. systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.5 WARRANTY 1. For entrances, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum- framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that deteriorate as defined in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. D. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08411-2 b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal fin- ishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components to function properly. 2. Warranty Period: All warranty periods begin from date of Substantial Comple- tion. a. Aluminum Framing System: Five (S) years. b. Aluminum Frame System Finish: Two (2) years for anodized finish. c. Glazing: As listed under Section 08800 - GLAZING 1) Coated-Glass Products: Ten (10) years. 2) Insulated-Glass Products: Ten (10) years. d. Sealants: Ten (10) years. P RT 2 - PRODUCTS 2. SPECIFIED PRODUCT Entances and Storefronts: Specifications are based on the following systems as manufactured by Kawneer Company, Inc. : 1. Aluminum Framing Systems (AFS-l) "EnCore" insulated system. 2. Aluminum Framing Systems (AFS-2) "TriFab 4S1" non-insulated system. Aluminum Swing Doors: Specifications are based on the following systems as manufactuered by Kawneer Company. Inc. 1. The "SOO" Standard Wide-Stile Door. 1- 3/4-inch thick, by S-inch wide stiles and top rail with a 12-inch high bottom rail. Non-insulated. 2. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with reqnirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Note the Basis-of-Desigu Proudct is as noted above. 1. CMI Architectural Products, Inc. 2. EFCO Corporation. 3. Kawneer. Specified Product. 4. Tubelite Inc. S. Vistawall Architectural Products. 02 47 - Norex, Inc. 2.3 FRAMING MATERIALS A. A1untinum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTMB 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTMB 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308. S. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS AS.I0. B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTMA 1008. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011. 2.4 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. AFS-I; Aluntinum Entrances and Store- front Framing System: A screw spline (Two piece vertical mullion - unitized as- sembly) or shear block (one piece vertical mullion - allowing pre-assembled units) system, with themtal separation between interior framing and exterior snap-on cover. a. Mullion configurations: Provide pockets at the inside glazing face to receive gasket glazing. Mullions shall be one piece. Provide con- cealed weep holes on the underside of covers to facilitate drainage to the ex- terior. 1) AFS-l Frame Size: 2-inch x 4- l/4-inch overall, with front glaz- ing. Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08411 - 3 b. Thermal Break Separators: High- performance plastic connectors sepa- rate framing members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior c. Exterior Glazing. d. Aluminum trim Snap-On covers: Covers applied to pressure plates to show a sharp, uninterrupted exterior profile, cut to length, providing a maximum 1/ 16-inch gap at ends to provide for expansion I contraction. Profiles and dimensions as indicated on the drawings.. 2. AFS-2; Aluntinum Entrances and Store- front Framing System: A screw spline (two piece vertical mullion - unitized as- sembly) or shear block (one piece vertical mullion - allowing pre-assembled units) system, non-thermal broke. a. Mullion configurations: Provide pockets at the inside glazing face to receive gasket glazing. Mullions shall be one piece. Snap-on glazing stops of horizontal members. 1) AFS-2 Frame Size: 2-inch x 4- 1/2-inch overall, with center glazing . 2) Interior Glazing . 3) Aluminum trim Snap-On covers: Covers applied to pressure plates to show a sharp, uninterrupted exterior profile, cut to length, providing a maximum 1/16-inch gap at ends to provide for expan- sion I contraction. Profiles and dimensions as indicated on the drawings. B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from therntal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use seIf-locking devices. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 1231 A 123M or ASTM A IS3/A 153M requirements. E. Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion- resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. Form exposed flashing from sheet aluminum finished to match franting and of sufficient thickness to maintain a flat appearance without visible deflection. F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 2.5 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08800 - GLAZING. B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types, replaceable, molded or extruded, that maintain uniform pressure and watertight seal. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types. 2.6 ALUMINUM DOORS A. Stile-and-Rail, Glass Panel Door Types: B. Swing Doors: Kawneer Series SOO wide-stile, full glazed door. 1-3/4-inch thick x S-inch wide stile face, 12-inch high bottom rail. Minimum . 12S-inch thick, extruded tubular main framing members. C. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.12S-inch [ overall thickness, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. 1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Accepts V,-inch to I-inch thick glaz- ing, as indicated. 2. Style Desigu: As indicated above under door types. 3. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's stan- dard replaceable weather stripping as fol- lows: 02047 - Norex, Inc. Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08411-4 a. Compression Weather Stripping: Molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 requirements or molded PC complying with ASTM D 2287 requirements. b. Sliding Weather Stripping: Wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing complying with AAMA 701 requirements. 4. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's stan- dard weather sweep for application to ex- terior door bottoms and with concealed fasteners on mounting strips. Door hardware: 1. Main Entry Doors: 2. The following shall be furnished by door manufacturer: a. Weatherstrips b. Astragals. c. Door sweeps. 3. Balance of hardware to be furnished per Section 08710 -FINISH HARDWARE. 2. MISCELLEANOUS FABRICATED LUMINUM Provide members frabricated from sheets and plates of sizes and shapes as indicated, formed by a system that will not cause surface imperfections and grain separation in the exposed member. Provide members of thickness as indicated or, if not indicated, not less thanO.060-inch thick for exterior application and 0.093-inch thick for interior appleications. Provide aluminum alloy and temper for exposed members as recommended by aIuntinum manufacturer and fabricator to comply iwht requiements for performance, fomting, fabrication, application of finish and control of color. 1. Match finish of adjacent framing, unless otherwise indicated. Apply finish after forming, unless otherwise approved. 2. ACCESSORY MATERIALS Insulating Materials: As specified in Section 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION. 1. Loose blanket, thermal insulation; Insula- tion Type INSUL-IO. Joint Sealants and Fillers: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems. I. Primary Sealant: Aluminum frame manu- facturer is responsible for selecting seal- ant manufacturer and backer rod manufac- turer, whose products can be warranted products used in conjunction with alumi- num frame assembly, decorative perime- ter joints, substrate, and related sealant work. 2. Secondary Sealant (Decorative): Refer- ence Section 07920 - JOINT SEALANT, for SLNT-1S, a single-component silicone sealant for secondary glazing. 3. Threshold and Bottom Rail Frame: Ref- erence Section 07920 - JOINT SEALANT, for SLNT-29, a butyl rubber sealant for frame and threshold setting bed. C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. D. Stools and Trim: Mannfacturer's standard extruded window stool, trim and clip anchoring system. Provide proper stool depth. 2.9 FABRICATION A. Form aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, con- densation occurring within franting mem- bers, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. S. Accommodations for therntal and me- chanical movements of glazing and fram- ing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glaz- ing from the exterior. . 02 47 - Norex, Inc. Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08411-5 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection de- vices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing (without projecting stops). E. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary support device (dutchman) to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures. F. Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing hardware. 1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. 2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors. G. Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing hardware. 1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. 2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. H. Hardware Installation: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes. 1. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Class Il, Color Anodic Finish: AA- MI2C22A32/ A34 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: ArchitecturaI Class Il, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. C. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA- M12C22A42/ A44 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. 1. Color: Kawneer "Permanodic" # 18 Champague. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsat- isfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: I. Comply with manufacturer's written in- structions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovementjoints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isola- tors to prevent metal corrosion and elec- trolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within franting members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08411-6 Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS, sealant type INSUL-29, a butyl rubber sealant, to produce weathertight installation. Install components plumb and true in aligrunent with established lines and grades, without Warp or rack. Install glazing as specified in Section 08800 - GLAZING. Entrances: Install to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Entrances: Install to produce tight fit at weather stripping and weather- tight closure. 2. Field-Installed Hardware: Install surface- mounted hardware according to hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent pos- sible. Install insulation materials as specified in Section 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION. I Install perimeter joint sealants as indicated, to the requirements of Section 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS, to produce weathertight installation. Erection Tolerances: Install aluntinum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length. 2. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit off- set from true aligument to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces meet at corners, lintit offset from true aligument to 1/32 inch. 3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurement to 1/8 inch. 3. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing not required. . END OF SECTION 08411 . 02 47 - Norex, Inc. Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08411-7 S CTION 08665 S IDING-PASS-THROUGH WINDOW P RT 1 - GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 1 Speci- fication Sections. 1. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Aluminum track, frameless, glass pass- through window unit Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 06402 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK for countertop. 2. Section 08S00 - GLAZING for glass types. 1. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For the following: 1. Aluminum track system. 2. Hardware. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. QUALITY ASSURANCE Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations in GANA's "Glazing Manual," unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to this publication for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. Safety Glass: Category Il materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1. P RT 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 02 47 - Norex, Inc. 1. Stylmark "Assembly #610099" (2-sliding panels). 2. KV (Knape & Vogt) "Roll Ezy #892 ZC" (2-sliding panels) . 3. Approved substitute. 2.2 ROLLING DOORS ASSEMBLIES A. Specifications for pass-through window is based on Stylmark Assembly #6 10099 (2- sliding panels). Extruded-aluminum members which include the following items. 1. Top Channel #110007 (1-3/16" x 9/16" high). Two required, full width of open- ing. 2. Top Guides #419007 (1S/32" x '1." high x S/S" long) Two per glass panel. 3. Shoe "H" Track #110012 (7/16" x 1" high. Two required per glass panel. 4. Wheel Assembly #S 1000 1. Two reqnired per glass panel. S. Lower Track #110009 with Channel #110007 (1-3/16" x 9/16" high). Two re- quired, full width of opening. 6. Lock Assembly #S 10200. A plunger lock, set into shoe "H" track. B. Metal Finish: All exposed metal surfaces shaII have the following finish: 1. Stylmark Inc. #110 "Buffed Brite natural anodized finish". 2.3 FLOAT GLASS A. Reference Section 08S00 - GLAZING for required glass type GL-2. 1. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 104S, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Condi- tion A (uncoated), Kind FT (fully tem- pered), Quality q3 (glazing select) float glass, complying with the following re- quirements: a. Clear Tempered Float Glass: Class 1 (clear). 1) Thickness: '1." thick, unless thicker is required due to size of reqnired glass panels. b. Glass Edge Treatment: Flat polished edge. 2.4 FASTENERS A. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed. Sliding Pass-Through Window 08110 -1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Comply with the combined recommendations of manufacturer's written installation instructions for glass and the track assembly. Coordinate work with millwork. B. Fabricate to size as indicated on drawings and approved shop drawings. All rough metal edges shall be filed smooth. All exposed glass edges shall be finished and polished. Anchoring devices as recommended by track manufacturer. 3.2 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect glass from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. B. Wash glass not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date for Substantial Completion. Wash mirrored glass by methods recommended in NAAMM publication . END OF SECTION 08665. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Sliding Pass-Through Window 08110 - 2 ..-- SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE ART 1 - GENERAL .1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Finish Hardware for steel (hollow metal) doors. 2. Finish Hardware for aluminum doors. 3. Finish Hardware for wood doors. 4. Keyed cylinders as indicated. B. Related Items: 1. Steel (hollow metal) doors and frames: Refer to Section 08110. 2. Aluminum doors: Refer to Section 08120. 3. Wood doors: Refer to Section 08210. 4. Conduit and power connections: Refer to Division 16. .2 REFERENCES A. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA): 1. NFPA 80. 2. NFPA 101. B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. Building Materials Directory. C. Warnock Hersey (WH): 1. Building Materials Directory. D. ADA: 1. Americans with Disabilities Act. E. Uniform Building Code: 1. UBC, 1997. 2. UBC 7.2 1997 Fire Door Standard for 20-minute Smoke and Draft Control Doors. .3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Special Submittal Requirements: Combine submittals of this Section with Sections listed below to ensure the "design intent" of the system/assembly is understood and can be reviewed together. a. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames. b. Section 08120 . Aluminum Doors and Frames. c. Section 08211 . Flush Wood Doors. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including the following: 1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication. 2. Manufacturer's installation instruction. 3. Submit 6 copies of catalog cuts of each hardware item with hardware schedule. orex Office Building 4 400-02047 - CD 14 June 2002 Finish Hardware 08710 - 1 C. Shop Drawings - Hardware Schedule: Submit 1 complete reproducible copy. 1. List groups and suffixes in proper sequence. 2. Completely describe door and list architectural door number. 3. Vertical or horizontal schedules ouly are acceptable. D. Wiring Diagram: Submit wiring diagrams for each electric product specified. 1. Verify voltage with electrical engineer. E. Templates: Submit templates and "reviewed Hardware Schedule" to door and frame supplier and others as applicable. 1. Templates, wiring schematics, and "reviewed Hardware Schedule" of electrical items to electrical for coordination and verification of voltages and locations. F. Keying Schedule: Upon review and acceptance of Hardware Schedule, develop Keying Schedule in consultation with Owner. G. Contract Close-out Submittals: Comply with Section 01700 including specific requirements. 1. Operating and maintenance manuals: Submit 3 sets containing the following: a. Maintenance instructions for each item of hardware. b. Catalog pages for each product. c. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer. d. Parts list for each product. e. Copy of final hardware schedule. f. Copy of final keying schedule. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Not less than 5 years experience in the actual production of specified products. B. Distributor's Qualifications: 1. Firm with 3 years experience in the distribution of commercial hardware. 2. Distributor to employ full time Architectural Hardware Consultants (ARC) for the purpose of scheduling and coordinating hardware and establishing keying schedule. 3. Hardware Schedule shall be prepared and signed by an ARC. C. Installer's Qualifications: 1. Firm with 3 years experience in installation of similar hardware to that required for this Project. 2. Successfully completed not less than 5 comparable scale projects. D. Regulatory Label Requirements: Provide UL label or stamp on hardware required on labeled doors. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: 1. Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification. 2. Package hardware to prevent damage during transit and storage. 3. Mark hardware to correspond with "reviewed Hardware Schedule". B. Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. Norex Office Building 41400-02047 - CD 14 June 2002 Finish Hardware 08710 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCREWS AND FASTENERS A. Fasteners: 1. Including, but not limited to wood or machine screws, bolts, nuts, anchors, etc. of proper type, size, material, and finish required for installation of hardware. 2. Phillips head for exposed screws. Do not use aluminum screws to attach hardware. 2.2 HINGES A. General: Plated contract grade material, fabricated to template for use with metal doors or frames, with flat button tips, non-rising loose steel pins, and beveled or non-beveled inner edge. 1. Non-removable loose pin hinges for exterior outswing doors. 2. Non-ferrous base metal for exterior doors. 3. Ball bearing hinges of proper size and weight for labeled doors. 4. Drill 5132 inch hole and use No. 12, 1-1/4 inch steel threaded to the head wood screws for hinges on wood doors. B. Hinge Sizes: 1-314 inch doors /4-1/2 inches x 4-1/2 inches 1. Width of hinges: Sufficient to clear trim. C. Quantities: 1. One pair ( 2 hinges) on doors 60 inches high or less, 1/2 pair ( 1 hinge) for every additional 30 inches or fraction thereof. D. Type 1 Hinge: Plain bearing, steel. 1. Interior doors less than 37 inches wide without closers. E. Type 2 Hinge: Standard weight, BB, steel. 1. Interior doors 37 inches to 41 inches wide without closers. 2. Interior doors less than 41 inches with closer. F. Type 3 Hinge: Extra heavy, 4-BB, steel 1. Interior doors wider than 41 inches. 2. Doors higher than 96 inches. 3. Vestibule doors. 4. In-swing exterior doors. G. Type 4 Hinge: Extra heavy, 4-BB, brass, bronze or stainless steel. 1. Out-swing exterior doors. 2. When specified in group or suflix. H. Schedule of acceptable manufacturers: Type 1 Hin e: Type 2 Hin e: Type 3 Hin e: Type 4 Hin e: BOMMER 5000 HAGER 1279 MCKINNEY T2714 STANLEY F179 BB5000 BB 1279 TA2714 FBB179 BB5004 BB1168 T4A3786 FBB168 BB5006 BB1199 T4A3386 FBB199 orex Office Building 1400-02047 - CD 14 June 2002 Finish Hardware 08710 - 3 2.3 ELECTRIC HINGES A. UL fire tested and listed for labeled doors up to and including Class" A" to template application to mortise prepared 4-1/2 in. x 4-1/2 in. template hinges. Electric hinge to be located at second hinge from bottom. Where electric hinges are used in conjunction with exit devices, locate hinge nearest to exit device. 1. Acceptable manufacturers and products: a. Bommer: 8 wire. b. Hager: ETW-8 (8 wire). c. McKinney: CC (8 wire). d. Stanley: CE-58. 2.4 LOCKSETS 1 LATCHSETS A. Provide sets which are uniform in size, regardless of function, permitting interchanging Iocksets and latchsets, with 6 pin tumbler cylinder cores, from manufacturers and suppliers capable of providing locks to the existing masterkey system. 1. Backset for locks, deadbolts, and latches to be 2-3/4 inches. 2. Provide wrought boxes and curved lip strikes with proper lip length to protect trim (projecting not more than 1/8 inch beyond trim). B. Heavy Duty Cylindrical TY'Pe: Lever Design ( Sargent numbers specified in groups) Brand Series Design Corbin/Russwin CL3300 ASD Saraent 10 Line LB SchlaQe D ATH Yale 5400LN MO 2.5 EXIT DEVICES A. Provide devices by a single manufacturer with specified functions which can accept both outer and inner cylinders of the locks specified, with UL listing for safety, fire and through bolt fastening for wood mineral core doors without blocking. 1. Sargent ( numbers specified in groups or suffixes ). 2. Acceptable manufacturers: Brand Series Design Corbin Russwin ED5000 C700 Saraent 80 ETB Von DUDrin 98 994L x 07 Yale 7100 M0620F 2.6 DOOR CLOSERS A. Cast iron or aluminum of sizes recommended by manufacturer with forged steel or stamped steel arms, brackets, and accessories as required by surrounding conditions. Full rack and pinion mechon;.If1 with adjustable controls on Sweep", "Latch", and "Backcheck" speeds, with tamper-proof tool and independent valve key adjusting features. Norex Office Building 41400-02047 - CD 14 June 2002 finish Hardware 08710 - 4 B. Medium Projection Closers: Universal mounting and multi-sized modem surface type with full cover, ( unless other types are required by special conditions or are specified in the hardware groups ). 1. Acceptable manufacturers: Brand LCN Norton Sar ent Yale Series 4041 7500 351 4400 .7 FLAT GOODS A. Push/Pull Bars: One inch bar with 2.1/2 inch projection. Mount top of pull BTB with push bar. 1. Hiawatha No. 536B x 1081LBP. 2. Acceptable products of the following manufacturers: a. Burns. b. Hager. c. Quality. d. Trimco. B. Kick Plates: 16 gauge (.050). Finish and material as specified under "Finishes", beveled top and side edges ( B3E ) in widths 2 inches less than door width on single doors, 1 inch less than door width on pairs of doors without mullion. Height 10 inches ( or 1/2 inch less than height of bottom rail whichever is less). 1. Hiawatha specified 2. Acceptable products of the following manufacturers: a. Burns. b. Hager. c. Quality. d. Trimco. .8 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Use floor or base stops only where specified. Supply a stop for every door which will prevent damage to the door, hardware, and surrounding surfaces. Use an overhead type stop Sargent 1540 series for doors that are capable of swinging more than 145 degrees before striking a wall and are equipped with a regular arm surface mounted closer, and where a door strikes a fixed object like a sink, cabinet, etc. Wall stops must be wall mounted. B. Stops: GJ 60W, WBll, RB3, RB4, RB6, or Sargent 1540 series as required by surrounding conditions for all interior doors scheduled for a "stop", unless other stops are specified. 1. Sargent 1540 series when overhead stops are required on labeled doors. 2. When an overhead stop is required with a parallel arm closer application, on interior doors only, a combination closer stop is acceptable. 3. Sargent stops and overhead stop numbers specified 4. Acceptable products of the following specified manufacturers: a. Burns. b. Hager. c. I ves. d. Quality. e. Trimco. 5. Comparable overhead stops by, Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc., Glynn Johnson and Rixson are acceptable. orex Office Buildin9 1400-02047 - CD 14 June 2002 Finish Hardware 08710 - 5 C. StopIHolders: GJ W20 or Sargent 1540H series, as required by surrounding conditions, for interior doors scheduled for a stop and holder, unless others are specified. GJ W20, Sargent 590 or 690 series, as required by surrounding conditions, for all exterior and vestibule doors scheduled for "stop and holder" unless others are specified. GJ W20 x Trimco pipe adapter block #1228 at doors opening against 1- V2 inches or 2 inch pipe railings. 1. When an overhead stop holder is required with a parallel arm closer application, on interior doors only, a combination closer stop hOlder is acceptable. 2. Sargent stoplholder numbers specified 3. Acceptable products of the following specified manufacturers: a. Burns. b. Hager. c. I ves. d. Quality. e. Trimco. 4. Comparable overhead stoplholders by Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc., Glynn Johnson and Rixson are acceptable. 2.9 THRESHOLDS AND WEATHERSTRIPPING A. ThreshOlds: Aluminum 5 inch saddle, V2 inch high, unless specified or detailed otherwise. 1. Reese No. S205 specified. 2. Acceptable products of the following manufacturers: a. National Guard. b. Pemko. c. illtra. d. Zero. B. Weatherstripping: Closed cell 3/16 inch sponge neoprene with 1 inch aluminum extrusion. 1. Reese No. DS70 specified. 2. Acceptable products of the following manufacturers: a. National Guard b. Pemko. c. illtra. d Zero. C. Door Sweeps: Neoprene with V2 inch sweep at the door bottom with 1-V4 inch aluminum extrusion. 1. Reese No. 323 specified. 2. Acceptable products of the following manufacturers: a. National Guard b. Pemko. c. illtra. d Zero. D. Gasketing: Provide 3/16" thick x ~"wide with self adhesive (PCA) backing. UL approved for all 20 minute and labeled smoke doors in 1 hour corridors. 1. Gaskets shall comply with UBC 7-2 1997 and UL10C requirements. 2. Acceptable products of the following manufacturers: a. National Guard. b. Reese. c. Pemko. d. illtra. e. Zero. Norex Office Building 41400-02047 - CD 14 June 2002 Finish Hardware 08710 - 6 .10 FINISHES A. Exposed Metal Finishes: Hinges-Exterior: Hinges-Interior: Locksets: Closers: Exit Devices: Kick Plates: Overhead Holders: Door Stops: Miscellaneous Items: US26D = Satin Chrome US32D = Satin Stainless Steel US26D or US32D US26D US26D AL US26D US32D US26D US26D ( US32D for wrought material ) US26D B. US32 and US32D: Solid 18-8 chromium-nickel, 300 series, "Austenitic", non-magnetic. Straight chrome-irons ( magnetic ), is not acceptable, except as hinge pins. Items showing magnetic properties will be rejected. For items not available in US32 or US32D provide US26 or US26D. .11 KEYING A. Key as directed by Owner. 1. Cylinders to be construction master keyed. B. Keys: 1. Verify quantity and level of keys with Owner. 2. Two Change keys for each lock. 3. Six Construction keys. ART 3 " EXECUTION .1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine doors, frames, related items, and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and or timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. .2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Door Hardware: Hang doors with screws inserted and hinges adjusted so doors swing free and do not rattle when closed. Cut holes and mortises in wood doors for locks and other hardware with jig approved or provided by manufacturer of item to be applied. Remove or cover hardware after fitting until final painting and cleaning. Reinstall, adjust and test after painting and cleaning is completed. Replace items with damaged finish or non- functional. C. Keys: After locks have been reinstalled, seal keys and/or cores in envelopes. Mark each envelope with door number, change key set or masterkey set and keyway number. Just prior to substantial completion and under direction of Owner or his representative, install permanent cores. Ship masterkeys to Owner via registered mail. orex Office Building 1400-02047 - CD 14 June 2002 finish Hardware 08710 - 7 -'----.-,-----~--------_.._.____~ ,...... .._._~____~..._..," ..._ ___....___M_._____~__..__ ____..',__" .'..._.__.__.______ D. Thresholds: Install thresholds using Tremco, Dymonic sealant (SLNT #2). Completely fill void space under threshold. At openings with one or more mullions, install continuously with cut-outs for mullions. E. Electric Hinges: Electric hinge to be located at second hinge from bottom. Where electric hinges are used in conjunction with exit devices, locate hinge nearest to exit device. F. Mounting HeightslDimensions: 1. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions to install hardware at specified mounting heights. Supplier to make available jigs for hardware installation. Install and protect hardware until substantial completion. 2. Hinges: a. Bottom of frame to center line of bottom hinge up to 13 inches. b. Finish door frame head to center line of top hinge up to 11-3/4 inches. c. Others spaced equally. d. For hollow metal doors x hollow metal frames, comply with hollow metal manufacturer's standard hinge locations. 3. Lever locks and latches: Bottom of frame to center line of strike sha1l be 40-5116 inches. 4. Exit devices: 40-5116 inches from bottom of frame to center line of strike. 5. Dead locks: a. Bottom of frame to center line of cylinder on dead locks sha1l be 48 inches. 6. Closers: a. Mount on corridor side of lobby doors, room side of corridor doors, and stair side of stairways. b. Parallel arm installation where possible on exterior doors. c. Through-bolt installation not permitted, coordinate with door suppliers. 7. Push bars: a. Bottom of frame to center line of push bar shall be 42 inches. 8. Kick plates: Bottom within 1/8 inch of door bottom, attach with Phillips head screws. 9. Door stops: (Coordinate for proper blocking where required in Section 09260). a. 60W (to catch knob or pull). b. RB3, RB4, or RB6, 2-1/2 inches below head, backset as required to keep doors from striking. c. WB11, 6'-6" up from finish concrete floor. 10. Door holders: (Coordinate for proper blocking where required in Section 09260). 6'-6" up from finish floor, backset same as for locks where applicable. 11. Clothes hooks: 66 inches from finish floor on door centerline. G. Mounting heights shall comply with Door and Hardware Institute recommended locations for standard steel doors and frames. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Prior to completion of Project, ascertain that doors closers are in adjustment so closer completes its full closing cycle in less than 4 to 6 seconds without abrupt change of speed between "Sweep" and "Latch" speeds. Adjust "Backcheck" according to manufacturer's instructions. V eri.fy that levers are free from binding. Ensure that latchbolts and deadbolts are engaged into strike and hardware is functioning. Turn over wrenches and adjusting tools, provided with hardware, to Owner. 3.4 INSTRUCTIONS AND TOOLS Norex Office Building 41400-02047 - CD 14 June 2002 Finish Hardware 08710-8 A. When project is complete, deliver to Owner complete set of special tools required for care, maintenance, and adjustment of hardware items specified under this Section, including changing of cylinders. Provide complete information on care, maintenance, and adjustment, and data on repair and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes. Deliver to Owner, 3 bound copies of catalog pages of hardware supplied. .5 HARDWARE GROUPS AND SUFFIX KEY A. Hardware group suffixes indicate a variation to the group as follows: 1. "8" Add HES electric strike, 1006 series. Verify voltage and function required. Provide continuous current electric hinge, o;m;l.,. to Standley "CE-58", for pairs of doors without a mullion. .6 HARDWARE GROUPS ROUP-1 Latched Door Hinges as specified 1 Latchset 10U15 Functions: Both sides always by lever. I Stop GJ 60W (provide GJ WBll or Sargent 1540 series where GJ 60W is not applicable) ROUP-3 Locked - Classroom Function Hinges as specified 1 Lockset lOG37 Functions: Inside always by lever. Outside by lever, except when outside lever is set by outside key, then, outside by key. Deadlocking latch bolt. 1 Stop GJ 60W (provide GJ WBll or Sargent 1540 series where GJ 60W is not applicable) ROUP-4 Locked - Storeroom Function Hinges as specified 1 Lockset lOG04 Functions: Inside always by lever. Outside always by key. Outside lever always rigid. Deadlocking latch bolt. 1 Stop GJ 60W (provide GJ WBll or Sargent 1540 series where GJ 60W is not applicable) ROUP-6 Privacy Function Hinges as specified 1 Privacy Set lOU65 Functions: Inside always by lever. Outside lever is set by inside button, then, outside by emergency key or coin, etc. Closing door releases outside lever. 1 Clothes Hook Ives 572MB 1 Stop GJ 60W (provide GJ WBll or Sargent 1540 series where GJ 60W is not applicable) ROUP-14 Locked - Closer - Storeroom Function Hinges as specified 1 Lockset lOG04 Functions: Outside always by key. Inside always by lever. Outside Iever always rigid. Deadlocking latch bolt. 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Stop GJ 60W (provide GJ WBll or Sargent 1540 series where GJ 60W is not applicable) ROUP-19 Push/Pull Bars - Each Door Hinges as specified orex Office Building 1400-02047 - CD 14 June 2002 Finish Hardware 08710 - 9 1 Set PushlPull Bars Hiawatha 536B x 1081LBP Mount top of pull BTB with push bar. 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Overhead Stop Sargent 590 series (provide GJ WBll where door swings against wall at 90 degrees) GROUP-25 Bi-Fold Doors 1 Set Bi-fold Track and Hardware Lawrence ED600 series x Mortise hinges 1 Dummy Lever (2 door openings) 2 Dummy Levers (4 door openings) GROUP-102S Exit - Single - Locked - Nightlatch Function Hinges as specified 1 Exit Device Sargent 19-8804 x ETB Functions: Inside always by touchbar. Outside by key and lever pull, except when touchbar is dogged down, then, outside by lever pull. 1 Rim Cylinder 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Overhead Stop Sargent 590 series (provide GJ WBll where door swings against wall at 90 degrees) 1 Threshold Reese S205A (unless detailed) 1 Set Weatherstrip Reese DS70 1 Sweep Strip Reese 323 GROUP-lOGS Exterior Doors -Storeroom Function. Hinges as specified 1 Lockset 10004 Functions: Inside always by lever. Outside aIways by key. Outside lever always rigid. Deadlocking latchbolt. 1 Closer 1 Lock Astragal Trimco 5000 or 5002 (delete on pairs). 1 Overhead Stop Sargent 590 series 1 Threshold Reese S205A (unless detailed) 1 Set Weatherstrip Reese DS70 1 Sweep Strip Reese 323 Note: For pairs of doors provide flush bolts. Hinges and stop to be equal to active leaf. GROUP-110 Pair - Exterior - Aluminum - NightIatch x Dummy Trim Function Hinges as specified 1 Electric Hinge similar to McKinney "CC 4wire)" 1 Exit Device Sargent 19-MD861O x ETB Dummy Trim Functions: Inside always by touchbar. Outside by lever pull when touchbar is dogged down. 1 Exit Device Sargent 19-MD8606 x ETB Functions: Inside always by touchbar. Outside by key and lever pull except when touchbar is dogged down, then, outside by lever pull. Electric latch retraction feature. 2 Closers 1 Power Supply Sargent 3530 2 Overhead Stops Sargent 690 series (provide GJ WBll where door swings against wall at 90 degrees) 1 Threshold Reese S205A (unless detailed) 1 Set Weatherstrip (door manufacturer's heavy duty standard) Norex Office Building 41400-02047 - CD 14 June 2002 Finish Hardware 08710 -10 1 Set Astragals (door manufacturer's heavy duty standard) 2 Sweep Strips (door manufacturer's heavy duty standard) Note: Card reader by others. ROUP-H1 Single - Exterior - Inswing - Asylum Function Hinges as specified 1 Lockset lOG 17 Functions: Both levers rigid at all times. Latchbolt by key either side. Deadlocking latchbolt. 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate (hollow metal door only) 1 Overhead Stop Sargent 690 series (590 series for hollow metal door) 1 Threshold Reese 820SA (unless detailed) 1 Set Weatherstrip Reese D870 1 Polyurethane Seal Reese DB592U. Note: Weatherstrip and polylurethane seal for aluminum doors by aluminum door supplier. END OF SECTION orex Office Building 4 400-02047 - CD 14 June 2002 Finish Hardware 08710 -11 S CTION 08800 GLAZING P RT 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Insulated and single glazing of all alumi- num storefronts, windows, doors and frames. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS for field glazing requirements of aluminum frames and aluminum'tloors. 2. Section 08665 - SLIDING-P ASS- THROUGH WINDOWS. 3. Section 08814 - MIRRORED GLASS for plate-glass wall mirrors. 1. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated unless manufacturer recommends greater WCkness due to size of glzed opening and project conditions, including wind. 1. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. Glazing Schedule: Use same desiguations . indicated on Drawings for glazed openIngs In preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size openIng and locatIOn. 02 47 - Norex, Inc. C. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI 297.1. B. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. I. SIGMA Publications: SIGMA TM-3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines," 1.5 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under reqnirements of the Contract Documents. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Provide written warranty, made out to the Owner and signed by glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for the following glass types F.O.B. to the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below: 1. Insulated Glass: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 . PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Primary; Heat Treated; Insulated: a. Cardinal IG b. Falconer Glass Industries c. PPG Industries, Inc. d. Viracon Inc. Glazing 08800 - 1 2.2 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class as indicated below: 1. Class 1 (clear) unless otherwise indicated. 2. Class 2 (tinted, heat-absorbing, and light reducing) where indicated. 2.3 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS A. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3 (glazing select); class, kind, and condition as indicated below: 1. Class I (clear); Kind - fully tempered where indicated or required by coat; Con- dition A (uncoated). 2. Class 2 (tinted heat absorbing and light reducing); Kind - fully tempered where required by code and safety concerns; Condition A (uncoated). 2.4 COATED FLOAT GLASS A. Provide Kind HS (heat -strengthened) coated float glass in place of coated annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass desigu requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is indicated. 2.5 WIRED GLASS A. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II (patterned and wired glass, flat), Class I (clear), Quality q8 (glazing); 6.4 mm thick; ofform and mesh pattern indicated below: 1. Polished Wired Glass: Form 1 (wired, polished both sides), and as follows: a. Mesh m2 (square). 2.6 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating-Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in the Glass Schedule. 1. Provide Kind HS (heat -strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist therntal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design re- quirements specified in "Performance Re- quirements" Article. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) where safely glass is in- dicated. B. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows: 1. Manufacturer's standard sealants. C. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 2.7 ELASTOMERlC GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, in- cluding glass products, seals of insulating- glass units, and glazing channel sub- strates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and Section 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS and recommendations of glass and sealant manufacturers for conditions indicated. 1. SLNT-17: Medium-Modulus Neutral- Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant. Type S (single component) and NS (non-sag); Class 25; NT (nontraflic); M, G, A, and O. a. Products: 1) 791; Dow Corning. 2) 795; Dow Coming 3) Spectrem 2, Tremco 4) Tremsil 600; Tremco. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Glazing 08800 - 2 28 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonrnigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass mannfacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where applicable. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applica- tions in which tape is subject to continu- ous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applica- tions in which tape is not subject to con- tinuous pressure. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed-cell, PVC foam tape; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2. GLAZING GASKETS As furnished by aluminum frame manufacturer. 2. 0 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING ATERIALS General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. 02 47 - Norex, Inc. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type 0 (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. 2.11 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing, with InstaIler present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clear- ances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass- franting members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other franting members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. Glazing 08800 - 3 B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant -substrate testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain re- quired face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide liS-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thick- ness of tape. R. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. 1. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed. F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at comers and work toward centers of openings. G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Gaskets as provided by aluminum frame manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation. B. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation. C. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at comers. D. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Glazing 08800 - 4 3. SEALANT GLAZING (WET) Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3. PROTECTION AND CLEANING Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to franting held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass mannfacturer. 3.8 GLASS SCHEDULE GL-l: ';." thick, clear, uncoated, (annealed), polished float glass. B. GL-2: ';." thick, clear, uncoated, tempered, polished float glass. C. GL-3: \1.0" thick, clear, polished, wire glass. 1. Mesh ml (diamond) D. GL-4: 1" thick, insulated, tinted glass. 1. Composition: a. Exterior Lite: \1.0" thick, bronze tint, heat -strengthened, polished float glass. b. Air Space: \1," thick. c. Interior Lite: \1.0" thick, clear, an- nealed, polished float glass. 2. Fully tempered, where required by code. 3. Provide an Add Alternate Pricing for a low- "E" coating on #2 surface. E. GL-5: I" thick, insulated, tinted glass with reflective coating. 1. Composition: a. Exterior Lite: \1.0" thick, bronze tint, heat-strengthened, with reflective coating on #2 surface. b. Air Space: \1," thick. c. Interior Lite: \1.0" thick, clear, an- nealed, polished float glass. 2. Pre-Selected Manufacturer: Viracon "So- larscreen" Vf4-30. a. Coating: Viracon (VT) Titanium. b. Tint: Viracon (#6) Bronze, with 30% transmittance of light. 3. Fully tempered, where required by code and fabrication process. . END OF SECTION 08800. Glazing 08800 - 5 S CTION 08814 M RRORED GLASS P RT 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Annealed (plate) silvered ntirrored glass, wall mounted with mastic and continuous rails top and bottom Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 10S01 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES for metal-framed mir- rors. 1. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For the following: 1. Mirror mastic, indicting compatibility with ntirror backing. 2. Mirror hardware. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. Mirror clips. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of mirrored glass and mirror mastic certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. Mirror Mastic Glass Coating Compatibility Test Reports: From an organic protective coating manufacturer indicating that ntirror mastic has been tested for compatibility and adhesion with organic protective coating applied to silvered mirrored glass. Include organic coating manufacturers' interpretation oftest results relative to performance and recommendations for use of mastics with organic protective coating. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations in GANA's "Glazing Manual," unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to this publication for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 02 47 Norex, Inc. B. NAAMM's Publication: For silvered mirrored glass, comply with recommendations in NAAMM's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care, Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors." C. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI 297.1. PART 2 .. PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, mannfacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. American Mirror Company, Inc. 2. Gardner Glass Products. 3. Falconer glass Industries, Inc. 4. Virginia Mirror Co., Inc. 5. Walker Glass Co., Ltd. 6. Approved substitute. 2.2 FLOAT GLASS A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), class, quality, and other properties as indicated below: 1. Clear Annealed Float Glass: Class 1 (clear), Quality q2 (mirror). a. Thickness: If not indicated on draw- ings, provide not less than 1'4" (6.350 mm). 2.3 MIRRORED GLASS A. Silvered Mirrored Glass: Annealed clear float glass with successive layers of chemically deposited silver, electrically or chemically deposited copper, and manufacturer's standard organic protective coating applied to second glass surface to produce a coating system complying with FS DD-M-411. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Mirrored Glass Sizes: Cut mirrored glass to final sizes and shapes to suit Project conditions. B. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrored glass without marring visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in ntirrored glass. Mirrored Glass 08814. - 1 C. Mirrored Glass Edge Treatment: Treat edges as PART 3 - EXECUTION indicated below. 1. Flat polished edge. 3.1 PREPARATION 2. Seal edges of silvered mirrored glass after edge treatment to prevent chemical or at- A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written mospheric penetration of glass coating. installation instructions for preparation of substrates, including coating surfaces with 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable. A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 70 to 90 Shore A hardness. 3.2 GLAZING B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass A. General: Install mirrored glass units to comply coating and approved by mirrored glass with written instructions of mirrored glass manufacturer for use in protecting against silver manufacturer and with referenced GANA and deterioration at mirrored glass edges. NAAMM publications. Mount ntirrored glass C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, accurately in place in a manner that avoids produced specifically for setting mirrored glass distorting reflected images. by spot application, certified by both mirrored B. Mastic Spot Installation System: Install glass manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on mirrored glass units with mastic as follows: which mirrored glass will be installed. 1. Apply barrier coat to mirrored glass back- ing where approved in writing by manu- D. Extruded-Aluminum Top and Bottom Trim: J- facturers of mirrored glass and backing channels formed with a return deep enough to material. produce a glazing channel to accommodate 2. Apply mastic in spots to comply with ntirrored glass units of thickness indicated and mastic manufacturer's written instructions in lengths required to cover bottom edge of for coverage and to allow air circulation each mirrored glass unit in a single piece. between back of ntirrored glass units and 1. Available Products: Subject to compli- face of mounting surface. ance with requirements, products that may 3. After mastic is applied, aligu ntirrored be incorporated into the Work include, but glass units and press into place while are not limited to, the following: maintaining a minimum air space of 1/8 a. Bottom Trim Stylmark, Inc. #420068 inch between back of mirrored glass and Bottom J-Molding (S/16" exposed) mounting surface. b. Top Trim: Stylmark, Inc., #420107 C. For wall-mounted mirrored glass units, install Top J-Molding (S/8" exposed) permanent means of support at bottom and top c. Other acceptable manufacturers are: edges with bottom support designed to 1) C.R. Laurence Co., Inc. 2) Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc. withstand mirrored glass weight and top support 3) Approved substitute. desigued to prevent mirrored glass from coming d. Finish: Stylmark, Inc., #10 Buffed away from wall along top edges. 1. Attach mirror hardware securely to Brite Natural anodized finish. mounting surfaces with mechanical fas- E. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as teners installed with anchors or inserts as required for mirror hardware installation. applicable. Install fasteners so heads do Provide toothed or lead-shield expansion-bolt not impose point loads on backs of mir- devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide rored glass units. galvanized anchors and inserts for applications 2. Install bottom and top trim. Fabricate on inside face of e"'lerior walls and where trim in single lengths to fit and cover top indicated. and bottom edges of mirrored glass units. 3.3 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect ntirrored glass from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Mirrored Glass 08814. - 2 . 1. Do not pennit edges of silvered mirrored glass to be exposed to standing water. 2. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent silvered mirrored glass from being exposed to moisture from condensa- tion or other sources for continuous peri- ods of time. Wash mirrored glass not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date for Substantial Completion. Wash mirrored glass by methods recommended in NAAMM publication and in writing by mirrored glass manufacturer. Use water and glass cleaners free from substances capable of damaging mirrored glass edges or coatings. * END OF SECTION 08814. 02 47 - Norex, Inc. Mirrored Glass 08814. - 3 S CTION 09253 G PSUM SHEATHING P RT 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Glass-mat gypsum sheathing board. 2. Weather-resistant barrier Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 05400 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING for steel framing in- corporated into assemblies with gypsum sheathing on the exterior. 2. Section 07241 - EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEM for application of EFIS and EFS to sheathing board. 1. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Building Wrap: For air/moisture- infiltration protection, include data sub- stantiating compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store materials protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, or other causes. Stack sheathing flat on leveled supports off the ground, under cover, and fully protected from weather. 1. COORDINATION Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 1. Do not leave exposed to weather for more than 180 days. P RT 2 - PRODUCTS 2. GYPSUM SHEATHING 1. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1I 77. o 047 Norex, Inc. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with reqnirements, manu- facturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work in- clude, but are not limited to, the fol- lowing: 1) G-P Gypsum Corporation, "Dens-Glass Gold". 2) US Gypsum, "Aqua-Truff' 2. Type and Thickness: a. Regular, 1/2 inch thick. b. Type X. 5/8 inch thick. 2.2 WEATHER-RESISTANT BARRIER A. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air retarder. with flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes ofIess than 25 and 450 respectively, when tested according to ' ASTM E 84; and UV stabilized. 1. Available Products: Subject to compli- ance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not lintited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with re- quirements, provide one of the following: a. DuPont (E. 1. du Pont de Nemours and Company); Tyvek Commercial- Wrap or [HouseWrap b. Raven Industries, Inc.; Rufco-Wrap. c. Reemay, Inc.; Typar HouseWrap. d. Simplex Products; Barricade Building Wrap or Air Stop Housewrap. e. Tenneco Building Products; Amowrap Housewrap. f. Approved substitute. 2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing mannfacturer for thickness of sheathing board to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion- protective coating having a salt-spray resistanoe of more than 800 hours according to ASTMB 117. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Cut boards at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated. Gypsum Sheathing 09253 - 1 C. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed exterior wall assembly. D. Apply fasteners so screw heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing. E. Do not bridge building expansion joints with sheathing; cut and space edges to match spacing of structural support elements. F. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over flanges of steel studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Screw-attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards. 3.2 WEATHER-RESISTANT BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Cover sheathing with weather-resistant barrier as follows: 1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at ex- pansion- or control-joint locations. 2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap, unless otherwise indicated. B. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. . END OF SECTION 09253. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Gypsum Sheathing 09253 - 2 SECTION 09260 YPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES P RT 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum wallboard. 2. Tile backing panels. 3. Non-load-bearing steel framing. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 05400 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING for load-bearing steel franting. 2. Section 06105 - MISCELLANOUS CARPENTRY for wood furring and blocking. 3. Section 07210 - BUILDING INSULA nON for insulation and vapor retarders installed in gypsum board as- semblies. 4. Section 09253 - GYPSUM SHEATHING and air barrier for installa- tions over steel framing. 1. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire- Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indi- cated by desigu designations from UL's llFire Resistance Directory. " Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. STC-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by de- sigu designations from GA-600, "Fire Re- sistance Design Manual." Po e Architects Master Specification -x C. Gypsum Board Finish Mockups: Not applilcable. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contantination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Clark Steel Framing Systems. b. Dale Industries, Inc. - Dale/Incor. c. Dietrich Industries, Inc. d. National Gypsum Company. e. Unimast, Inc. f. Western Metal Lath & Steel Framing Systems. 2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. G-P Gypsum Corp. b. National Gypsum Company. c. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Components, General: As follows: 1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 2. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with manufacturer's standard corro- sion-resistant zinc coating. B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0239 -inch (20 gauge, uncoated) for all interior, non-bearing locations, except as noted be- low: Gypsum Board Assemblies 09269 - 1 a. 0.0239-inch (20 gauge, uncoated) for jamb and cripple studs at door and other openings. b. Exceeds height recommended by manufacture and ASTM c 74S. c. Designed partitions per Structural Engineer desigu. 0.0312 inch. 2. Depth: As indicated C. Proprietary Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of gypsum board applied to interior partitions resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Delta Star, Inc., Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). b. Metal-Lite, Inc.; Slotted Track. c. Approved substitute D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.OS38-inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1I2-inch- wide flange. 1. Depth: As indicated 2. Clip Angle: 1-112 by 1-1/2 inch, 0.068- inch-thick, galvanized steel. E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 64S. I. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As in- dicated 0.0312 inch 2. Depth: 1-1/2 inches, unless otherwise in- dicated. F. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep, steel sheet members desigued to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Hat shaped, with face at- tached to two flanges by slotted or ex- panded metal legs. G. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.OS3S-inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1I2-inch- wide flange. 1. Depth: 3/4 inch. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated- edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare steel thickness of 0.0312 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 64 I, Class I zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062S-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475- inch-diameter wire. H. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36. 1. Regular Type: S/S-inch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: S/S-inch, unless otherwise indi- cated. 2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630. I. Locations: All wet wall construction. In toilet rooms and shower drying areas, the entire area will receive WR-Board. 2. Core: S/S inch, Type X, unless y,-inch is required to blend into cement board at show enclosures. C. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9. 1. Location: All shower enclosures. 2. Available Products: Subject to compli- ance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Custom Building Products; "Won- derooard" . b. United States Gypsum Co.;t"DUROCK Cement Board". c. Approved substitute. 3. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 4. NOTE: Contractor's option; Glass-Mat Water-Resistant Backing Board, ASTM C 117S maybe substituted for cementitious backer board. a. G-P Gypsum Corp.; "Dens-Shield Tile Backer". Pope Architects Master Specification Xx-x Gypsum Board Assemblies 09269 - 2 2. TRIM ACCESSORIES Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet. a. Plastic will not be acceptable. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead: Use at outside comers. b. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside cor- ners and where indicated c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed panel edges d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long leg receives joint compound; use where indicated e. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated and recommended. 2. JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS General: Comply with ASTM C 475. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10- by-l0 glass mesh. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping and setting-type, sandable topping compounds. 2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by manufac- turer. 3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recom- mended by manufacturer. 2. ACOUSTICAL SEALANT Sealants: Reference Section 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS, for the following types(s) of sealants and their application at gypsum wall board assemblies. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not Iintited to, the following: Po e Architects Master Specification -x 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Con- cealed Joints; Nonsag, paintable, nostain- ing, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Sealant Type SLNT-30: a. Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints; Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, synthetic rubber ealant. Sealant Type SLNT -31: a. Ohio Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series SC- 170 Rubber Base Sound Sealant. b. Pecora Corp.; BA-98. c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. 2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Insulation Blankets: Reference Section 07210- BUILDING INSULATION for insulation types: 1. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Insulation Type INSUL-19. ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) pro- duced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 2. Therntal Blanket: Insulation Type INSUL-I0 and or INSUL-12. B. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: Reference Seetin 07210 - BUILDING INSULA nON for loose vapor retarder. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary franting, blocking, and bracing at terntinations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook." Gypsum Board Assemblies 09269 - 3 C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. 1. Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure. 2. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. Install slip-type joints at head of assem- blies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally support assembly. a. Use proprietary deflection track where indicated. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.2 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board assemblies abut other construction. B. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel franting and furring member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terntinate at suspended ceilings. Continue franting over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1. Cut studs 1/2 inch short of full height to provide perimeter relief. 2. For fire-resistance-rated and STC-rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other con- tinuous solid-structure surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members e"'lending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Terminate partition framing at sus- pended ceilings where indicated on drawings. D. Install steel studs and furring at the following spacings: 1. Single-Layer Construction: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Construction: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cementitious Backer Units: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. E. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. F. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 1. Install two studs at each jamb, unless oth- erwise indicated. 2. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. G. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match franting required above door heads. H. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: Insta11 to comply with requirements specified in Section 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION. 3.3 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216. B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Install ceiling board panels across franting to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one franting member. D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. Pope Architects Master Specification Xx-x Gypsum Board Assemblies 09269 - 4 Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back- blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c. Po e Architects Master Specification Xx-x 3.4 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS A. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to franting, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) , unless otherwise indicated or required by fire- resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. b. At stairwells and other high walls, in- stall panels horizontally, unless oth- erwise indicated or required by fire- resistance-rated assembly. B. Multilayer Application on Ceilings: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to franting members and offset face-layer joints 1 franting member, 16 inches ntinimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. C. Multilayer Application on PartitionsIWalls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base- layer joints, unless otherwise indicated ortrequired by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. D. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. E. Multilayer Fastening Methods: At fire- resistance-rated assemblies, fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. At non-fire-rated assemblies, the base layers maybe fastened with screws; and face layers fastened with adhesive and supplementary fasteners. F. Tile Backing Panels: 1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install at showers, tubs, and where indi- cated. Install with l/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetra- tions. Gypsum Board Assemblies 09269 - 5 2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Comply with manufacturer's writ- ten installation instructions and install at showers, tubs, and where indicated. Install with l/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. 3. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI AI08.11, at shower enclosures in- dicated to receive tile 4. Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install standard gypsum wallboard panels to pro- duce a flat surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to re- ceive water-resistant panels. 5. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in the same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. 3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints. C. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated: 1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assem- blies and sound-rated assemblies. 2. Level 2: Not used. 3. Level 3: Not used. 4. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint com- pound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. 5. LevelS: Not used. . D. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. . END OF SECTION 09260 . Pope Architects Master Specification Xx-x Gypsum Board Assemblies 09269 - 6 - ,-----------..----- S CTION 09310 C RAMIC TILE SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Ceramic floor and wall tile. 2. Quarry tile. 3. Crack-suppression membrane for thin-set tile installations. 4. Metal edge strips installed as part of tile installations. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for monolithic slab finishes specified for tile substrates. 2. Section 07920 - JOINT SEALANT for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces. 3. Section 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES for moisture resistant gyp- sum board, cementitious, and or glass- mat, water-resistant backer board. 1. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028: 1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6. 2. Step Treads: Minimum 0.6. 3. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8. 1. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. Samples for Verification: 1. Full-size units of each type and composi- tion of tile and for each color and finish required. 02 47 - Norex, Inc. 2. Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required, at least 12 inches square and mounted on rigid panel. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed work. 3. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish re- quired. 4. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths. 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Not applicable. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2,1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI AI37.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards referenced in "Setting and Grouting Materials" Article. C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where mannfacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements: 1. As listed under Tile Products. D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. E. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge- mounted tile assemblies unless tile manu- facturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance. Ceramic Tile 09310 - 1 2.2 TILE PRODUCTS A. Tile Types: Tile selections have been made and approved by the Owner based upon products shown on Drawings MATERIAL SCHEDULE and FINISH SCHEDULE. 1. Ceramic Tile drawing designation: CT-X 2. Porcelain Tile drawing designation: PCT- X. B. Tile Trim Units: Matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes, as needed or specified on the Drawing's MATERIAL SCHEDULE and FINISH SCHEDULE. 1. Base Cove: 2. Base Cap: 3. Wainscot Cap: 4. External Corners: 5. External Corners: C. Accessories for Wall Tile: Provide vitreous china accessories of type and size indicated, in color and finish to match adjoining wall tile, and intended for installing by same method as adjoining wall tile. 1. One soap holder with grab handle for each shower and tub indicated. 2.3 CRACK-SUPPRESSION MEMBRANES FOR THIN-SET TILE INSTALLATIONS A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI AI18.10. B. Crack Suppression Membrane: 1. Approved Manufacturer: a. Noble Company; "NobleSeal CIS". 0.03-inch nominal thickness (8mm). b. NAC Products; "ECB Anti-Fracture" self-bonding. 0.40 mils thickness. c. Approved substitute. 2. Location: a. All substrate cracks b. Substrate control and expansion joints. 2.4 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Bostik. 2. Custom Building Products. 3. DAP, Inc. 4. LATICRETE International Inc. 5. MAPEl Corporation. 6. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. 7. Summitville Tiles, Inc. S. TEC Specialty Products Inc. 9. Approved substitute, or as noted. B. Grout Material selections have been made and a.pproved by the Owner based upon products shown on Drawings' MATERIAL SCHEDULE and FINISH SCHEDULE. 1. Grout drawing designation: GT-XX. C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI AllS.4, consisting of the following: 1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene- rubber liquid-latex additive. a. For wall applications, provide non- sagging mortar that complies with Paragraph F-4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI AlIS.4. D. Standard Sanded Cement Grout: ANSI AlIS 6 color as indicated. For joints of lI8-inch and ' wider. E. Standard Unsanded Cement Grout: ANSI AllS.6, color as indicated. For joints of 1/8-inch and narrower. 2.5 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. General: Reference Section 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS 1. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Sealant Type, SLNT-24. a. ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as ap- plicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, 0; formulated with fungi- cide, intended for sealing interior ce- ramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in- service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures. 1) Products: (a) Dow Coming Corporation; Dow Coming 786. (b) GE Silicones; Sanitary 1700. (c) Pecora Corporation; Pe- cora S98 Sanitary Silicone Sealant. (d) Tremco, Inc.; Tremsil 600 White. B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints, unless otherwise indicated. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Ceramic Tile 09310 - 2 26 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 2.7 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement- referenced standards and mortar and grout based formulation provided or approved by manufacturers' written instructions. manufacturer of tile-setting materials for B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate installations indicated. proportions. B. Metal Edge Strips (Termination Bar and C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, Expansion Bar Joints): 1. Approved Manufacturer: ntixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, a. Ceramic Tool Company Inc., Wauke- and other procedures to produce mortars and sha, Wisconsin. grouts of urtiform quality with optimum b. Approved substitute. performance characteristics for installations 2. Metal Termination Bar: Provide anodized indicated. aluminum edge strips with liS-inch reveal at top edge and integral provision for an- PART 3 - EXECUTION chorage to substrate. Height to match tile thickness. 3.1 EXAMINATION a. Ceramic Tool Company Inc. product "CTC Edge" strip. A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions b. Finish to be selected. where tile will be installed, with Installer 3. Metal Expansion Bar Joint: Provide pre- present, for compliance with requirements for fabricated caulk joint consisting of two installation tolerances and other conditions solid extruded "L" angles with factory in- affecting performance of installed tile. stalled two part polyurethane sealant, I. Verify that substrates for setting tile are color to match grout joint color. Height to firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, match tile thickness. and curing compounds; and within flat- a. Ceramic Tool Company Inc. product ness tolerances required by referenced "CTC Joint" strip. ANSI A 108 Series of tile installation b. Finish to be selected. standards for installations indicated. C. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone 2. Verify that installation of grounds, an- product for sealing grout joints that does not chors, recessed frames, electrical and me- chanical units of work, and sintilar items change color or appearance of grout. located in or behind tile has been com- 1. Available Products: pleted before installing tile. a. Bonsai, W. R., Company; Grout 3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile sub- Sealer. b. Bostik; CeramaSeal Grout Sealer. strates are coordinated with tile joint loca- c. C-Cure; Penetrating Sealer 97S. tions; if not coordinated, adjust joint loca- d. Custom Building Products; Surface- tions in consultation with Architect. guard Sealer. B. Proceed with installation only after e. Jamo Inc.; Penetrating Sealer. unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. f. MAPEI Corporation; KER 003, Sili- cone Spray Sealer for Cementitious 3.2 PREPARATION Tile Grout; 004, Keraseal Penetrat- ing Sealer for Unglazed Grout and A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds Tile. and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, g. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; or silicone, that are incompatible with tile- Silicone, Grout Sealer. setting materials. h. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; SL-15, In- B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors visible Seal Penetrating Grout and installed with thin-set mortar that comply with Tile Sealer. flatness tolerances specified in referenced i. TEC Specialty Products Inc.; TA-256 ANSI AIOS Series of tile installation standards. Penetrating Silicone Grout Sealer. o 047 - Norex, Inc. Ceramic Tile 09310 - 3 1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching com- pound according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product specifically recommended by tile- setting material manufacturer. 2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample subntittals, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to mannfacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI AIOS Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligued joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fi"wres, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Layout tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints be- tween tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. F. Layout tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saW-aJt joints after installing tiles. 1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 2. Install metal edge expansion bar joints as specified. H. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards: I. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement; dry-set, commercial portland ce- ment; and latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI AI0S.I0. 1. At showers, tubs, and where indicated, install cementitious backer units and treat joints to comply with ANSI Al OS.lI and manufucturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. 3.4 CRACK-SUPPRESSION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install crack -suppression membrane to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate. 3.5 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI AI0S Series of tile installation standards. 1. Follow procedures in ANSI AIOS Series tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage. B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths: I. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch 2. Quarry Tile: 3/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated as ';' inch 02047 - Norex, Inc. Ceramic Tile 09310 - 4 " C. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. 3. WALL TILE INSTALLATION Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Wall Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI setting-bed standards. Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths: 1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch 2. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch 3. CLEANING AND PROTECTING Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile ac- cording to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of clean- ing. Flush surfaces with clean water be- fore and after cleaning. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. Before final inspection, remove protectivetcoverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. . END OF SECTION 09310. 02 47 - Norex, Inc. Ceramic Tile 09310 - 5 ECTION 09511 COUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS RT 1 - GENERAL 1 1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Coordinate Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following: 1. Ceiling suspension members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place an- chors, clips, and other ceiling attach- ment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections. 3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprin- klers, access panels, and special moldings. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch-square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12-inch-long Samples of each type, finish, and color. 1. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire- Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following sur- face-burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical prod- ucts per ASTM E 84. 02 47 - Norex, Inc. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fuJly enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefuJly to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HV AC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: One (1) fuJI, un-opened carton of each type of ceiling tile. 2. Suspension System Components: None. 3. Hold-Down Clips: None. Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09511 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. B. Ceiling Panel Types: Ceiling tile selections have been made and approved by the Ownerbased upon products shown on Drawings' MATERIAL SCHEDULE and FINISH SCHEDULE. 1. Ceiling Tile Drawing Designation: ACT- X 2.2 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 6411A 641M, Class 1 zinc coat- ing, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table I, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.135-inch-diameter wire. C. Hold-Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced 24 inches o.c. on all cross tees. 1. At all vestibules. 2. Other locations as designated in finish schedule. D. Metal Suspension System Types: : Suspension system selections have been made and approved by the Ownerbased upon products shown on Drawings' MATERIAL SCHEDULE and FINISH SCHEDULE. 1. Ceiling Tile Drawing Designation: ACG- X a. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, primer/topcoat system with a mini- mum dry film thickness of 0.8 to 1.2 mils 1) Color as selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 , per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook. " B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from con- tact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of sup- porting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceil- ings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter- splaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construc- tion within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with loca- tion of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system mem- bers, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to sup- port ceiling loads within performance lim- its established by referenced standards and publications. 4. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger in- serts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 6. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09511 - 2 Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from bnilding's structural members as reqnired for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast -in-place or postinstalled anchors. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at in- tervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, level- ing with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/S inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 2. Do not use e"'Posed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 2. For reveal-edged panels on snspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system members with box-shaped flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners. 4. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having ju- risdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufac- turer's written instructions, unless other- wise indicated. 5. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-resistance-rated assembly. 02 47 - Norex, Inc. 3.2 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. . END OF SECTION 09511 . Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09511-3 S CTION 09651 R SILlENT FLOOR TILE P RT 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl composition tile (VCT). Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 09678 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES for resilient wall base, reducer strips, and other acces- sories installed with resilient floor tile. 1. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of resilient floor tile required. Maintenance Data: For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals. 1. PROJECT CONDITIONS Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 02 47 - Norex, Inc. 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Floor Tile: Furnish not less than 1 box full, un-opened box for each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT TILE A. Resilent Flooring Types: Selections have been made and approved by the Owner based upon products shown on Drawings MATERIAL SCHEDULE and FINISH SCHEDULE. 1. Resilient Flooring drawing designation: VCT-XX. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other reqnirements specified in other Sections and that sub- strates are free of cracks, ridges, depres- sions, scale, and foreigu deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsat- isfactory conditions have been corrected. Resilient Floor Tile 09651 - 1 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTMF 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Per- form tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after sub- strates pass testing. 3. Moisture Testing: a. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installa- tion only after substrates pass testing. C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. I. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 TILE INSTALLATION A. Layout tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles in pattern indicated, if not indi- cated on drawings, verify with Architect for pattern of tiles with grain running in one direction. B. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings. C. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. D. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. E. Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of tile installed on covers. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. F. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufac- turer. 4. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and place- ment of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writ- ing by manufacturer. 5. Do not move heavy and sharp objects di- rectly over surfaces. Place hardboard or plywood panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. . END OF SECTION 09651 . 02047 - Norex, Inc. Resilient Floor Tile 09651 - 2 S CTION 09653 R SILIENT WALL BASE AND A CESSORIES P RT 1 . GENERAL 1. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Wall base. 2. Molding accessories at carpet and com- posite floor tiles. 1. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard- size Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. 1. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than SO deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). 1. PROJECT CONDITIONS Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C) in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Not applicable. PART 2 . PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Wall Base: Selections have been made and approved by the Owner based upon products shown on Drawings MATERIAL SCHEDULE and FINISH SCHEDULE. 1. Wall Base drawing designation: VB-X. 2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORIES (RM-1) A. Resilient Moulding Accessories: Selections have been made and approved by the Owner based upon products shown on Dmwings MATERIAL SCHEDULE and FINISH SCHEDULE. a. Moulding Accessories dmwing des- ignation: xxxxxxxxx. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, ponIand cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturers for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Exantine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that sub- strates are free of cracks, ridges, depres- sions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsat- isfactory conditions have been corrected. 02 47 - Norex, Inc. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories 09653 - 1 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates for Stair Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 71 O. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Per- form tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after sub- strates pass testing. 3. Moisture Testing: a. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installa- tion only after substrates pass testing. C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with insta1lation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. D. Do not stretch wall base during installation. E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. F. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips per- pendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cut- ting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where comer is formed. Shave back of base where neces- sary to produce a snug fit to substrate. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges offloor coverings that would otherwise be exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufac- turer. 4. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and place- ment of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writ- ing by manufacturer. . END OF SECTION 09653 . 02047 - Norex, Inc. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories 09653 - 2 S CTION 09680 C RPET P RT 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY This Section includes the folIowing: 1. RolI-goods carpet. Related Sections include the folIowing: 1. Section 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet. 1. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include instalIation recommendations for each type of substrate required. Samples: For each of the folIowing products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and desiguation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet: 12-inch- square Sample. 2. Carpet Seam: 6-inch Sample. 3. Mitered Carpet Border Seam: 12-inch- square Sample. Show carpet pattern alignment. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the folIowing: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recom- mended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to car- pet. 1. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 02 47 - Norex, Inc 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet mannfacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Not applicable. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET A. Carpet Types: Carpet selections have been made and approved by the Owner based upon products shown on Drawings MATERIAL SCHEDULE and FINISH SCHEDULE. 1. Carpet drawing designation: CPT-X 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided by or recommended by the folIowing: 1. Carpet manufacturer. 2. Carpet cushion manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that is recommended by the Carpet mannfacturer. C. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. D. Resilient Edge Strips: References Section 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES. Carpet 09680 - 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.3 INSTALLATION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8, "Direct Glue-Down A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for Installation. " compliance with requirements for maximum B. Stretch-in Installation: Comply with CRI 104, moisture content, alkalinity range, installation Section 11, "Stretch-in Installation." tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. VerifY that substrates and C. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written conditions are satisfactory for carpet instaIlation recommendations for seam locations and and comply with requirements specified. direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of B. Concrete Subfloors: VerifY that concrete slabs carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: I. Level adjoining border edges. 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other D. Do not bridge building expansion joints with materials that may interfere with adhesive carpet. bond. Determine adhesion and dryness E. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical characteristics by performing bond and surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in moisture tests recommended by the fol- furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, lowing: edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal a. Carpet manufacturer. cut edges as recommended by carpet b. Carpet cushion manufacturer. manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with require- ments specified in Division 3 Section F. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiv- closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable ing carpet. flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, de- G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and pressions, scale, and foreign deposits. openings that are in place or marked for future C. Proceed with installation only after cutting by repeating on finish flooring as unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. 3,2 PREPARATION H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION manufacturer's written installation instructions A. Perform the following operations immediately for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet installation. after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and B. Use trowelable leveling and patching other surface blemishes using cleaner rec- compounds, according to manufacturer's written ommended by carpet manufacturer. instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and 2. Remove yams that protrude from carpet depressions in substrates. surface. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial ma- and other substances that are incompatible with chine with face-beater element. adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or B. Protect installed carpet to comply with silicone, without using solvents. Use CRI 104, Section IS, "Protection ofIndoor mechanical methods recommended in writing Installations. " by the Carpet manufacturer. C. Protect carpet against damage from D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be construction operations and placement of covered immediately before installing carpet. equipment and fixtures during the remainder of After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, construction period. Use protection methods alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed indicated or recommended in writing by carpet with installation only after unsatisfactory manufacturer. conditions have been corrected. 02047 - Norex, Inc Carpet 09680 - 2 ,----- · END OF SECTION 09680. 02 47 - Norex, Inc Carpet 09680 - 3 S CTION 09720 LL COVERINGS P RT 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: I. Vinyl wall covering. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 09900 - PAINTING for prim- ing wall surfaces that receive wall cover- ings. 1. SUBMITTALS . Product Data: For each type of product - indicated. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of each wall-covering type. Indicate seamsand termination points. Samples for Verification: Full width by 36- inch-long section of wall covering from dye lot to be used for each type of wall covering indicated for each color, texture, and pattern required. I. Show complete pattern repeat. 2. Mark top and face of material. Schedule: For wall coverings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals. 1. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide wall coverings and adhesives with the following fue-test -response characteristics as detennined by testing identical products applied with identical adhesives to substrates per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As fol- lows, per ASTME 84: a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 02 47 - Norex, Inc. 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Not applicable. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL-COVERlNG PRODUCTS A. General: Provide rolls of each type of wall covering from the same run number or dye lot. B. Wall Covering Types: Wall covering selections have been made and approved by the Owner based upon products shown on Drawings MATERIAL SCHEDULE and FINISH SCHEDULE. 1. Vinyl Wall Covering drawing designa- tion: YWC-x. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, strippable adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate application, as recommended in writing by wall-covering mannfacturer. B. Seam Tape: As recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Exantine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew, oil, grease, incompatible primers, dirt, and dust. C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free offlaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an elec- tronic moisture meter. Wall Coverings 09720 - 1 2. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer rec- ommended by wall-covering manufac- turer. 3. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finishes with fine sandpaper. E. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. F. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at partition breaks and corners. C. Install strips in same order as cut from roll, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer to install reversing every other strip. D. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps, no lifted or curling edges, and no visible shrinkage. E. If applicable, match pattern 72 inches above the finish floor. F. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 3 inches from inside corners unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. No horizontal seams are permitted. G. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. H. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without any overlay or spacing between strips. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. D. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. . END OF SECTION 09720. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Wall Coverings 09720 - 2 I P RT 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY <. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following: 1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addi- tion to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the painting schedule indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedule does not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Exterior surfaces includes, but is not lim- ited to, field painting of Metal doors and frames; Miscellaneous fabricated metal items; Exposed structural and decorative steel. . 2. Interior Surfaces includes, but is not lim- ited to, field painting of Metal doors and frames; Miscellaneous fabricated metal items; Exposed structural and decorative steel; Exposed gypsum board walls and ceilings; Priming of gypsum board walls for vinyl wall covering; Exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers. Exposed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and other items of new construction. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. Prefinished architectural woodwork and casework. b. Acoustical wall panels. c. Metal toilet enclosures and accesso- ries. d. Metal lockers. e. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment, except as indicated. II SECTION 09900 PAINTING f. Light fixtures, clocks, diffusers, thermostats, switches and outlets, switchgear, distribution cabinets.. g. Hardware. h. Bulletin boards and marker boards. i. Prefinished aluminum windows and doors. j. Finished metal surfaces. k. Operating parts, including valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices; motor and fan shafts, sprin- kler heads. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceil- ings in the following generally inaccessi- ble spaces: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. c. Ceiling plenums. d. Utility tunnels. e. Pipe spaces. f. Duct shafts. g. And areas desiguated as "Un- finished" . h. Finished metal surfaces. 3. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 02740 - ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING for traffic marking paint. 2. Section OS120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL for shop priming structural steel 3. Section OSSOO - METAL FABRICATIONS for shop prirningfer- rous metal. 4. Section OSlIO - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES for shop priming steel doors and frames. 5. Section 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS for shop finishing. 6. Section 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES for surface preparation of gypsum board. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers. 02 47 - Norex, Inc. Painting 09900 - 1 ----.....--....-...-r--... --._-~._.._---- -- .-..... 1. Material List: An inclusive list of re- quired coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coat- ing, finish system, and application. Iden- tify each material by manufacturer's cata- log number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufac- turer's technical information, including la- bel analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating mate- rial. 3. Certification by manufacturer that prod- ucts supplied comply with local regula- tions controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). B. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actuaI conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. I. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application. 3. Submit samples on the following sub- strates for Architect's review of color and texture only: a. Concrete Masonry: Provide two (2) 4-inch by 8-inch samples of masonry, with mortar joint in the center, for each finish and color. b. Painted Wood: Provide two (2) 12- inch square samples of each color and material on hardboard. c. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two (2) 4-inch by 8-inch samples of natural-{lf stained wood finish on ac- tual wood surfaces. d. Ferrous Metal: Provide two (2) 4- inch square samples of flat metal and two (2) 8-inch long samples of solid metal for each color and finish. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C. Benchmark Samples (Mock-ups): Not required for this project. a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C). B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F (7 and 35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within tempera- ture limits specified by manufacturer dur- ing application and drying periods. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Paint Finishes: Not applicable. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 and Part 3 articles. 1. Paint and Stain Manufacturers: a. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore). b. Diamond Vogel c. ICI Paint Stores, Inc. (Dulux Paint) (formerly Glidden, Devoe, Fuller- O'Brien, Sinclair, Decratrend, Ameri- tone Paint Co.) d. PPG Industries, Inc. (pittsburgh Paints). e. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin- Williams). 02047 - Norex, Inc. Painting 09900 - 2 2. PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best- quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufac- turer's proprietary product names to des- iguate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certifi- cates of performance for proposed substi- tutions. Colors: Color selections have been made and approved by the Owner based upon products shown on Drawings MATERIAL SCHEDULE and FINISH SCHEDULE. Formulate colors to match Architect's samples indicated below or on Finish Schedule. Sub- nlit color "draw-downs" for review and final approval of Architect. 1. Paint Color designations: PT-x. P RT 3 - EXECUTION 3. EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4. 1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been cor- rected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as Ap- plicator's acceptance of surfaces and con- ditions within a particular area. 02 47 - Norex, Inc. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items re- moved using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Architect in writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish-coat material with substrates primed by others. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare con. crete, concrete unit masonry, cement pIas- ter, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove ef- florescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface prepara- tion. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as re- quired. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. Painting 09900 - 3 a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and panel- ing. c. If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior parti- tions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on back side. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized fer- rous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreigu sub- stances. Use solvent or mechanical clean- ing methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recom- mended by paint system manufac- turer. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents rec- ommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based sol- vents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as re- quired during application. Do not stir sur- face film into material. If necessary, re- move surface film and strain material be- fore using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recom- mended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. I. Paint colors, surface treatments, and fin- ishes are indicated in the paint schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes ar- eas visible when permanent or built-in fix- tures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar compo- nents are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain sys- tem integrity and provide desired protec- tion. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind perma- nently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and re- movable or hinged covers to match ex- posed surfaces. 8. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior. 9. Seal interior door top, bottom and side edges with same finish as door face. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Painting 09900 - 4 ~ 10. Finish exterior door top, bottom and side edges the same as exterior face of doors. 11. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of appli- cation method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as rec- ommended by mannfacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even sur- face according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uni- form finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, cor- ners' crevices, welds, and exposed fasten- ers receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not re- coat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pres- sure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appro- priate size for surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet- back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recom- mended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recom- mended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 02 47 - Norex, Inc, D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. F. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. G. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. H. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. I. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free oflaps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 1. Provide satin finish for final coats. J. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. K. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. Painting 09900 - 5 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL B. METALS.....Fabricated Ferrous (iron/steel) Owner reserves the right to invoke independent Metals: Handrails, Ballards, etc. A. testing procedure at any time and as often as I. EPS-lla, through EPS-13c: Not used. Owner deems necessary during the period when 2. EPS-13d: [P&L Spec. #219.02] Eggshell paint is being applied to verify compliance with (Latex Paint) Finish. specification and recommendations of paint a. 1 coat P&L Suprime 3 manufacturer. [Z/F1003] rust inhibiting primer b. 2 coats P&L Pro-Hide Gold Exterior B. Owner may direct Contractor to stop painting if House & Trim Finish [ZIF8500] Egg- test results show material being used does not shell Finish; sheen of 10-20 maxi- comply with specified requirements. mum at 85 Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint c. Colors: As selected. from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint 3. EPS-13e through EPS-20: Not Used surfaces previously coated with the noncomplying paint. If necessary, Contractor C. METALS.....Ga1vanized Coated Metals: may be required to remove noncomplying paint Hollow metal doors and frames, exposed from previously painted surfaces if, on structural lintels, etc repainting with specified paint, the two coatings 1. EPS-21, through, EPS-23c: Not used. are incompatible. 2. EPS-23d: [p&L Spec. #220.02] Eggshell 3.5 CLEANING (Latex Paint) Finish. a. 1 coat P&L Suprime 3 [ZIFI003] A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove primer, if item not shop primed empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded b. 2 coats P&L Pro-Hide Gold Exterior paint materials from Project site. Eggshell [ZIF8500]; Eggshell Finish; 1. After completing painting, clean glass and sheen of 10-20 maximum at 85 - paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spat- c. Colors: As selected. tered paint by washing and scraping with- 3. EPS-23e through EPS-30: Not Used. out scratching or damaging adjacent fin- D. METALS.....Aluminum Metals: Overhead ished surfaces. doors, Louvers, Downspouts and Gutters, Flashing, etc. 3.6 PROTECTION I. EPS-31a, through EPS40: Not used. A. Protect work of other trades, whether being E. MASONRY.....Concrete Masonry Block painted or not, against damage from painting. (CMU) Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or I. EPS41a, through EPS43e: Not used. replacing, and repainting, as approved by 2. EPS43d: [p&L Spec. #216.02 Eggshell Architect. (Latex Paint) Finish. a. 1 coat P&L Pro-Hide Plus [298] La- B. Provide "Wet Paint" sigus to protect newly tex Block Filler; tinted to match final painted finishes. After completing painting coat. operations, remove temporary protective b. 2 coats P&L Pro-Hide Gold Exterior wrappings provided by others to protect their Eggshell House & Trim [ZIF8500]; work. Eggshell Finish; sheen of 10-20 at 1. After work of other trades is complete, 85_. touch up and restore damaged or defaced c. Colors: As selected. painted surfaces. Comply with proce- 3. EPS44 through EPS-60: Not Used. dures specified in PDCA P 1. F. WOOD.....Doors, Windows, Sash Trim (paint 3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEM (EPS) finish) SCHEDULE: 1. EPS-61, through EPSA-70: Not used. A. The following exterior paint systems (BPS) are G. WOOD.....Fences, Siding, Soffits, Facias, based on products by Pratt & Lambert, and "Specialties" as listed; However other manu- Trims (stain finish) facturers as listed above, are acceptable: 1. EPS-71a: [P&L Spec. #221.10] Semi- Transparent Finish (Alkyd Stain) 02047 - Norex, Inc. Painting 09900 - 6 a. I coat P&L Stain Shield [C30097] Penetrating Oil Rustic. Sheen is Flat. 1) b. 2 coats P&L Stain Shield [C30097] Penetrating Oil Rustic Stain, on rough sawn or treated lumber. Sheen is Flat. c. Colors: As selected. 2. EPS-72 through EPS-80: Not Used. BITUMINOUS SURFACES.....Parking, traffic and handicap markings: 1. EPS-81: Not used. 2. EPS-S2a: Traffic and Handicap Markings a. Reference Section 02740- ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING. 3. INTERIOR PAINTING SYSTEM (IPS) CHEDULE The following interior paint systems (IPS) are based onproducts by Pratt & Lambert, and "Specialties" as listed; However other manufacturers as listed above, are acceptable. METALS.....Fabricated Ferrous (iron/steel) Metals: HandrailsHollow metal doors and frames, Structural items, Fabricated items, etc. 1. IPS-lla, through IPS-14c: Not used. 2. IPS-14c: [p&L Spec. #20S.02] Satin (La- tex Paint) Finish. a. 1 coat P&L Suprime 3 [ZlFI003] La- tex Metal Primer, if item not shop primed. b. 1 coat P&L Aqua Satin Enamel [ZIF2300]; Satin Finish. Sheen of 20-30 at 60_. c. Colors: As selected 3. IPS-15 through IPS-20: Not used. C. METALS.....Galvanized Coated & Aluminum Metals: Handrails, Hollow metal doors and frames, Louvers, Fabricated items, Trim, Exposed Ducts, Conduit, Etc. 1. IPS-21a, through IPS-24c: Not used. 2. IPS-24d: [P&L Spec #207.02] Eggshell (Latex Paint) Finish. a. 1 coat P&L Suprime 3[ZIFI003] La- tex Metal Primer, if item not shop primed. b. 2 coat P&L Pro-Hide Gold Interior [28200]; Eggshell Finish. Sheen of IS-26 at 850. c. Colors: As selected. 3. IPS-25 through IPS-40: Not used. D. MASONRY.....Standard Concrete Masonry Block Units (CMU): o 047 - Norex, Inc, 1. IPS-41a, through IPS-60: Not used. E. CONCRETE.....Cast-in-place concrete walls and precast walls and ceiling planks. 1. IPS-61a, through IPS-80: Not used. F. GYPSUM BOARD SURFACES: 1. IPS-81a, through IPS-S4c: Not used. 2. IPS-S4d: [P&L Spec. #205.02] Eggshell (Latex Paint) Finish a. 1 coat P&L Suprime 4 [ZIFI004] In- terior Latex Primer. b. 1 coat P&L Pro-Hide Gold [28200] Interior Latex. Eggshell Finish. Sheen of IS-26 at 85_. c. Colors: As selected 3. IPS-85 [p&L Spec. - Modified) Primer Under Vinyl Wall Covering. a. 1 coat P&L Suprime 5 [ZIFI005] La- tex Pre-Wallcovering Primer. 4. IPS-86 through IPS-90: Not Used. G. MILLWORK.....Wood doors, cabinets, trim work.. Stains 1. IPS-91a, through IPS-95: Not used. . END OF SECTION 09900. Painting 09900 - 7 S CTION 10350 F AGPOLES 02/01 P RT 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY This Section includes ground-set flagpoles made from aluminum [. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for concrete ~ootings for flagpoles. 2. Section 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS for elastomeric sealant filling the top of the foundation tube. 1. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Structural Performance: Provide flagpole assemblies, including anchorages and supports, capable of withstanding the effects of wind loads, determined according to NAAMMFP 1001, "Guide Specifications for Desigu of Metal Flagpoles. " 1. Base flagpole design on nylon or cotton flags of maximum standard size suitable for use with flagpole or flag size indi- cated, whichever is more stringent. 2. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph; 3-second gust speed at 33 feet aboveground. 1. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of flagpole required. Shop Drawings: Include elevations and details showing general arrangement, jointing, fittings and accessories, grounding, and anchoring and supporting systems. 1. Include details of foundation system for ground-set flagpoles. Finish Samples for Verification: For each finished material used for flagpoles and accessories. 1. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING General: Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy paper and enclose in a hard fiber tube or other protective container. o 47 Norex, Inc. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not lintited to the following: ' 1. American Flagpole; a Kearney-National Inc. Company. 2. Concord Industries, Inc. 3. Eder Flag Manufacturing Company, Inc. 4. Approved substitute 2.2 FLAGPOLES A. Flagpole Construction, General: Construct flagpoles in one piece if possible. If more than one piece is necessary, comply with the following: 1. For tapered flagpoles, provide flush hair- line joints using self-aligning, snug- fitting, internal sleeves. B. Exposed Height: 25 feet [ C. Aluminum Flagpoles: Provide cone tapered flagpoles fabricated from seamless extruded tubing complying with ASTM B 241, Alloy 6063, with a minimum wall thickness of 3/16 inch. Heat treat after fabrication to comply with ASTM B 597, Temper T6. D. Foundation Tube: Galvanized corrugated-steeI foundation tube, 0.064-inch-rninimumnorninal wall thickness. Provide with 3/16-inch steel bottom plate and support plate; 3/4-inch- diameter, steel ground spike; and steel centering wedges all welded together. Galvanize steel parts, including foundation tube, after assembly. Provide loose hardwood wedges at top of foundation tube for plumbing pole. 1. Provide flashing collar of same material and finish as flagpole. 2.3 FITTINGS A. Finial Ball: Manufacturer'sstandardflush-seam ball, sized as indicated or, if not indicated, to match flagpole-butt diameter. 1. 0.063-inch spun aluminum, finished to match flagpole. Flagpoles 10350 - 1 B. External Halyard: Ball-bearing, nonfouling, revolving truck assembly of cast metal with continuous 51l6-inch- diameter, braided polypropylene halyard and 9-inch cast-metal Cleats with fasteners. Finish exposed metal surfaces to match flagpole. 1. Provide one halyard and one cleat at each flagpole. C. Halyard Flag Snaps: Provide two chromium- plated bronze swivel snap hooks per halyard. 1. Provide with neoprene or vinyl covers. 2.4 FLAGS A. Provide one (1) cotton USA, 50 star flag, per flag pole, of maximum size for the flag pole design and specified structural performance reqirements. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3 000 psi. B. Sand: ASTM C 33, fine aggregate. C. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Single-component urethane [joint sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for Use NT (nontraflic) and for Use M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0 joint substrates. 2.6 FINISHES A. Aluminum: Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 1. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, direc- tional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare uncoated metal flagpoles that are set in foundation tubes by painting below-grade portions with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. B. Foundation Excavation: Excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove loose soil and foreigu matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete. C. Provide forms where required due to unstable soil conditions and for perimeter of flagpole base at grade. Secure and brace forms and foundation tube, sleeve, or anchor bolts in position, to prevent displacement during concreting. D. Place concrete immediately after mixing. Compact concrete in place by using vibrators. Moist -cure exposed concrete for not less than seven days or use nonstaining curing compound. E. Trowel exposed concrete surfaces to a smooth, dense finish, free of trowel marks, and uniform in texture and appearance. Provide positive slope for water runoff to perimeter of concrete base. 3.2 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install flagpoles where shown and according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Foundation-Tube Installation: Install flagpole in foundation tube, seated on bottom plate between steel centering wedges. Plumb flagpole and install hardwood wedges to secure flagpole in place. Place and compact sand in foundation tube and remove hardwood wedges. Seal top offoundation tube with a 2-inch layer of elastomeric joint sealant and cover with flashing collar. . END OF SECTION 10350. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Flagpoles 10350 - 2 S CTION 10431 SGNS P RT 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY This Section includes the following types of signs: 1. Panel signs. a. Interior Room Identification I Infor- mation Sigu required for Building Occupancy. 2. Post and Panel Signs. a. Exterior Traffic Control b. Handicap Parking. Signage not included in this Section are the following types of signs: I. Building monument signIY ard sign. 2. Interior room identification I information sigus. 3. Interior Directories and Bulletin Boards (illuminated and non-illuminated) 4. Interior Logo Sigu (dimensional letter) S. Mechanical and Electrical Identification Signs. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division IS - MECHANICAL for Mechanical Identification labels, tags, and nameplates for mechanical equipment. 2. Division 16 - ELECTRICAL for Electrical Identification labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment.; for power connection to illuminated signs, and exit sigus. 1. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of sigu. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show mounting methods, grounds, mounting heights, layout, spacing, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details. I. Provide message list for each sign, includ- ing large-scale details of wording, letter- ing, and braille layout. o 047 - Norex, Inc. C. Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for initial selection of color pattern and surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements indicated 1. Samples for Initial Selection of color, pat- tern, and texture. 2. Samples of interior panel signs, full size complete with indicated script. 3. Sample of exterior post and panel signs, including post and panel, complete with indicated script. 4. Approved samples will not be returned for installation into Project. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and with code provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANEL SIGNS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. I. Manufacturers of Panel Sigus (interior): a. ABC Bulletin and Directory, Division of Nelson-Harkins Industries. b. Architectural Graphics Inc. c. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. d. Best Manufacturing Co. e. Grimco, Inc. f. Mills Manufacturing g. Spanjer Brothers, Inc. h. Vomar Products, Inc. i. Approved substitute. B. General: Provide opaque plastic sheet signage, in sizes and thickness indicated, with silk- screen, subsurface script and pictorial symbol, and raised, ADA compliant Braille. 1. Material: a. Abrasion-Resistant-Coated Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802; Category A-I (cell-cast sheet); Finish 3 (abrasion- resistant coated); Type UV A (UV ab- sorbing); transparent, monolithic sheet with a luminous transmittance of 91 percent. Signs 10431 - 1 b. Mounting Tape: Double sided vinyl tape sheets for full-face coverage of sign. "Strip" tape will not be permit- ted. 2. Components: a. Unframed, Single-sheet Panels: O. 125-inch thick acrylic sheet. b. Interchangeable identification signs, where noted, of like material, with removable vinyl film with script im- printed. c. Edge Condition: Square cut. 1/4" radius only where noted. d. Facing: Single-sided siguage. e. Color: Clear, matte finish, acrylic sheet, oversprayed with opaque back- ground color, selected from mannfac- turer's standards. 1) Color of silk-screen script and pictorial, to be selected. 2) Color of overspray background, to be selected. f. Copy: (pictorial, Word and Braille) 1) Subsurface Copy: Apply copy to back face of clear acrylic sheet fornting the panel face by reverse silk-screen process indicated to produce precisely formed opaque images free from rough edges. Overspray copy with an opaque background color coating. 2) Tactile and Braille Copy: Pro- vide manufacturer's standard process for producing copy com- plying with AD A Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSIA1l7.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 braille g. Mounting Method: Adhesive Mount- ing Tape Sheets. Double sided vinyl tape to mount sigus flush to wall sur- face. Tape sheets will cover full face of sigu. "Strip" tape will not be per- mitted. C. Sigu Schedule: 1. Informational (Sign Type as noted be- low): a. Sigu Type "S-l" Script: MEN (l re- quired) with international pictorial "man" symbol and Braille script. b. Sign Type "S-2" Script: WOMEN (l required) with international pictorial "woman" symbol and Braille script. c. Sign Type "S-4" Script: HANDICAP ACCESSffiLE ENTRANCE (1 re- quired) with handicap symbol and braille script. 2.2 ALUMINUM POST AND PANEL SIGNS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not Iintited to, the manufacturers specified. 1. Manufacturers of Post and Panel Signs (exterior): a. ABC Bulletin and Directory, Division of Nelson-Harkins Industries. b. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. c. Best Manufacturing Co. d. Charleston Industries, Inc. e. Mills Manufacturing f. Spanjer Brothers, Inc. g. Vomar Products, Inc. h. Approved substitute. B. General: Aluminum panel sign, un-framed, mounted to aluminum extruded post, for direct- bnry into poured concrete pier, unless otherwise indicated per sigu type to be wall mounted. C. Material: 1. Aluntinum Sheet or Plate: Alloy and temper recommended by the aluminum producer and finisher for the type of used and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and durability properties speci- fied in ASTM B 209 for 5005-H15 alloy. 2. Vinyl Film: Opaque, nonreflective and reflective, where indicated, die-cut vinyl film, 0.0035-inch (0.09-mm) minimum thickness, with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing, suitable for both exterior and interior applications 3. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by the aluminum producer and finisher for the type of use and finish indicated, and wi th at least the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 221 for 6063-T5 alloy. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Signs 10431 - 2 4. Concrete for Post-Holes: Comply with reqnirements of Section 02520. Mix port- land cement complying with ASTM C 150, aggregates complying with ASTM C 33, and clean water to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi. Use at least 4 sacks of cement/cu. yd., I-inch maximum-size aggregate, maximum 3-inch slump, and 2 to 4 percent entrained air. 5. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabri- cated from metals that are not corrosive to the sigu material and mounting surface. 6. Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resis- tance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt device for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. Composition: 1. Single Panel: Aluminum sheet sign, not less than 0.090-inch thick, with vinyl film script, as indicated below, on one side, unless otherwise indicated. a. Edge Condition: Rounded. b. Mounting 1) Bolted to post. 2. Panel Finish: As indicated. a. Baked-Enamel Finish: Manufac- turer's standard baked enamel com- plying with paint mannfacturer's writ- ten instructions for cleaning, conver- sion coating, and painting. b. Size: As indicated, or required for script. 3. Frame: Un-framed 4. Aluminum Post Extrusion: Manufac- turer's standard 0.125-inch thick, not less than 2-inch square, extruded-aluminum tubing, with vertical slots to engage sign panels. Provide stop blocks in slots to hold panels in position. Include post caps, fillers, spacers, and other related accesso- ries required to complete installation. a. Post Finish: Baked enamel 5. Installation Methods: As indicated. a. Direct-Burial Method: Provide posts 36-inches longer than height of sigu to permit direct embedment in con- crete pier foundation. 1) Concrete: As specified. E. Schedule: 1. Aluminum Single-Panel Sigus on Single Post: a. Sigu Type "S-20" Script: VEHICLE 1.D. REQUIRED; UP TO $200.00 FINE FOR VIOLATION. (3 required). State ap- proved script with symbol. Color of white letters, symbol and boarder, with non-glare blue background. b. Sigu Type "S-21" Script: VAN ACCESSIBLE (I required). State approved script. Color of blue or black letters and boarder, with non- glare white background. c. Sigu Type "S-22" Script: STOP (2 required) State approved script. 6- sided. Color of white reflective let- ters and board with non-glare red background. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sigu surfaces free from distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Interior Wall Mounted Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indi- cated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door. B. Interior Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: 1. At door Locations: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sigu without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door. 2. Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using methods indicated below: 02 47 - Norex, Inc. Signs 10431 - 3 a. Vinyl-Tape Mounting: Use double- sided foam tape (full sheets for full- face coverage of sign) to mount sigus to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces. "Strip" tape will not be permitted. 3. Where panel sigus are scheduled or indi- cated to be mounted on glass, provide matching plate on opposite side of glass to conceal mounting materials. C. Exterior Post and Panel Sign: 1. Excavate hole to a minimum diameter recommended by sigu manufacturer, but at least 4 times the largest post cross- section and to a depth approximately equal to frost or 48-inches. 2. Set all post in concrete pier of size indi- cated above. 3. Panel sign mounting method as recom- mended by manufacturer. 4. Provide cap to post. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect sigus from damage until acceptance by Owner. . END OF SECTION 10431 . 02047 - Norex, Inc. Signs 10431 -4 S CTION 10520 FI"E-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES P RT 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY ('. This Section includes fire extinguisher assemblies (FE) of the following type: 1. FE-I: Not used. . 2. FE-2: Semi-recessed fire extinguisher cabinets, with designated extinguisher. 3. FE-3: Not used. . 4. FE-4: Wall bracket mounted fire extin- guishers. Exposed. p. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 10990 - MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES for fire department key lock box. 1. SUBMITTALS 1" Product Data: Shop Drawings: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire- protection specialties. 1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. 2. Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimen- sions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surround- ing construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. .. Samples: As requested by Architect 1. QUALITY ASSURANCE NFP A Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFP A 10, "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers." Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authonl1es haVIng jurisdiction. 1. Provide extinguishers listed and labeled byFM. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements of ASTM E S14 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not lintited to, the following: 1. Portable Fire Extinguishers: a. Ansul Incorporated. b. J.L. Industries, Inc. c. Kidde: Walter Kidde, The Fire Ex- tinguisher Co. d. Modem Metal Products; Div. of Technico. e. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. f. Watrous; Div. of American Special- ties, Inc. g. As listed. 2. Fire-Protection Cabinets: a. J.L. Industries, Inc. b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. c. Modern Metal Products; Div. of Technico. d. Watrous; Div. of American Special- ties, Inc. e. As listed. 2.2 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. General: Specification is based on Larsen's Manufacturing Company, unless otherwise indicated. Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each cabinet and other locations indicated. B. Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical Units: Larsen models. Fluidized and siliconized mono ammonium phosphate powder which smothers and breaks the chain reaction on Class B fires, fuses and insulated Class A fires, and is a non- conductor of electricity. 1. Type MP 10: 10 lb capacity, (171b wt), UL Rating 4A.oOB:C, [5" dia, 20" ht, 7" width] 2.3 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINETS A. Cabinet Construction: Provide mannfacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. 1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Not required. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. B. Cabinet Type: 02b47 - Norex, Inc. Fire Protection Specialties 10520.1 -.--------.-1---.---..---------. .--. 1. FE-I; Recess Mounted Cabinets with Ex- tinguisher: Not used. 2. FE-2; Semi-Recess Mounted Cabinets with Extinguisher: a. Cabinet: Larsen's "Architectural Se- ries" Model SS-2409-6R. Cabinet box fabricated of cold-rolled steel construction with white baked acrylic enamel finish. Stainless steel cabinet trim has a 2-1/2" rolled-edge return. Solid door panel with continuous pi- ano hinge and "wire" pull handle. Die cut door lettering, in vertical block letter script of FIRE EXTINGUISHER. Cabinet size: 24" high x 9-112" wide x 6" deep. 1) Cabinet door, Larsen's "Vertical Duo". Stainless steel finish. . 2) Field apply door lettering, after cabinet door is field painted. 3) Locations: As indicated on drawings. Typically all finished areas. 4) Finish: 304 stainless steel, with #4 finish. b. Fire Extinguisher Type: Provide specified Type: 1) Type "MP 10" multi-purpose. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with mannfacturer's written instructions for installing fire-protection specialties. B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Prepare recesses for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 2. Fasten mounting brackets to structure and cabinets, square and plumb. 3. Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. . END OF SECTION 10520. 3. FE-3; Surface Mounted Cabinets with Extinguisher: Not used. 4. FE-4; Exposed Wall Bracket Mounted Extinguisher: a. Cabinet: None. b. Bracket: Larsen's Model B-2, for ex- posed surface mounting of extin- guishers. c. Locations: Mechanical rooms. d. Fire Extinguisher Type: Provide specified Type I) Type "MP 10" multi-purpose. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable franting depth and blocking where recessed and semirecessed cabinets are to be installed. B. Exantine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. I. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Fire Protection Specialties 10520 - 2 S CTION 10725 F BRIC AWNINGS P RT 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY This Section for a fixed metal framed, fabric awning system and includes, but not limited to the following: 1. Contractor desigued framing system, in- cluding necessary connections and fasten- ers required for complete installation. 2. Specified fabric. 3. Installation of complete awning system. 1. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A fixed, franting system of round tubing or piping, with stretched fabric. Desigu Requirements: 1. Live load of the awning of not less than 20 psf. 2. Anchoring system offrame system to structure shall meet design wind loads and support weight of canopy and any super- imposed live loads. 3. Comply with all city requirements and ordnances regarding mounting heights over public walkways. 1. SUBMITTALS Product Data: 1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Certified test reports indicating compli- ance with specified performances. 4. Manufacturer/Fabricators Warranty. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general construction, specified modifications, components connections, anchorage methods, hardware and installation procedures. Samples: I. Submit tow (2) samples offabric material, not less than 24-inch by 24-inch, but large enough to show complete pattern, ifany. 2. Submit one (1) 12-inch long section of franting member(s), with specified finish. Maintenance Procedures: Submit as Owner's manual, complete maintenance procedures for the care of the fabric. 1.4 QUALlLTY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Not less than 5 years experience in the actual production of specified products. B. Installer's Qualifications: A firm with not less tha 5 years experience in installaiton of systems similar in complexity to those reqnired for this Project and is acceptable to or licenlsed by the fabric manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FABRIC A. Polyester/Cotton Fabric: 1. Astrup "Starfire" or approved equal. a. Acrylic top-coated polyester/cotton fabric. b. 15 oz/sq. yd. c. Mildew and water resistant d. Opaque. e. Flame retardant. 2. Color: To be selected from manufac- turer's standard "solid" colors. 2.2 FRAME MATERIALS A. Steel Frame: Cold rolled steel pipe frame, with interior corrosion resistant coating and hot- dipped uniform zinc galvanzied coating on exterior of frame. Paint finish with a clear organic topcoat. 1. Manufacturer: Allied Tube & Conduit; Flo-Coat corrosion system. B. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Bolts, nuts, washers, and other fasteners shall be of type and size deterimined by fabricator to comply with Project requirements and conditons. Items sha1l hot-dip galvanized or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel, in finish to match frame. 02 47 - Norex, Inc. Fabric Awnings 10725 - 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall comply with manufactuer's recommendations to meet project requirements. B. Erect frame straigth, true, and plumb, with tight and clean joints and connections. Remove any burrs and sharp edges and connections that could damage fabric or installers. C. Attach fabric to frame in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations, providing adequate anchorage to prevent loosenig or slippage. . END OF SECTION 10725. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Fabric Awnings 10725 - 2 S CTION 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES P RT 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Toilet and bath accessories. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 08814 - MIRRORED GLASS for frameless mirrors. 2. Section 09310 - CERAMIC TILE for ceramic toilet and showeraccessories. 1. SUBMITTALS .". Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses, dimensions, profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for each type of accessory specified. ::I. Setting Drawings: For cutouts required in other work; include templates, substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring devices. :. Product Schedule (Shop Drawings): Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. Use designations indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule and room designations indicated on Drawings in product schedule. D. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division I. Provide lists of replacement parts and service recommendations. 1. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Accessory requirements, including those for materials, finishes, dimensions, capacities, and performance, are established by specific products indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule. 1. Products of other manufacturers with equal characteristics, as judged solely by Architect, may be provided. 2. Do not modifY aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Archi- tect's approval. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explana- tory data to Architect for review. PART 2 . PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, rnannfacturers offering accessories that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Toilet and Bath Accessories: a. Bobrick Washroom Eqnipment, Inc. b. Bradley Corporation. c. As listed. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No.4 finish (satin), in 0.03 12-inch minimum nomiual thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Brass: ASTM B 19, leaded and unleaded flat products; ASTM B 16, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; ASTM B 30, castings. C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366, cold rolled, commercial quality, 0.0359-inch minimum nominal thickness; surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish. D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, 060. E. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service), nickel plus chromium electrodeposited on base metal. F. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class I, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FS DD-M-411. G. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. H. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed. Toilet and Bath Accessories 10801 - 1 2.3 FABRICATION 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. General: One, maximum I -1/2-inch-diameter, A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as operation and verify that mechanisms function approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed properly. Replace damaged or defective items. face of accessories. On interior surface not B. Remove temporary labels and protective exposed to view or back surface of each coatings. accessory, provide printed, waterproofIabel or Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's C. name and product model number. manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Framed Glass-Mirror Units: Fabricate frames 3.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORY for glass-mirror units to accommodate glass SCHEDULE edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that permits rigid, A. Soap Dispensers - Counter-Top Mounted: tamper -resistant glass installation and prevents Piston-and-spout unit with minimum 16-oz. moisture accumulation. Capacity, polyethylene reservoir concealed 1. Provide galvanized steel backing sheet, below deck; brightly polished stainless-steel not less than 0.034 inch and full mirror piston and 4-inch-Iong spout; and chrome- size, with nonabsorptive filler material. plated deck escutcheon. Provide one per sink Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable or as shown, which ever is greater. filler material. 1. Bobrick: Model B-822. C. Mirror-Unit Hangers: Provide mirror-unit 2. Bradley: 6304-68 (32 oz). mounting system that permits rigid, tamper- and B. Toilet Tissue Holders: Double roll dispenser, theft-resistant installation, as follows: without controlled delivery, surface mounted. I. One-piece, galvanized steel, wall-hanger Provide one per water closet. device with spring-action locking mecha- 1. Bobrick: Model B-2740. nism to hold mirror unit in position with 2. Bradley: 5241-50 no exposed screws or bolts. C. Plate Mirrors: Reference Section 08814- D. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal MIRRORED GLASS. access to accessories for servicing and D. Framed Mirrors: Stainless-Steel, Angle- resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Framed Mirror, fabricated from miti.imum Owner's representative. nominal 0.05-inch-thick stainless-steel angles, with square corners mitered, welded, and PART 3 - EXECUTION ground smooth. Concealed hangers. !I.-inch polished float mirror glass conforming to 3.1 lNST ALLA TION ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quallity q2 , nominal 6.0 mm thick, with silvering, A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' electroplated copper coating, and protective written instructions, using fasteners appropriate organic coating complying with FS DD-M-411. to substrate indicated and recommended by unit Size shown on drawings. manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and 1. Bobrick: Series B-290. firmly anchored in locations and at heights 2. Bradley: Model 780. indicated. E. Grab Bars: I -li2-inch outside diameter B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper- stainless-steel, ofntinimum 0.05-inch thickness, resistant manner with special hangers, toggle with satin finish and safety grip. Concealed bolts, or screws. Set units level, plumb, and mounting. Sizes and shapes as shown on square at locations indicated, according to drawings. Bars to provide l-li2-inch clearance manufacturer's written instructions for substrate between bar and wall. indicated. 1. Bobrick: Series B-6806-99. C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load 2. Bradley: Series 812-2. of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to F. Paper Towel Dispenser: By Owner. method in ASTM F 446. Toilet and Bath Accessories 10801 - 2 Paper Towel Dispenser (Surface): Surface wall mounted unit with stainless steel finish. Dispenses 400 C-fold or 525 multifold paper towels. Provide one in kitchen area. 1. Bobrick: Model B-262. 2. Bradlely: Model 250-15. Feminine Napkinffampon Vendor (Surface): Not applicable. 6-1/2" unit depthMop Strip: Stainless steel finish with spring activated rubber cams on plated steel retainer. 1. Bobrick: Model B-223 x 36-inch or size noted. 2. Bradley: Model 9954 x 36-inch or size noted. Towel Bars: 1-1/4-inch outside diameter stainless-steel, of minimum 0.05-inch thickness, with satin, smooth finish. Concealed mounting. Sizes as shown on drawings. Bars to provide 1- 112-inch clearance between bar and wall. 1. Bobrick: Model B-550? 2. Bradley: Model 832. Robe Hooks: Nickel plated, chrome finish, double robe hook. 1. Bobrick: Model B-819. 2. Bradley: Model 932. Shower Rod: I-inch diameter, standard duty, stainless steeel rod, fabricated form nontinal 0.0375-inch thick stainless steel. End plates with exposed fasteners. 1. Bobrick: Model B-6107 2. Bradley: 953. Shower CurtainIHooks: White vinyl, .OOS-inch thick, nickel plated brass gromments - 6-inches o.c. ,hemmed bottom and side seams. Size 12- inches wider than opening by 72-inches high. 1. Bobrick: 204-2 curtain with 204-1 curtain hooks 2. Bradley: 9537 curtain with 9536 curtain hooks. Folding Shower Seat: "L" shaped, solid phenolic slat seat, 32-inches wide by 22-inch deep by 3-l/2-inch thick. Stainless teel frame and mounting bracktes. 1. Bobrick: Model B-51S1 (left hand seat); B-5171 (right hand seat) 2. Bradley: Model 9565 (left hand seat); 9566 (right hand seat) Solid plastic seat. Stainless Steel Shelves: 5-inches wide shelf of IS ga., type 304 stainless steel, 'I.-inch front hemmed, brackets 16 ga. One piece length: 36- inch 1. Bobrick: B-295 (5-inch wide) 2. Bradley: 755 (5-inch wide) . END OF SECTION 10801. Toilet and Bath Accessories 10801 - 3 S :CTION 10990 M SCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES P RT 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY 1\.. This Section includes the following: 1. Fire department lock box. 2. Coat hooks 1. SUBMITTALS fl.. Product Data: For each product specified. tl. Schedule: Submit a schedule, to show quantity and location, using the same room designations indicated on the Drawings for the following specialty products. Any necessary blocking required shall be indicated by supplier. 1. Coat hooks. t. Samples for Verification: Submit for the following specialty products: 1. Coat Hooks: Two (2) samples Of each product type specified, in finish specified. P RT 2 - PRODUCTS 2. FIRE DEPARTMENT LOCK BOX !\.. Available Manufacturers/Products: Subject to approval of local Fire Marshall. 1. Dama Metal Products Inc. a. Recessed Mounted Model: Dama Model R3 Recessed Mounted Heavy Duty Key Box with tamper switches and Through-the-Wall Mounting Kit. 2. Knox Company. a. Recessed Mounted Model: Knox Model 3200-RTS Recessed Mounted Heavy Duty Key Box with tamper switches and Model 3200-RMK Re- cessed Mounting Kit. ~. Product: 1. Quantity: One. 2. Type: Recess Mounted. 3. Color: Mill finish. 2. COAT HOOKS 1\. Available ManufacturerslProducts: 1. Raymond Engineering, Inc (REI), Model #901, Clear anodized finish. 1-112" wide x 2-112" projection. 2. Approved substitute B. Product: 1. Quantity: As indicated on drawings. 2. Locations: At all private offices.; At all bathroom toilet stall doors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and written installation instructions. Sequence and approved shop drawings. Loacte as indicated on drawings. 3.2 FIRE DEPARTMENT LOCK BOX A. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, the location of the lock box, shall be as directed by the local Fire Marshall. Mounting method and height according to manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. B. Coordinate tamper switch with electrical contractor. 3.3 COAT HOOKS A. Door mount, at all private offices, and where indicated, at height indicated or as directed by the Architect. . END OF SECTION 10990. 0; 047 - Norex, Inc. Miscellaneous Specialties 10155-1 . --.. .....---. ....-......----.... --..--.... -..--"-'----'" S CTION 12484 F OOR MATS AND FRAMES P RT 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Roll-up aluminum linked, carpet-tread floor mats, surface mounted, no frame. Sections include the following: 1. Section 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for concrete work, and fin- ishing concrete floor slabs. 2. Section 09310 - CERAMIC TILE for floor finish at entrance mat. 1. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Include manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions, construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of floor mat and frame specified. Shop Drawings: For floor mats and frames. Show assembly, joint locations, installation details, layout, plans, elevations, sections, details of patterns or desigus, accessories, anchors, and attachments to other Work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor mat and frame indicated. Maintenance Data: For cleaning and maintaining floor mats to include in maintenance manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Accessibility Requirements: In addition to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, provide installed floor mats that comply with Section 4.5 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." o 047 - Norex, Inc, 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of oversized recesses in concrete work to receive floor mats and frames. Defer frame installations until building enclosure is completed and related interior finish work is in progress. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. B. Coordinate integral installation of recessed frames and anchors with placing of concrete slab so frames are positioned accurately. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: I. Roll-up Aluminum Rail Hinged Mats: a. Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc. "Model 650". b. Balco, Inc. Model "FMC-R". c. Construction Specialties, Inc. "Pedi- mat", d. 1. L. Industries, Inc. "lL-SOO". e. Metallines, Diy'. OfBalco, Inc. Model "MMC-R". f. Pawling Corporation. Model "EM- 570". g. Reese Enterprises, Inc. Model "546". 2.2 METAL FRAME MATERIALS A. Not applicable. 2.3 FLOOR MATS A. Roll-up Aluminum Rail Hinged Mats: Clear- anodized finish, extruded-aluminum tread rails sitting on continuous vinyl cushions with 2- inch- wide by 3/S-inch-thick, tread rail modules. Provide aluminum hinges and [1/4- inch-high, 2S-oz./sq. yd. weight, level-cut, nylon-pile, fusion-bonded carpet tread inserts. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Where possible, verify sizes by field measurement before shop fabrication. Floor Mats and Frames 12484 - 1 B. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes as indicated. If not otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints. C. With manufacturer's standard protective coating, coat surfaces of aluminum frames that will contact cementitious material. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-MI2C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chentical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating O.OIS mm or thicker) complying with AAMA611. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Exantine floor conditions, and floor recesses for compliance with requirements for location, sizes, and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats and frames. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's written instructions at locations indicated; coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns. 3.3 PROTECTION A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion. B. Defer installation of floor mats until Project is near Substantial Completion. . END OF SECTION 12484. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Floor Mats and Frames 12484 - 2 S CTION 12491 H RIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS P RT 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY This Section includes the following types of venetian blinds and accessories: 1. Miniblinds with aluminum louver slats. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 0610S - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY for wood blocking and grounds for mounting horizontal louver blinds and accessories. 1. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles. features, finishes, and operating instructions. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of horizontal louver blinds. Include elevations, sections, details, and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details, mountings, attachments to other Work, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining work. Samples for Verification: For the following products, prepared on Samples from the same material to be used for the Work. 1. Louver Slat: Not less than 12 inches long. 2. Valance: (If specified) Full-size unit, not less than 12 inches wide. 3. Cornice: Full-size unit, not less than 12 inches wide. Window Treatment Schedule: Include horizontal louver blinds in schedule using same room designations indicated on Drawings. 1. Maintenance Data: For horizontal louver blinds to include in maintenance manuals. 1. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet and dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. o 047 - Norex, Inc. 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Not applicable. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Horizontal Louver Blinds, Aluminum Louver Slats: a. Comfortex Window Fashions. b. Hunter Douglas Window Fashions. c. Levolor Contract; a Newell Com- pany; Levolor. d. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc.; Bali. e. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc.; Graber. f. Verosol USA, Inc. B. Louver Slats: Aluminum, alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish indicated; with crowned profile and radiused comers. 1. Nominal Slat Width: 1 inch for minib- linds. 2. NorninaI Slat Thickness: Not less than O.OOS inch. 3. Slat Finish: One color as selected from manufacturers full range of colors. C. Headrail/Valance: Decorative, integrated headraillvalance not requiring a separate valance or end brackets for finished appeanmce; formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; fully enclosing operating mechanisms on three sides and ends. 1. Finish Color Characteristics: Match color, texture, pattern, and gloss of louver slats Bottom Rail: Formed-steel or extruded-aluminum tube, sealed with plastic or metal capped with enclosed and protected ladders and tapes to prevent their contact with sill. E. Tilt Control: Consisting of enclosed worm gear mechanism and linkage rod, for the following operation: 1. Tilt Operation: Manual with clear plastic wand 2. Length of Tilt Control: Full length of blind Tilt: Full. Horizontal Louver Blinds 12491 - 1 F. Lift Operation: Manual, cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind at any position in ascending or descending travel. G. Tilt-Control and Cord-Lock Position: To be confirmed on shop drawings, unless otherwise indicated. H. Ladders: Evenly spaced to prevent long-term louver sag. 1. For Blinds with Nominal Slat Width I Inch or Less: Braided string. I. Mounting: Within window frame jambs mounting permitting easy removal and replacement without damaging blind or adjacent surfaces and finishes; with spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment indicated. 1. Provide intermediate support brackets if end support spacing exceeds spacing rec- ommended by manufacturer for weight and size of blind. 2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS FABRICATION A. Product Standard and Description: Comply with A WCMA Document 1029, unless otherwise indicated, for each horizontal louver blind designed to be self-leveling and consisting oflouver slats, rails, ladders, tapes, lifting and tilting mechanisms, cord, cord lock, tilt control, and installation hardware. B. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-<:oated materials. 1. Lifting and Tilting Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts. e. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F : 1. Blind Units Installed between (Inside) Jambs: Width equal to 1/4 inch per side or 1/2 inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. Length equal to 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than head-to-sill dimension of opening in which each blind is in- stalled. D. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of blind, for supporting headrail, valance, and operating hardware, and for hardware position and blind mounting method indicated. E. Installation Fasteners: Not fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to blind hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use. F. Color-Coated Finish: 1. Metal: For components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked fin- ish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and ntinimum dry film thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND INSTALLATION A. Install blinds level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located. Install intermediate support as required to prevent deflection in headrail. Allow clearances between adjacent blinds and for operating glazed opening's operation hardware, if any. B. Flush Mounted: Install blinds with louver edges flush with finish face of opening if slats are tilted open. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean blind surfaces after installation, according to mannfacturer's written instructions. 02047 - Norex, Inc. Horizontal Louver Blinds 12491 - 2 Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. Replace damaged blinds that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. . END OF SECTION 12491 . o 047 - Norex, Inc. Horizontal Louver Blinds 12491 - 3 FilE COpy July 10, 2002 Norex Attention: Tom Ditty 15815 Franklin Trail SE Prior Lake, MN 55372 RE: Norex Site Plan Dear Mr. Ditty: The City of Prior Lake has completed its review of the site plan application for the new Norex office building on Cottonwood Lane. . This letter serves as the official notice of approval of the site plan for this addition. Attached is an approved set of plans for your files. Approval of this site plan is subject to the following conditions: 1. The addition must be constructed as shown on the approved plans. If you have any questions, please contact me at the Planning Department at 952-447- 9810. SincerelYa. ~ Jane Kansier, AICP Planning Coordinator Enclosures: 1. Approved Plans c: Nathan Miesen, Pope Architects DRC Members 1:\02files\02siteplan\norexlapproval.doc Page 1 16200 agle Creek Ave. S.E.. Prior Lake. Minnesota 55372-1714 / Ph. (952) 447-4230 / Fax (952) 447-4245 AN EQUAL OPPORTCNITY E:v1PLOYER c 12: 21 PM POPE ASSOClATES iNC ')2. -c :5~- NO. 4522 P 1/7 J ,"" 1\, ,_ '" ~, POPE ASSOCIATE:S Today s Date 7- ~-rpz.. 1255 Energy Parle Drive St. Paul, Minnesota 55108.5118 PHONE [6511 642 9200 FAit (651] 642 1101 FAX RANSMITTAL ~o: ---- - . ~Z' ...---It;;;;.l.T~--- --- - ~ . -end~~.- 'Hi' -"-'--"p"'--R,~~~"-'-- .--.-. z.-t,..L -" .~CJ .--fv,.~,... -___+_... .:ti1A'C\. .__."_u___ _____ ~~ . ttJr{f:./;;;"'~=-';3. r-~~~<>lU:f ~,=~- -._-- .--. -- -------- .-_-.__E_.__L___. __.m ___n=l__~ AL TO FOLLOW BY MAIL: Remarks: F-~ ~'I\e. Signed: ~~;z~ G;\FORMS al( Cov=heeLdoc " 12: 21 PM POPE ASSOCIATES INC NO. 4522 P. 2/7 POPE ASSOCIATES Architects Jut 08, 2002 Interior Dffsigners Ro ert Hutchins Bui ding Official Ci of Prior Lake 16 00 Eagle Creek Ave. S. E. Prj r Lake, MN 55372 Re Responses to Preliminary Plan Review Letter Dated June 14, 2002 Norex Office Building 15505 Cottonwood Lane Prior Lake, Minnesota PAl Proigct 41400-02047 De r Robert, Th following items are responses to the Preliminal)l Plan Review Comments dated Ju e 14, 2002. (Attached for Reference) 4. Energy Envelope Calculations will be submitted at a future date via the design build Mechanical contractor. 9. A signed Special Structural Testing and Inspections Schedule will be delivered by Norex. 11. Draft-stops have been provided as per attachment PR2-A 1 12. Revised ventilation specifications and calculations for each of the attic spaces have been indicated as per attachment. 16. An attic access door detail has been provided as per attachments PR2-A2 17. Clarification of the extends of the ridge vent and draft stops has been prOVided as per attachment PR2-Al 18. Doors 122A and 1668, which access the North and South Maintenance Areas, shall have signage located on the door that reads: "Service Personnel Only". Th above-mentioned responses are accompanied by the following attachment: Re ised Net Free Ventilation Area Calculations (Dated 7/08/02) Ar hitectural PR2-Al (Dated 7108102) Ar hiteclural PR2-A2 (Dated 7/08102) 1255 Energy Park Drive St. Paul, MN 55108-5118 Phone: (651) 642-9200 Fax: (651) 642-1101 c 12: 21 PM POPE ASSOCIATES lNC NO. 4522 It i Pope Associates Inc. understanding that these responses satisfy the request for additional Int rmation as per the preliminary review letter prepared by the City of Prior Lake da ad June 14, 2002, R ert, if any additional information should be required, please feel free to contact me at 65 -842-9200. ..,) cc: Tom D~ty Denny Minske Brian Mundstock Bob Mueller Richard Johnson PAl File Norex Kraus-Anderson Sunde Engineering. Inc. Insites McConkey Johnson Soltermann, Inc. G; 1400\0204 7\corr\CityLtr7 -OS-02 .doc P. 3/7 ...' 12:2IPL~2!.:....ASSOCiATES INC,/ ~ ~ d\.. i ~y ~ v ~.. t1\.. ~""~ i , . "r"'"T. . .,-'-,.'']' -,. I. . -1' I ,.. "-,-x' 1t _.L ..'-,....,1 ~:s.'I,-.J"..r.. -i'...l...,-T' " "".I~'."' r"~'f"""[..L r''j....oT ~I - . "" ""T~I"T' H " ,,'_.I..,.~. '''C::- H Q'" Ll_ ".. ,"',-"c :c m _ .J.. I ~. I \,- (, _,:;r' ",.-L, -.--LT7..;r.;~ I "..",,,CR'l'T'TL ;{" ",I-r'''''''''C I.J.~",.. r:~'.;,.--" .ll".J1" ",.L,.....,.."., ,..,. ._..,,, ,.. . - -T~' "r;. I -... /. -"I-r' ."." f" . Sir," l'rf'E ;'X" GTP,6D.. .' , 31-&.' . _1- - - ,. ON,S/DE d: ROOFT~ -.A.. . .' . . 5EALTO.F~ DEd:; 4f2 "'" "" ." CEILfTolG(1 FiW'T5TOI"&I'~ . .. - .. .,. .,"\. . .'-" .-" f,~'"'''''' C:r:;::r,-'I~:r:;" - ...J..,- . .. ... - - .. -t . -. ~ I!llttl! : , . ." .. - ". ... "rJ: ,,' ,.J- " "F1-' F .IJ,.I, .,. ,"r'- ~"'-r' / \ "z\ /3\ 'l5.1J ~ "'~.A. ,.. .0 ^- ~ffi ROur- PLAN ~~ 1/16--1'-0- ~~~. l . J_ ':( ;:1. :[f NO 4522 .......... V P 4/7 ~r ~~ ",' ,. ,J,,-'-, '-r<.. ."..- , '..r; l'-.:'J:1.[",-Ly J-~' (A~.J 'J: '.,..,,,,,.,. .. . . ..J:lf"i'r ,. .r .r'-r' '" ,."';".1 ~J .,.~, 'iL~..r: '."r"" '''''''.,-'-,-'- jfD..ITT.1\. ~ '[:"'r-'-_"""/~ I~[.J' .....r .:r:'::r.~:r:o r"l--r:" .L r: \ :J .l.r' . ",. 'cr~<:;:J{i - ,-- "' ,,_ .r.: .. I.. 3'-&". r:\.:C~. . 2~< ~ ...\.l5.y AS.: _..~(~~. ;., [.,J, ~ :A S S 0 C I ATE S A~ fl'ECTS INYI!Rlo, DE/JGNEO$ ,.,,~~- s-rJ":i.:"iiil':.':":_"" ~~':I= II "" ~ ./.0 H .. .r:='-'-"'''r.L IfT"1' ".l .. -"- ::C:r:JT "7 r''','' . "'.."." "-I .-r'-TT,_,,,,,~. .J.. :m-- ~~~ ::C.".II'" 'r,.~ _ '",'''''-r.J.-,,, ::r~ .- <'L.,..l.l,.L, ' I i. . , :1.. __ ]".....'~. . . T~ (.....,.'-.,I'.,..cI"L: ,."r-._ ::r::;::r.'TI..'..... 1 ."J;:' ..c, ..... . . J .1. c'!.. ....,."",..2 H I- T . -..1 . :r;J'T 0" ,.t:r-r'T ..L"'-1:1-,-'-1\ . _ - _"," . , L...LJ___.' ". .. '" _i ~"'''r''C:::r,T1...I::'.I-'1..1l'J,,''J_'.' '_ . J.l:p:~"Q;;'1:+,.1 J ... """,,".~ Ff""F""'.-.'- '" .... .. , .1 .. . " .... . .",,- I ,.1: .,.~~ I ...L -, .. r- ,---, .::r.r' r.7'/As~ - ....r:L.'-r'T'-r~ " . V/Lr "1"::J]::::'I"T'~i.:r- l~1~""'" . < . '=r--LJ;,pL"J.r-J.',)':'r"'__'- .1..,...t.,.J.,..h,..l',"4- .... _ _ ~2\ /~ ) ~~ OFFICE BUILDING PRIOR lAKE, MN --....-....''....---.-1-------..... ...----.. .-.......-...-. ,LL"j"'''i''-r:t:r . "r'Xfo ~.l":["" L:rL - . -~"".1. ")'1. 4 ,.. ~ ~ 2 lIai.i.., 1lIII. Ill. ~141Ml141 P!lft ~..I, tftII ~, ~~M ~PR2-A1 o 12:22PM POPE ASSOCIATES INC NO. 4522 P. 5/7 &/e" T'rF "X" G'rF BD. IliD ElLI'6 AS REGI'D 21_&IX410"X , 3/411 1411. FI':AME UJI SMOKE GA!lI<ET KIT AND Su.EEF 2'-6"UJ X 4'-1Z)" H 1liD. DOOR, SELF-CLOSING S~ING LOADED HINGE6, PUfOI4 PULL I4AFlDWARE 6ENT STL FLATE TI4RESI-IOLD ~ DETAIL 3 11/2-.1'-0- lor;.;..: 1lIII. II. IlllJ.lMl ~..I, Dol. PMZ - 7~ II ~PR2-A2 OFFICE BUllDING PRI0R.lAKE. MN c I2:22PM Jul 8, 2002 Ro ert Hutchins Bui ding Official Ci of Prior Lake 16 00 Eagle Creek Ave. S. E. Pri r Lake, MN 55372 Re Net Free Ventilation Area Norn Office Building 5505 Cottonwood lane Prior Lake, Minnesota PAl Project: 41400.(12047 De r Robert, POPE ASSOCIATES INC On behalf of Norex Inc., Pope Associates is submitting for your records, A et Free Ventilation Area Summary. Ca culations: Tot I North Attic Area: uired NFVA: uired NFVA sq. in.: P vided Ridge Venting; P vided Soffit Venting: B,497 sJ. (8,497 x .0033) = 28.04 sJ. NFVA (28.04 sJ. x 144 sq. in.) = 4,037.76 sq. in. NFVA (28.04 s,f. l< 0.5) = 14.02 s.f. /2,018.88 sq. in. NFVA (207 U. x 18.5 sq. in.) = 3,829.5 sq. in. NFVA (28.04 x 0.5) = 14.02 s.f./2,018.88 sq. in. NFVA (471 Lt. X 10.25 sq. in.) = 4,827.75 sq. In. NFVA NO. 4522 P. 6/7 POPE ASSOCIATES Architect. Interior Designers 1255 Energy Park Drive St. Paul, MN 55108-5118 Phone: (651) 642-9200 Fax: (651) 642-1101 c 12:22PM I Core Attic Area: P vided Ridge Venting: I South Attic Area: uired NFVA: uired NFVA sq. in.: Pr vided Ridge Venting: R quired Soffit Venting: P vided Soffit Venting: POPE ASSOCIATES INC NO. 4522 P. 7/7 5.307 sJ. (5,037 x .0033) = 16.62 sJ. NFVA (16,62 sJ. x 144 sq. in.)" 2,393.58 sq. in. NFVA (16.62 s.t, II 0.5) "8.31 s.t./1,196.64 sq. in. NFVA (104 L.t, ll18,5 sq. in.) = 1,924 sq. in. NFVA (16.62x 0.5)" 8.31 s.f, /1.196.64 sq. in. NFVA (137 L.t. x 10.25 sq. in.) = 1,404.25 sq. In, NFVA 6,395 s J. (6.395 x .0033)" 21.10 sJ. NFVA (21.10 s.f. x 144 sq. in.)" 3,038.90 sq. in. NFVA (21.10 S.t.ll 0,5) = 10.5 s.f./1,519.2 sq. in. NFVA (161 Lt. x 18,5 sq, in.) = 2,978,5 sq. in. NFVA (21.10 II 0.5) = 10.5 s.t./1,519.2 sq, in, NFVA (352 L.t. x 10.25 sq. in.) = 3,608 sq. in. NFVA please teel free 10 call me at 651-642-9200 or via e-mail n,h.com wilh any questions re9arding this submittal. Si cerely. N cc Tom Ditty Denny Minske PAl File Norex Kraus-Anderson G: 1400\02047\eorrWentCalc6-13-02.doc .Ane Ka sier From: Sent: To: Subject: /'. , '-_J ie, (I' V '()(.c" (;, ,I Frank Boyles Monday, August 12, 2002 9:00 AM Bud Osmundson; Don Rye; Jane Kansier; Sue McDermott; Larry Poppler FW: Grainwood Circle --Origin 1 Message-- From: Su an Pace [mailto:space@halleland.com] Sent Frida ,August 09, 2002 3:00 PM To: JLang rst@lntregraonline.com Cc: master raftjim@ao1.com; clemair@CityofPRIORLAKE.com; FBoyles@CityofPRIORLAKE.com; Jhaugen@ ityofPRIORLAKE.com; jzieska@CityofPRIORLAKE.com; MgundlachOCityofPRIORLAKE.com Subject: G ainwood Circle The purpo e of this e-mail is to acknowledge receipt of your letter dated August 6, 2002. I know that the City Council is always co cerned when there are less than acrimonious relationship within neighborhoods. I also know that where appropria ,they are always willing to try to do what they properly can to help resolve conflicts. In the issu involving Grainwood Park there are two situations. The first relates to Lot 1 and whether the City may properly . pose of the land. That question turns on whether there is a basis to declare Lot 1 surplus property and to dispose of .t via sealed competitive bids. As I explained in my letter dated July 222, 2002, I do not believe there is a legal basis for e City to make the required findings that Lot 1 should be declared "surplus" property. This opinion has been further co . ed in the recent 2020 Vision and Strategic Plan developed by the community and accepted by the City Council at its August 5th meeting. Under the Natural Resources section of the Plan Goal 5 is to "[Adopt a program which ensures 1 e access and responsible lake utilization." The encro chment by the owner of Lot 2, Mr. Jeffrey Kennedy, onto the 10 foot parcel, dedicated to the residents of lots within Gr nwald Park, and also the encroachment onto Lot 1, dedicated to the public, is another matter. I can understan your clients frustration. This conflict appears to have been going on for a considerable amount of time. I will seek guidance from my client regarding the situation with Mr. Kennedy. *********** ******************************************************************* This mess ge and any attachments may contain information that is privileged, confidential and exempt from disclosure under ap .cable law. If you are not the intended recipient or authorized to receive for the recipient, you are notified that dissemina . on, distribution or copying of this message and any attachments is strictly prohibited. If you have received this message. error, please immediately advise the sender by reply e-mail and delete the message and any attachments. Thank yo . ********** ******************************************************************** 1 filE COpy May 3, 2002 Norex Attention: Tom Ditty 15815 Franklin Trail SE Prior Lake, MN 55372 RE: City of Prior Lake Review for Application Completeness for Site Plan Application for Norex Building Dear Mr. Ditty: On May 3, 2002, the City of Prior Lake determined all of the necessary submittals for the above application have been received. This letter serves as your official notification that the application is now complete. The DRC will now begin formal review of this request. We will notify you of any additional information or any changes to the plans that may be required. If necessary, we will schedule a DRC meeting with you to review this application. In accordance with Section 1108.900 of the City Zoning Ordinance, the Planning staff will notify you within 60 days, or by July 3, 2002, abut the action on this application. If you have questions relative to the review process or related issues, please contact me directly at 952-447-9810. Sincerely, C.<<~ ane Kansier, AICP Planning Coordinator cc: Nathan Miesen, Pope Architects DRC Members . 1:\02files\02siteplan\norex\complete.doc Page 1 1620 Eagle Creek Ave. S.E., Prior Lake, Minnesota 55372-1714 / Ph. (952) 447-4230 / Fax (952) 447-4245 AN EQUAL OPPORTUNITY EMPLOYER NO,,"""'4.' ---.-" . ~ ~_._-.\ ~ . ~ \ . . \ W W W t- :r- ~ -- ~~ I~~ giR"o.! ~ ~:'." ct zIi ...J ~ .- .. 00 :;t$ II -- _"U -'~ " . . . u' '!l!~~ .." ....Ia. z"! . '0 go .' ',I, ...!:!!::! -n '~. " x" . -. ;i~ ".. ~!~ ~~ .' ~~~ d. "tb1ll1K x.. . ~. ;;~ ~,.. :i: .!.! c 8 ~ ~ o o / < , I I ~L .C!~ ~( ~. \ ,I \ .. ~uu , ~~ 1 " ~~~ ;;11l1 ~~''l" " N N .f,' NI2l 'lUG ---':'fPIr'O"'OI'~"UO :" ;l"p -T 'p ~.'" ,x , w- ucss 'NW '3)tV1 YOIYd BOt: XOO 'O"d """S 1331118 "'10)1"'0 111:"" J.N3WJ.YVd30 ONIY33NlON3 3>1V1 UOIUd .:10 A.lIO ",,.... 'uu,nlU H31'ifM '8 H3M3S 3N\;fl aOOMNO.L.LO~ II-liB ''''8 .O"..UIU....".;." U'tl' BgW/Uyr UON ON NO""" .UO"N"'" .0 Inn .,,~ <l, IIU' ."~nl"""II"'V""""O'''''O'' Gu....... U"O , "" I n'<1 '''. .,....UIA 1001111I'..", ~::>II'O AI, no,," 10 If' u 'h.". U.....4......0.....,,0,.u..,:>... ,01l'.I..o" n'."N'''UU''''ou,,'''' 'UIlOIIU ,....n. "', \ \ \ . \ \ ~~ : .'~-U i- , I I i I i .0 * -. - r ,! T ..ere_I-' I ' I ~ I I I i I I ! .! I , , I: ~I ~ : I I m I ~ I .. 0- ." 00 dO ., " ~~ ~~~ ~:::~ . X" ....~~ ;;~tl ".- :::!! ci " 5~~ "dw 0I}~i= w.z >w_ ~~lil "- wtll~ ".0 00" ! , . , l ," . i ~ << > I ~. " " I ;~~ !e!;;:<: , .... 0 I'~ ~~ f...... d - _-J..J :; ~iii << , . . .- \ ~ ~~ ),.:~l:t : I ""~ \ ;;;\:l . ~!~ ; / /' . . . ., c cia: '" w_w ..Jwx....:I: ~;;:~....:;\l5o o ...-<.'.... ..:......1- "'......_=>Cla: Cl 0:: zo ffiig~9::;i.: Q....... ::I..JlL !5z~j~~ . ..O::..C). N ~i~~~~g :;;':l!>-:!E!'i!2!~ E~~~j~~ OUla::<..~ ..J ..,.... :;:ON ~g~~~~;;; l!l~....~~~: ~~i~S,,~~ _ lIJ U, - '<!!l~ffig~~g ~=~~~;:lU~ !!Id\i!ij~~'<~ ~~u>ii1~3:;;8 - ....~ i o CD en - ,N I ,..-i i , I iZ , I..~ .~ .~ Q-"'2(6 . D:O.OlI.2t1l 0 i.:::q-:oo.m.X .U:OI.CU.. __..IIi 01"tC6 a:l 0 0 aZ.JCII 0 OC"2ell 0.'2(0 1llI.,CD 0 O'"KI " or.lu ('"it& I i , .OC.tc6. o " " I , -OVU' l I I I I ! I 1 I OO.UII M'nl Ol"tU 0 0 110'([' . .. ""',[(6 00".1.&:& 01':',[11 I +, ! I g .1ll"On 10 oI:.ou U',.n . -:'O.'~'[6 :OII'_otlf c C -.-'M~lU U: c c . , .Ol":ua ":-00",;[1 .OS..O[II 'M',aU i I I I I .j-: I 01'0[6 'oa",llf& . ,,':<jl:,.. OClK6 --:'OI',OC6 - IllI ~lKlI "llO',QC5 Ol"U,. 'OO',OU .08'111:1 -llCl.~t6, . : 01 ~lUl . :-....:.g;ft2. t ~ '\ '" w I- <{ u o '" '" <{ ~ I I z 0 - ~ >N L wg ...IN Wll'i .J -N ~= Zf _<C C I ...I 1 - ~ I m ~ I I I I . I I R w w a ~lii . ~ Z III CI . I! I- ~~~ 0 OCo - ll" ~ ~~ <fl ~ !!!I- ~~~ b &~~~ ~ CI ~:r~ w~llj iil5 ~~ lii iil"-<flu (L liill' ~~~ liit'sCl =i~3 ~>-' ~~oc>- <( ~~ 1:;:r W -d5~1ll U ~ . <( O<fl- I11I IIIII II'~:I 3 =1"- (L~g I!!g <fl li:CI lii~ ~~~ 0= ~ en = ~ foEg~ <(- lll~ ~ I- '1'.... 11111= ~ ~~ Iltll' u~ ~O~ "'3 ~ ~~~-' ~g lLt:::!d ~\!i <( I111I III11 IIII.-~& ~' Z ii5I: - W ...; . . " + ~.. - I=-., . - . . -Sl ~IIIII~IIIII_ I" =>9 ,,9/, 1=1111 IIIII=- Z~ I1111 IIIL 11111- ~1:J ,,' oy EHllm J.:lI~3A "I>' mpjlSO<S:l ~~ IIV-,€ "I u9-,Z ng.,Z 11(2:1-,1 I- ~ W W <( III CI . <flCl ~ ~ OCo ii5 ll" ~~ !!!I- :rG~ ~ ~:R &w~ . ~ .\;,/1-- R:=i ~uj ~lIt iil~ii55 w~llI iilG ~~ ~g ~~ffi>- (L ~O~ liit'sCl <( -1-<( O<fl- WZ w<( -d5(L1ll U 1lI=i"- ~~~ <fl -'~ -'l;:!! >-Eli:CI I-~ wG~ :t_ :t_ ~~ w I.'lCl ~CI ~xg~ .\;,/= CI CI :r:::! :r-' ~;t u-t:::!:d ~O~ ~ i'-ifi d-,ifi ii5~~9 z~ oy ~~ llQ-.1 ,,~I-,I "I IIV-,€' "I>' IIf>,Z 'JJ.I:J .1.9 Q3Il1011'v' lH"'13H Wf1L.lIX'1W 110-,9